You are on page 1of 514

GE Fanuc Automation

Programmable Control Products

Logicmaster 90 Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programming Software

Users Manual
GFK -0466L September 1998

GFL-002

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication


Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment. This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Alarm Master CIMPLICITY CIMPLICITY90-ADS CIMPLICITY PowerTRA C VersaMax CIMSTAR GEnet Genius Genius PowerTRA C Helpmate Logicmaster Modelmaster ProLoop PROMACRO Series One Series Three Series Five Series Six Series 90 VuMaster Workmaster

Copyright 19891998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Preface
This manual describes the features that are used to create ladder logic user programs for Series 90t30 PLCs, Series 90t20 PLCs, and Series 90t Micro PLCs. These features are available with Release 9.02 of the Logicmastert 9030/20/Micro programming software.

Revisions to This Manual


Release 9.02 of Logicmaster and the Release 9 CPUs include several enhancements. Refer to the following sections for information about these new features. D There are new 350 and 360 series CPUs. One of the new features most of these new models offer is communications through embedded serial communications ports. Refer to page 1018 for information about configuring the ports. The 364 model CPU includes builtin TCP/IP Ethernet communications capabilities. Refer to pages 1021 and following for information about this feature. Also, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for Series 90t PLCs manual (GFK1541) for detailed information about this new CPU. There is a new function added to the instruction set: the Sequential Event Recorder (SER). There is a brief discussion of this function on page 313 of this manual and a detailed discussion in Chapter 4 of the Series 90t30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK0467K or later).

In addition, in our effort to improve the quality of Logicmaster documentation, there are clarifications and corrections in several places within this manual.

Content of This Manual


The information in this book is arranged as chapters that correspond to the main features of the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. This manual contains the following chapters: Chapter 1. Introduction: provides an overview of the features available with the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro programming software. After you read chapter 1, refer to the chapters that describe the functions you want to use. Chapter 2. Operation: explains what you need to know to install and start up the software. It also explains the format of the software screens. Chapter 3. Program Editing: describes program entry and edit features. Chapter 4. Reference Tables: describes how to display tables of reference values, change formats in reference tables, force references, and override bitoriented references. Chapter 5. PLC Control and Status: describes how to control and modify the operation of a connected PLC. These features include how to change the PLC operating state,
GFK0466L iii

Preface
display and access PLC privilege levels, display and clear PLC and I/O faults, display PLC and program memory usage, display configured reference sizes, and modify sweep parameters. Chapter 6. Programmer Setup: explains how to set up the programmer for communication with the PLC, and how to select the programmer operating mode. Chapter 7. Program Folders: describes how to create, select, rename, modify, copy, or delete program folders. Chapter 8. Program Utilities: describes how to use program utility functions to transfer programs and tables between the programmer and the PLC, to compare programs and data in the programmer with programs and data in the PLC, and to clear PLC memory. This chapter also describes how to transfer a program, register table, and configuration between the PLC and EEPROM (or Flash), and to compare a program, register table, or configuration in the PLC with a program, register table, or configuration in EEPROM. Chapter 9. Print Functions: describes how to use the print functions to enter printer parameters, create files containing information to be printed, and print copies of programs, reference tables, and display screens. Chapter 10. I/O Configuration: describes how to use the configuration software to configure I/O modules. Chapter 11. CPU Configuration: describes how to use the configuration software to set the operating characteristics of the CPU.

iv

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Preface
This manual contains the following appendices: Appendix A. Programming Lesson: provides a sample programming lesson with simple instructions for creating a program folder, creating a program, entering a variable declaration, adding ladder logic to the program, printing the program, and exiting the programmer. Appendix B. Configuration Lesson: provides a sample configuration lesson with simple instructions for creating a program folder and configuring various modules. Appendix C. Programmer Environment Setup: describes how to modify the setup parameters. Appendix D. User Command Menu: describes how to maintain a file of DOSexecutable commands outside of the Logicmaster software packages. Appendix E. Instruction Mnemonics: lists mnemonics that can be typed to display program instructions while searching through or editing a program. Appendix F. Key Functions: lists the special keyboard assignments used for the Logicmaster 90 software. Appendix G. Files Created with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software: describes the files created by Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software that are associated with the program or folder. Appendix H. Common User Errors: describes common problems which may occur and the corrective action to take. Appendix I. Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format: describes the format and requirements you need to consider when using the importing or exporting feature for Variable Declarations.

GFK0466L

Preface

Preface Related Publications


Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK0467). Logicmaster 90 Series 9030 and 9020 Important Product Information (GFK0468). Series 9030 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFK0356). Series 9020 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFK0551). Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual (GFK0898). Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User's Manual (GFK-0255). Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User's Manual (GFK0487). CIMPLICITY 90ADS Alphanumeric Display System User's Manual (GFK0499). CIMPLICITY 90ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual (GFK0641). Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Data Sheet (GFK0521). Series 9030 High Speed Counter User's Manual (GFK0293). Series 9030 and 9020 PLC HandHeld Programmer User's Manual (GFK0402). Power Mate APM for Series 9030 PLC Standard Mode User's Manual (GFK0840). Power Mate APM for Series 9030 PLC Follower Mode User's Manual (GFK0781). Series 9030 Genius Communications Module User's Manual (GFK0412). Series 9030 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User's Manual (GFK0695). Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User's Manual (GFK-0582). Series 90 Programmable Controller RS422/RS485 to RS232 Converter Data Sheet (GFK-0550). Series 9030 Genius Bus Controller User's Manual (GFK1034). Series 9070 FIP Bus Controller User's Manual (GFK1038). Series 9030 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User's Manual (GFK1037). Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System Genius Bus Interface Unit User's Manual (GFK0825). Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller User's Manual (GFK1065).

vi

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Preface We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions


At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader's Comment Card located on the next page.

David Bruton Sr. Technical Writer

GFK0466L

Preface

vii

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You Will Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The MSDOS Version Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 11
12 13 13 13 13

Section 2: Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Display and Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Response to Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
14 14 14 14 14 15

Section 3: Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Creating or Editing a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Tables of Reference Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop PLC Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Display and Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Sweep Time Display and Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC and Program Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up PLC Communications Using a WSI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up PLC Serial Communications for Standard Serial COM Ports Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Programs and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
16 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 110 110

Chapter 2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Hardware Setup (WSI Version) ..................

21 22
22 22 22
ix

Installing the Work Station Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

Contents
Section 2: Hardware Setup (Standard Serial Communications Version) Section 3: Software Installation .......... 23 24
24 26 26 27 28 212 213

...........................

AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Logicmaster Under Windowsr 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Logicmaster Under Windows NTt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Other Software with the CONFIG.SYS File for Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4: Startup/Exit

...................................

216
217 218 219 221

Starting the Programming or Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting (Quitting) the Programming or Configuration Software . . . . . . . Programming Software Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Software Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 5: Keyboard Functions

............................

224
224 224 224 225 225 225 226

Keyboards Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Macros (Teach Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing Back a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pausing the Playback of a Teach Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Teach File to Run Software from an MSDOS Batch File . . . . . . .

Section 6: Screen Format

.................................

227
227 228 228 228 229 230

Function Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC/Programmer Status: Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3

Program Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Ladder Logic Program Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Data Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Data Zoom Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31 32
316 316

Section 2: Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Creating or Editing Program Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of a Ladder Logic Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ladder Logic Language Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

318
319 319 320
x

Contents
Section 3: Program Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Logic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting Rung Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323
323 324 327 329 329

Section 4: Program Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Entering Nicknames and Reference Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330
331

Section 5: Variable Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Displaying the Variable Declaration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Variable Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut/Pasting Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Inserting References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Identifier Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing to and Exporting from the Variable Declarations Table . . . . . Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing SNF Formatted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting SNF (CSV) Formatted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

333
334 336 337 339 339 339 339 339 340 340 341 341 341 343

Section 6: Rung Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Inserting a Rung Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UserDefined Footers in Listings Creating Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a New Page of Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Longer Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

346
346 347 350 351 351 351

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xi

Contents
Section 7: Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 8: Subroutine Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Subroutine Block Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming into Subroutine Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking/Unlocking Subroutines .................................

352 357
358 358 359 359 359 359 360

Locking a Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Unlocking a Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Permanently Locking a Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Displaying the Lock Status of the Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Periodic Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing a Periodic Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions on Use of the Periodic Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 365 366

GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xii

Contents
Section 9: Rung Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

367
369

Entering Insert or Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Entering Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Entering/Modifying Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Moving the Cursor within a Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Entering a Reference Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Entering Nicknames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Using Vertical and Horizontal Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Continuation Coils and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 373

Deleting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Using Open Space Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Completing (Accepting) Rung Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Entering an Instruction Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Viewing Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting Selected Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pasting Previously Cut Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Selected Rungs to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Including Rungs from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Space Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 376 377 378 379 380 381 382

Move Logic Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Move Logic Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Delete Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Delete Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Delete Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Increment/Decrement Reference Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoNext Highest Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 390 Incrementing/Decrementing within a Rung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Section 10: Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Coil Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Inserting References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

392
392 396

Section 11: Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Using Search and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implicit Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by Reference Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Search for a Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

398
3101 3103 3103 3103
xiii

Contents
Section 12: Online Editing/Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3104

Inserting or Editing Rungs (Block Edit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3104 Block Edit (Bumpless") Run Mode Store Function (6.61 or Later CPUs) ........................................................ 3104 Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3105 Modifying Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3110 Using the Modify Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3111 Modifying a Reference Address or Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3111 Forcing and Overriding Discrete References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3113 Changing Register Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3114

Chapter 4

Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Displaying Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Displaying a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Cursor in a Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41 42
43 43 43

Section 2: Changing Reference Table Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Changing a Register Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASCII String Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Reference Display Mode (ALTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forcing a Discrete Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Values of a Word of Discrete References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44
44 45 47 48 48

Section 3: Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49
410 410

Section 4: Changing Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Discrete Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Format of a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer/Counter Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning to Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411
411 412 413 415 415 417 418 419

Section 5: Mixed Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Editing the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Mixed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer/Counter Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

420
421 422 423 424 424
xiv

Contents
Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run/Stop the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Privilege Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Changing, or Removing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling/Disabling Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Faults in the PLC Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming into the PLC Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Faults in the I/O Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming into the I/O Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Memory Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configured Reference Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC CPU Sweep Control .......................................

51
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 510 511 511 512 513 513 514 515 516 517 518 519

Active Constant Sweep Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Chapter 6

Programmer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Programmer Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61 62
62

GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xv

Contents
Section 2: Selecting SNP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 3: PLC Communications Serial Port Setup
Standard Serial COM Port

63 64
64 65 65 66 67 68 69 610 611 611 612 612 612 613 614 615 616 616 617 618 618

...........

......................................

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver ............. MSDOS Memory Areas Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Driver Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Logicmaster 90 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port ............................ Setting Up the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying File Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Usage Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Manager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Conventional Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or Higher Computer . Tested Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCP/IP Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4: WSI Serial Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Setting Up a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying File Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

619
620 620 620 620

Section 5: View Modes Setup (ALTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

621

Changing the View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xvi

Contents
Section 6: Serial Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7 Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Folder Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEMP Program Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Program Folder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting/Creating Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Previously Created Folder with a New 351 or 352 (or Later) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoSelect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking/Unlocking Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Program Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying to Another Folder on the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

623 71
71 72 72 72 74 74 75 76 77 78 79 711 712 713 714 714 715

Chapter 8

Program Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading from PLC to Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Reference Tables from the PLC to Save in the Computer Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing to PLC from Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Mode Store Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying a Program with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing PLC Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Reference Override Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Considerations for Clearing Reference Overrides . . . . . . Read/Write/Verify EEPROM/Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81
83 85 85 88 89 811 812 812 813

Chapter 9

Print Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91
92

Section 1: Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Changing Setup Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93
93 94

Section 2: Selecting a Screen Print Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Sending Screen Prints to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Screens to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

95
95 96
xvii

Contents
Section 3: Print Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts for Printing Program Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

97
98 99 910

Section 4: Print Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 5: Print Coil References Section 6: Print Configuration .......................... ............................

914 916 918


919 920

Accessing the Print Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pagination Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 7: Print Function Examples

.......................

921 101 102 104


106 106 107 107 107 107 108 108

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 1: Default Configuration .......................... ....

Section 2: Displaying the I/O Configuration Rack Screen

Configuration Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Configuration from Slot to Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Configuration of a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Module with Another of the Same Type . . . . . . . . Replacing the Module with One of a Different Type . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Configuration of a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Module to Another Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Configuration to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 3: Configuring the CPU

...........................
...........

109
1013 1017 1018 1018 1021 1021 1024

Selecting a Different CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run/Stop Switch Configuration (350 and higher CPUs) Port Configuration for 351, 352, and 363 CPUs Memory Protection Configuration for 350 and Higher CPUs . . . . . . . . . ................. TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Parameters for the 364 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UserConfigurable Memory Limits for 351 and Higher CPUs ........

Section 4: Selecting the Base Rack

........................

1026
1029 1029

Base Rack Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Expansion Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 5: Configuring the Model 211 CPU

.................

1031
1033
xviii

I/O Base Selection for the CPU 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

Contents
Section 6: Configuring a Micro PLC ...................... 1036
1042 1043 1044

Expansion Units for the Micro PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro PLC Memory Configuration Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Rules and Miscellaneous Information . . . . . . . . .

Section 7: Configuring 9030 I/O Modules

..................

1045
1047 1048 1049

Configuring Generic I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an I/O Link Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an I/O Link Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 8: Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC Section 9: Configuring a PCM Module

..........

1050
1056

Configuring the Embedded HSC for a CPU 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.....................

1057
1058 1059 1059 1060 1061 1062 1062 1062 1062

Configuring a PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM CFG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROG PRT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM ONLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROG/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM/PROG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASIC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAS/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 10: Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module Section 11: Configuring a CMM Module

.........

1063
1063

Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

...................

1067
1067 1068 1069 1070 1070 1070 1071 1072 1072 1072 1072

Configuring a CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM ONLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTU ONLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM/RTU Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTU/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNP ONLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNP/CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM/SNP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNP/RTU Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTU/SNP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 12: Configuring a Motion Product (Formerly Configuring an APM) . . . . . . . .


Configuring a Single Axis Motion Mate APM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

1073
1074
xix

Contents
Section 13: Configuring an ADC Module .................. 1082 1083
1085

Section 14: Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM . . . . . . . . . . .


Enhanced Genius Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 15: Configuring a Genius Bus Controller

............

1088 1090
1092

Section 16: Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module


Other Configuration Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 17: Configuring an Analog Combo Module

..........

1094
1095 1096

Other Configuration Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Combo Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 18: Configuring a ThirdParty Module Section 19: Configuration Reference View

.............

1099 10101
10102 10103 10103 10104 10105

.................

Displaying the Reference View Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Rack Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overlapping References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11 CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Storing the CPU Configuration to the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the PLC Date and Time ....................... SNP ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the SNP ID Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Memory Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurable Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111
111 112 113 114 114 115 115

Appendix A Programming Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting the Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Program Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering a Variable Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Ladder Logic to the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Subroutine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Program .......................................... Ending the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

A1
A1 A1 A1 A2 A4 A5 A7 A16 A23 A24
xx

Contents
Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Program Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Rack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a 9030 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Genius Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending the Lesson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B1
B1 B1 B2 B4 B5 B7 B10 B11

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Displaying the Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Terminal and Printer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Palette Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Disk Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Serial COM Port Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Serial COM Port and Driver Memory Area . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications Options Both WSI and Serial COM Port Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications WSI Version with Configurable Interrupt Request . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Communications WSI Version with NonConfigurable Interrupt Request . . . . . . . Saving the Programmer Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C1
C1 C3 C4 C5 C6 C6 C6 C7 C8 C9 C9

Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F User Command Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the User Command Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a COMENU.DAT file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Comenu Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D1 E1 F1
F1 F2 F3

Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Files in the Program Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Files in the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Reference Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK0466L Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

G1
G2 G4 G4
xxi

Contents
Appendix H Common User Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Message: File System Error" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Read/Write PLC Initialization Aborted" . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Constant Out of Range" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: "Invalid CPU" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: "No Communications" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Install the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Comm Driver Not Loaded" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Output is Garbled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Port/File Access Denied" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Software Error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Busy Message Displayed After Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trouble Communicating with the Series 9030 or Series 9020 PLC Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board Port" Error Message: Error Loading Code into WSI Board" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H1
H1 H1 H1 H1 H2 H2 H2 H2 H3 H3 H3 H3

H4

Appendix I

Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format and SNF Format . . . . General SNF Format Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header Section Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Names Section Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Section Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Header Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Field Names Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I1
I1 I1 I2 I2 I3 I3 I4

GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

xxii

restart lowapp ARestart oddapp: ARestarts for autonumbers that do not restart in each chapter. figure bi level 1, reset table_big level 1, reset chap_big level 1, reset1 Lowapp Alwbox restart evenap:A1app_big level 1, resetA figure_ap level 1, reset table_ap level 1, reset figure level 1, reset table level 1, reset Table 1. these restarts oddbox reset: 1evenbox reset: 1must be in the header frame of chapter 1. a:ebx, l 1 resetA a:obx:l 1, resetA a:bigbx level 1 resetA a:ftr level 1 resetA c:ebx, l 1 reset1 c:obx:l 1, reset1 c:bigbx level 1 reset1 c:ftr level 1 reset1 Reminders for autonumbers that need to be restarted manually (first instance will always be 4) let_in level 1: A. B. C. letter level 1:A.B.C. num level 1: 1. 2. 3. num_in level 1: 1. 2. 3. rom_in level 1: I. II. III. roman level 1: I. II. III. steps level 1: 1. 2. 3.

Chapter

1 Introduction

Section 1: Product Overview


Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software is part of a family of products used to configure and program the full line of Series 90-30, Series 90-20, and Micro programmable controllers. Configuration is the process of assigning logical addresses, as well as other characteristics, to the hardware modules in the system. It may be done either before or after programming, using the configuration software; however, it is recommended that configuration be done first. Programming consists of creating an application program for a PLC. Because Series 90-30 PLCs, Series 90-20 PLCs, and Micro PLCs have a common instruction set, all can be programmed using this software.

Note
In this manual, the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software refers to using a Work Station Interface Board in the programmer to provide serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. The standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software refers to using ports COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 instead of the Work Station Interface Board.

GFK-0466L

1-1

1
What You Will Need
To run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, you will need:

A computer with a hard disk:

h A Workmaster II industrial computer with a 101-key keyboard, or h A personal computer with an Intel 80386 or higher processor and a minimum of
2 Megabytes of memory, or

h A Zenith Mastersport SL notebook computer. D D


At least 4 Megabytes of free disk space. Both the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Release 5 WSI and the Standard Serial COM Port versions require a minimum of 520 KB (532,480 bytes) of available DOS application memory in order to run. The Standard Serial COM Port version requires either a minimum of 564 KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS application memory, or 520 KB (532,480 bytes) of available DOS application memory and 42 KB of available High Memory Area, Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory for the COM port driver (see page 6-6 and following for details about the Standard Serial COM Port version and memory management). Both versions require a minimum 1024 KBofLotus/Intel/MicrosoftExpanded Memory (LIM EMS 3.2 or higher) for optimum performance. If additional DOS application memory (also called low memory) is needed, system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will occur. Remove any unneeded TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs and any unnecessary device drivers from the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files to make more memory available. For additional information, see chapter 2, section 3, of this manual.

Zenith and Mastersport are trademarks of Zenith Data Systems Corporation. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

1-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

1
The MS-DOS Version Needed
To run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, MS-DOS Version 5.0 (or higher) must be installed on your computer. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provides foreign keyboard support, depending on the configuration of MS-DOS residing on the host computer. Consult your MS-DOS Users Manual for information on configuring for your country.

Help Screens
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. To access the Help screens, press ALT-H for help, ALT-I for instruction mnemonic help, or ALT-K for key help.

Key Functions
Appendix E, Key Functions, lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. Appendix E also contains a perforated Help card which can be removed from this manual. This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help.

Before You Begin


You will find Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software easy to use and to understand. When you are ready to begin, turn to chapter 2. It will tell you:

D D D D

How to install the software in your computer. How to start up the software. How to use your computers keyboard to perform special programming functions. How to enter data, move the cursor, and read the status information on your screen.

After starting up the software, try the short programming lesson in appendix A and the configuration lesson in appendix B. When you are ready to use the programming software to create a program, monitor a system, or perform any of its other functions, you will find instructions in other chapters of this book.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-3

Section 2: Configuration Software

CPU Configuration
Configuration software is used to display and modify the characteristics of the CPU (such as memory allocation, PLC ID, and time of day). Section 3 of chapter 10 explains how to complete the CPU configuration for your system. This will set up or change the system features described below.

PLC Time and Date


The PLC maintains the current time and date. These settings can be displayed and changed using the CPU configuration function in Model 331 or higher CPUs. A time-of-day clock is not available in CPU Models 321, 323, 311, 313, 211, nor in Micro CPUs Models 004 and lower.

PLC Memory Allocation


You can display the current memory allocated to both discrete references and register references.

Fault Display and Clearing


When the programmer is monitoring a PLC, it displays faults that are stored in the PLC fault table. All faults are identified by time, date, and location. Faults can be cleared from the fault table display.

Note
CPU Models 321, 323, 311, 313, 211, and Micro CPUs Models 004 and lower do not support a time-of-day clock. Entries for CPU date and time are displayed as 00-00 00:00:00 in the fault tables.

System Response to Faults


To assure safe operation of the control system, the PLC must be able to respond appropriately to certain types of faults. Fatal faults cause the CPU to set fault references and then go to STOP mode. Diagnostic faults cause the CPU to set fault references, but the PLC keeps operating.

1-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

1
I/O Configuration
The I/O configuration function is used to describe the modules that are present in the PLC racks, to assign logical addresses, and select options for individual modules. These logical addresses are independent of physical location or function. Chapter 10 explains how to complete the I/O configuration for your system. The I/O configuration rack screen represents the appearance of the Series 90-30 I/O rack. Use the Next and Previous page keys, or the Up and Down cursor keys, to display another rack. Then use the Left and Right cursor keys to move the cursor to the slot to be displayed or configured.

To complete the I/O configuration, you will: 1. 2. Select the module present in each slot. Assign each module a reference address. The configuration software automatically supplies the next highest reference address for each module; however, this address may be changed. For some modules, you may also select options, such as the counter type for a High Speed Counter Module.

3.

Editing features make it easy to copy, move, replace, delete, or undelete configurations.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-5

Section 3: Programming Software

Creating or Editing a Program


Chapter, Program Editing, describes how to create and edit programs. The basic elements of a program are shown when the programming screen is first selected:

Marker
Variable Declarations Block Declarations

Description
To access the variable declaration table, move the cursor to this marker and press Zoom (F10). Nicknames and reference descriptions can then be entered in the table. A program can include more than one block of logic. Additional blocks, known as subroutines, can be called from other blocks. When that is done, blocks must be declared before they are called. The main block has a block declaration table. This table lists all blocks which are part of the complete program. Blocks do not have block declaration tables. However, blocks can be called from the main block or from any block in the program. All logic is placed between these two markers. To enter logic, place the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker and press Insert (F1).

Start/End of ProgramLogic

1-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

1
Editing functions include rung insert/edit, select, cut, delete, paste, include, and write. In addition, search and goto functions are provided to position the cursor on a particular rung or element. An optional feature of the search function is the replacement of the search target with a user-specified element and/or reference address. Chapter 3, section 4, Program Annotation, describes how annotation can be added to a program to make the program easier to read and understand. Three types of annotation (nicknames, reference descriptions, and rung comments) are supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

Displaying Tables of Reference Values


Chapter 4, Reference Tables, explains how to use the reference tables feature to display the current values of program references. If the programmer is connected to a PLC and in ONLINE or MONITOR mode, the values shown in the table are from the PLC. In OFFLINE mode, they are from the current folder. There are separate tables for each type of program reference; for example, all discrete inputs (%I), all discrete outputs (%Q), and all registers (%R). In addition, there are 99 user-defined tables called mixed reference tables. The format of individual items or an entire reference table can easily be changed to units that are suitable to your application. You can also return a standard reference table to its default format and fill the table locations with zero.

Start/Stop PLC Execution


PLC program execution is started or stopped from the Run/Stop PLC screen, or by pressing ALT-R from any screen. For more information, refer to chapter 5, PLC Control and Status.

Fault Display and Clearing


When the programmer computer is monitoring an operating PLC system, any faults that have occurred are displayed in one of two fault tables. PLC faults are listed in the PLC fault table. Faults from the I/O system are listed in the I/O fault table. All faults are identified by time, date, and location. Additional information about each fault can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the fault in the fault table and pressing the Zoom (F10) softkey. Faults can be cleared from the fault table displays. For information about the PLC and I/O fault tables, refer to chapter 5, PLC Control and Status.

PLC Sweep Time Display and Change


Chapter 5, PLC Control and Status, explains how to use the programming software to:

D D D D

Display the current CPU sweep time. This is the amount of time required for one complete cycle of program execution, I/O scan, communications windows, and other functions. See whether or not CONSTANT SWEEP TIME mode is enabled, and read its setting. Display the time period of the watchdog timer. This timer is used to shut down the CPU if the sweep time is too long. Display the times currently allocated for the programmer window and the system communications window.
1-7

GFK-0466L

Chapter 1 Introduction

1
PLC and Program Memory Information
Chapter 5, PLC Control and Status, also explains how to display information about:

D D D D

PLC memory size. PLC memory used and available. Program memory used for logic, data, declarations, and annotation. Memory used for configured program references.

Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode


Both the programmer and the configuration software operate in three modes: OFFLINE, MONITOR, and ONLINE. In OFFLINE mode, no data transfer takes place between the computer and the PLC. Programs and configuration data may conveniently be developed in OFFLINE mode, with or without the computer connected to a PLC. In MONITOR mode, if communications have been established between the computer and the PLC, the computer can read data from the PLC but may not transfer data to it. With communications established in ONLINE mode, programs and other data can be transferred between the PLC and the computer. If you are using a Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer, you may configure the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to use the keyswitch to select the operating mode. For those computers without a keyswitch, or if the keyswitch is not enabled, mode selection can be made by:

D D

Pressing the ALT and M keys simultaneously. Repeatedly pressing ALT-M switches the operating mode from OFFLINE to MONITOR to ONLINE and then back to OFFLINE. Going to the Programmer Setup screen (Shift-F7) and selecting an operating mode. For more information on using the Programmer Setup screen to select the operating mode, refer to chapter 6, Programmer Setup.

System Security
Security for configuration and program functions consists of:

D D D D

A range of four privilege levels for the PLC, which may be protected using passwords. A software lock that can be applied to individual program folders. A selectable operating mode. A software lock that can be applied to individual subroutine blocks.

Passwords are a configurable feature of the Series 90-30, 90-20, and Micro PLC. Their purpose is to provide different levels of access privilege for the PLC when the programmer is in ONLINE mode. Passwords may not be set, or the password access (privilege) level may not be changed, when the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. The use of passwords is optional and may be set up using the status functions in the configurator. Passwords may be used to restrict changing I/O and PLC configuration data, changing programs, and clearing faults. Chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks, describes how individual subroutine blocks may be locked and unlocked. Chapter 5, PLC Control and Status, describes the programmers privilege levels and explains how to enter passwords. Chapter 5 also describes how passwords are specified.
1-8 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

1
Program folders can be protected to prevent accidental changes to program and configuration information. Each program folder can be either locked or unlocked. After a folder is locked, its contents cannot be changed or deleted. For more information on locking program folders, see chapter 7, Program Folders.

Setting Up PLC Communications Using a WSI Board


For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, the serial port on the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board in the programmer provides serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. The COMSET serial port setup function is used to configure the WSI serial port, and to save or recall those configurations from disk files. Refer to chapter 6, Programmer Setup, for instructions on WSI serial port setup.

Setting Up PLC Serial Communications for Standard Serial COM Ports


For the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 serial port may be set up to provide serial communications between the programmer and the attached PLC. The COMSET serial port setup is used to configure the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 serial port, and to save or recall those configurations from disk files. Refer to chapter 6, Programmer Setup, for instructions on PLC communications serial port setup.

Program Folders
Each program and the corresponding configuration is assigned to a subdirectory called a program folder. Both the configuration software and the programming software use a set of program utility functions to create and maintain program folders. Chapter 7, Program Folders, explains how to use the program folder functions to:

D D D D D D D D D

Select another program folder. Create a new program folder. Delete an unneeded program folder. Rename a program folder. Make a backup copy of the current program folder. Restore a program folder with its backup copy. Clear the contents of the current program folder. Lock/unlock a program folder. Copy the contents of one program folder into the current program folder.

Application programs and related files can be stored on the same hard disk as the software. They can also be copied using Logicmaster folder utilities to floppy disks for portability or for independent storage.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-9

1
Transferring Programs
The program utility functions, described in chapter 8, Program Utilities, are used to:

D D D D D

Transfer programs and configuration between the PLC and the programmer. Clear part or all of the program and/or configuration from PLC memory. Compare a program or configuration in the PLC with the current folder to determine if they are the same. Transfer a program, register (%R) table, and configuration between the PLC and EEPROM. Compare a program, register (%R) table, or configuration in the PLC with EEPROM.

Printing Programs and Configuration


The programming software includes a complete set of print functions. You can select the contents and format of the printout. In addition, you can print cross references for the references used in the program. You can also print copies of your system configuration by using the print function in the configuration software. Refer to chapter 9, section 5, Print Configuration, for information about printing configuration screens.

1-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Chapter

2 Operation
section level 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

This chapter explains what you will need to know to install and start up the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. It also explains keyboard use and content of the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwarescreens. Chapter 2 contains the following sections: Section
1

Title
Hardware Setup (WSI Version) Hardware Setup (Standard Serial CommunicationsVersion) SoftwareInstallation

Description
Describes the two Work Station Interface Boards which are available. Section 1 also provides information on grounding and cabling. Describes the serial card which must be installed in your computer in order to use the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Explains how to install the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software on your computer s hard disk. Describes how to start up Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Describes keyboard functions in the Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwareenvironment. Shows the format of the display screen and describes the information that appears.

Page
2-2

2-3

2-4

4 5

Startup/Exit Keyboard Functions

2-16 2-24

Screen Format

2-27

GFK-0466L

2-1

Section 1: Hardware Setup (WSI Version)

Installing the Work Station Interface Board


The Work Station Interface (WSI) Board provides a high-performance serial interface between a Series 90-30 or Series 90-20 PLC and the programmer for the WSI version of Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. There are two Work Station Interface Boards available; one is for an AT-type computer, and the other is for a PS/2-type computer. The WSI Board is included as part of a package with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software. When a Workmaster II computer is ordered as the programming device, the WSI Board is installed at the factory. For installation instructions on other programming devices, consult the computer manufacturers instructions for option boards.

Grounding
Be sure the computer has a ground connection in common with the CPU rack. This is usually done by connecting the programmer computer to the same power source (with the same ground reference point) as the rack.

Warning
If the programmer is not connected as described above, damage to the Work Station Interface Board can occur. Erratic control operation may also result. If the programmer is online to an operating system, possible erratic operation may cause conditions which are hazardous to personnel and equipment.

Cabling
The communications cable that connects the computer to the PLC is a shielded twisted pair cable with a 3-pin D connector on each end. The maximum length for this cable is 50 feet. After installing the Work Station Interface Board in your computer, connect the computer to the PLC by first attaching the cable to the Work Station Interface Board and then to the port on the rack power supply.

2-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 2: Hardware Setup (Standard Serial Communications Version)


If you have the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro version of software which communicates with the PLC using the standard serial communication ports, a serial card with COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 must be installed in the computer in order to communicate with the PLC. Refer to GFK-0356, Series 90-30 Programmable Controller Users Manual, or GFK-0551, Series 90-20 Programmable Controller Users Manual, for instructions on establishing a serial connection between the Series 90-30, Series 90-20, or Micro PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer, without having a Work Station Interface Board installed in the computer.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-3

Section 3: Software Installation


To use Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, it must be installed on the programmer computer s hard disk. MS-DOS Version 5.0 or higher must already exist on the hard disk. The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro installation procedure creates three subdirectories on the hard disk: Software Version
WSI

Subdirectories Created
\LM90 \LM90\P30 \LM90\C30 \LM90 \LM90\P30S \LM90\C30S

Standardserial communications

AUTOEXEC.BA T and CONFIG.SYS Files


Before starting to install Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, check the content of your hard disk root directory to see whether the files CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT are present. Operation of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software requires these files to be present. If they are not, they are installed automatically. If your hard disk already has these two files, you may be asked during installation whether the install process should modify them. If you prefer, you can edit your existing files for use with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The CONFIG.SYS (System Configuration) file is a short, readable file that describes the configuration of MS-DOS. Different software packages may use different system configurations. For all Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro applications, the file must contain at least these two lines: Files = 20 Buffers = 40 If you want to check the content of an existing CONFIG.SYS file, you can use the TYPE command. (Recommended buffer size is 40; minimum is 15.)

The WSI version of Logicmaster 90-70 software requires a minimum of 520 KB (532,480) bytes of available MS-DOS application memory in order to run. The Standard Serial COM Port version requires either a minimum of 564 KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS application memory, or 520 KB (532,480 bytes) of available DOS application memory and 42 KB of available High Memory Area, Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory for the COM port driver (see page 6-6 and following for details about the Standard Serial COM Port version and memory management). Both versions require a minimum 1024 KBofLotus/Intel/MicrosoftExpanded Memory (LIM EMS 3.2 or higher) for optimum performance. If additional DOS application memory (also called low memory or conventional memory) is needed, system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will occur. Remove any unneeded

2-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs and any unnecessary device drivers from the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files to make more memory available. The following configurations will assist you in setting up your computer system to run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software optimally on 386/486 computers with a minimum of 2 MB RAM. LM90-30/20/Micro Software (Standard MS-DOS Version 5.0)
CONFIG.SYS

Configuration
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS DOS=HIGH ,UMB DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE 1024 RAM X=CE00CFFF FILES=20 BUFFERS=40

Note
The above EMM386.EXE switch X=CE00CFFF is used to reserve this area of memory for the Series 90-30/20/Micro WSI card. If the computer does not have a WSI card, the X= CE00 CFFF is not required; however, the EMM386.EXE 1024 RAM specification enhances performance and may be necessary if you have over 537 MB of free hard disk space (see next paragraph below). If you have less than 537 MB of free hard disk space, the special precautions discussed below are unnecessary. If you have over 537 MB of free hard disk space and you have the statementDEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXENOEMS in your CONFIG.SYS, you will receive the following error: (00032) An unknown error occurred during install initialization. To prevent this error. from occurring, you must specify Expanded Memory in your CONFIG.SYS, e.g., DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE 1024 RAM. If you are using a commercial memory manager, such as QEMM or 386MAX , this precaution may not be necessary. (See IPI GFK-0350 which comes with this Logicmaster release for examples of tested configurations using QEMM and 386MAX .)

In addition, some folders may require additional memory. If additional memory is required, system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000 will be displayed. Check the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files to remove any device drivers and Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs in order to free more RAM. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not require the ANSI.SYS device driver. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file must have (drive ID):\LM90 added to the existing path. (drive ID) is the letter which corresponds to the hard disk drive where Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareisinstalled. If you need to run Version 4.01 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software from a disk that does not contain the software, add this to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: SET $PLCROOT=(drive ID):\LM90

t 386MAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc. t QEMM-386 and QRAM are trademarks of Quarterdeck Office Systems.
GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-5

2
Installing Logicmaster Under Windowsr 95/98
You can run Logicmaster under Windows 95 or 98, but you cannot install it without rebooting into DOS mode. Although Windows 95 and Windows 98 support most standard DOS programs, the Logicmaster distribution diskettes contain a copy protection track that cannot be read using normal DOS file services. You must shut down the Windows 95/98 operating system and restart the computer in DOS mode before running the Logicmaster 90 Install program for both Logicmaster and SFC. Follow these steps for a successful installation.

D D D D D D

Click the Windows 95/98 Start button and select Shut Down. From the Shut Down dialog box, select the Restart the computer in MS-DOS mode option and press Enter. At the DOS prompt, insert the first Logicmaster distribution diskette and type A: (or B:), press Enter, then type INSTALL. Proceed with the standard installation. Configure your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files as discussed previously. Restart your computer.

Installing Logicmaster Under Windows NTt


You can run Logicmaster under Windows NT, but you cannot install it without

going into DOS mode. To do so, restart your computer and select the option that takes you into standard DOS mode. Then follow the steps shown above for Windows 95/98 beginning with the third step.
If you do not have MS-DOS on your NT system, you can temporarily reboot from a floppy drive with an MS-DOS system disk if your NT system uses FAT-based file system.

Note
Logicmaster 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet for DOS (IC641SWP313) cannot be run from a DOS window under Windowsr, Windows 95/98, or

Windows NT. For the other versions of Logicmaster, refer also to the IPI accompanying the software disks for additional information about installing Logicmaster. There is a new version of Logicmaster (IC641SWP316) that was specifically designed as a DOS application that installs and works under Windows NT and Windows 95. This new version provides SNP or TCP/IP Ethernet communications to Series 90-70 PLCs and uses standard TCP/IP Windows drivers to provide maximum compatibility in a network environment. As a program designed for Windows NT and Windows 95, it consumes less of the system resources, easily handling the multitasking attributes of the Windows NT or Windows 95 operating system.

2-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
Running Other Software with the CONFIG.SYS File for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Software
Other types of software may require different entries in the CONFIG.SYS file. It is not always possible to combine the requirements for multiple software packages in one CONFIG.SYS file. In that case, you must maintain multiple versions of the CONFIG.SYS file with different file names, or if you are using MS-DOS version 6 or higher, you can create multiple boot options within one config.syssee your DOS manual for information on this feature. Your MS-DOS manual contains other information about the CONFIG.SYS file that may be useful to you. If you have loaded device drivers for special devices or a local area network, which terminate and stay resident, these programs may need to be removed before installing and running the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. The MS-DOS CHKDSK command may be used to determine available memory (bytes free). Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not require the ANSI.SYS device driver; it may be removed in order to obtain more memory.

Note
For MS-DOS version 6.0 or later, use the MEM /C /P command to display a list of all programs in memory and whether they are loaded in Conventional or Upper Memory. MS-DOS version 6 or later also includes the MEMMAKER command to optimize upper memory usage. Run it selecting Custom mode and select YES for options adding Upper Memory.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-7

2
Installation Instructions
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Boot up the computer using MS-DOS. Be sure CONFIG.SYS has files set to at least 20, i.e., FILES=20. Remove the write-protect tab from the disk. Insert the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software disk into the computers disk drive. At the MS-DOS prompt, enter the designation of the disk drive followed by a colon. For example, if the disk is in drive A, type A: and press the Enter key. Begin the installation procedure by typing INSTALL and pressing the Enter key. The following screen is displayed.

Note
If you are using Windows 95/98 or Windows NT as your operating system, you must restart your computer in (16-bit) DOS mode. Other wise, an ERROR: Disk Error, the target sector was not found or [+2553] Not Original Master Diskette or a similar message will be displayed.

2-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
7. Specify the hard disk drive and press the Enter key, or just press the Enter key if the default is correct. The following screen is displayed if this is the first installation of this disk.

Note
The Serial Number field must contain the serial number from your registration card or the back of the distribution disks. 8. Use the cursor keys to move between fields. Each field is validated as you move off the field. You must fill in all of the fields and press the Enter key in order for the installation process to continue. If any fields are empty or invalid when the Enter key is pressed, the first invalid field is highlighted and an error message is displayed. The system will prompt you to confirm that the registration information is correct as displayed. If the registration data is not correct, press: N (No) and correct the registration information. When the registration data is correct, press: Y (Yes). The data is then encoded and written onto the master distribution disk. This screen is displayed until the registration data is successfully written to the master disk, or until the installation program is aborted by pressing the Escape key. You may print this screen by pressing the Print Screen key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-9

2
9. When the registration data is successfully written to the master disk, the installation process can begin. The following screen is displayed after the registration data has been entered, or on future Logicmaster installations of the same software package. (Registration is not required once the data is written to the master disk.) Read the licensing agreement.

This information is displayed each time an installation is performed. Pressing the Enter key after reading this screen means you agree to comply with the stated terms. Press the Escape (ESC) key to terminate INSTALL and return to MS-DOS.

2-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
10. First, the Installation procedure creates the \LM90 directory in the root directory. INSTALL checks the files AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS in the root directory of the hard disk. These files must contain certain commands to ensure that Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwareexecutes properly. If neither file exists, they are both created. If either file already exists, INSTALL will ask if the files should be automatically modified.

If you want the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files to be automatically modified, enter Y (Yes) or press the Enter key. If there were already versions of those files in the root directory, they will be renamed to AUTOEXEC.L90 and CONFIG.L90, respectively. If you already have AUTOEXEC.BAT and/or CONFIG.SYS files and plan to edit them yourself, enter N (No). The following screen is displayed:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-11

2
11. If you change your mind and want INSTALL to automatically update the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files, enter Y (Yes). Otherwise, enter N (No) or press the Enter key.

12. INSTALL attempts to create three subdirectories under the root directory on the hard disk, and transfers the appropriate files to those subdirectories. If the subdirectories already exist, any files in them are deleted and the new files installed. If folders exist, they are not deleted. 13. INSTALL will then prompt you to insert any other disks. After all the files have been transferred, the final installation screen is displayed. 14. The computer must now be re-booted in order to complete the installation process. After removing the last disk used during the installation process, press CTRL-ALT-Delete to re-boot the computer. When the MS-DOS prompt is displayed, enter LM90 to start up the software.

Programmer Setup
A default setup file is created during installation. Only in special circumstances will this file need to be changed. Refer to appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup, for instructions on modifying the setup parameters.

2-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
Using a Modem
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software has a modem auto dial feature which can be accessed from the main menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions by selecting Logicmaster 90 Utilities (F7).

Note
The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro modem auto dial feature only supports COM1 and COM2.

1.

Press F8 to select the modem auto dial feature.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-13

2
2. To set the modem parameters, move the cursor to Setup and press the Enter key.

A. Complete the fields on the screen displayed, using the Enter key to move among the fields and the right/left cursor keys to move within each field. Press Zoom (F10) to display other values, as shown in the following screen.

Note
You can add any non-numerical characters that your modem accepts for the dial prefix or suffix, e.g., commas to add pauses (particularly useful when trying to connect to a number in a different country). See your modem users manual for acceptable non-numerical characters.

B. Press the Enter key to select a parameter for each field. When all the fields are complete, press the Escape key.
2-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

2
3. To edit an entry or enter a new listing in the directory, move the cursor to Edit and press the Enter key.

A. Highlight the entry you wish to edit, or select: < add new entry > and press the Enter key to add a new listing. B. Complete the fields on the screen displayed, using the Enter key to move among the fields and the right/left cursor keys to move within each field. Press Zoom (F10) to display the choices for each parameter, cursor to one of the choices, and then press F10 again or the Enter key to select the parameter. When all the fields are complete, press the Escape key. 4. 5. 6. To dial a number, press the Enter key with the cursor on Dial. Use the cursor keys to select an entry, and then press the Enter key to dial the number. Move the cursor to Hangup and press the Enter key to abort the call and hang up the modem. To exit the modem, cursor to Quit and press the Enter key, or press ALT-F8.

Note
All computers with modems or add-in card or PCMCIA slot modems include communications software. You may choose to use one of these packages to dial and connect Logicmaster to a remote PLC, especially if you are using COM3 or COM4. If you use other communications software, set up the modem to stay connected (i.e., NOT to hang up the line) when exiting the software (so that you can start Logicmaster). Usually, this means forcing DTR high or telling the modem to ignore DTR. After exiting Logicmaster, you must re-enter the modem software package to send a command, such as the command to hang up the line.
GFK-0466L Chapter 2 Operation 2-15

Section 4: Startup/Exit
To start up Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software: 1. At the MS-DOS prompt, type LM90 and press the Enter key. The menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions is displayed.

Note
Beginning with Release 3, a teach file can be used to enter the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. This entry teach file will contain the keystrokes previously taught while entering the programming or configurator software. Information on using a teach file to enter the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software can be found in chapter 2, section 5, Keyboard Functions. 2. 3. Use the function keys to select the programming, configuration, or PCM configuration software. If only one version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (either WSI or standard serial communications) is installed, it will be run automatically. If both versions are installed, the Logicmaster 90 Setup Package (F9) can be used to select the version to run. Refer to appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup, for instructions on modifying the programmer environment setup.

2-16

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
Starting the Programming or Configuration Software
To load the programming software, select Program (F1) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions, shown above. If you wish to load the configuration software, select Config (F2), or select PCM (F3) to load the PCM configuration software. (For information on the PCM development software package, refer to the Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) Users Manual, GFK-0487.) The Series 90-30, Series 90-20, and Micro PLCs use the same Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software package for programming. The default PLC type can be selected using the appropriate shift-function key sequence, as described below, but any of the three PLC types can be configured using the configuration package.

D D D

If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the Micro (Shift-F1) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software, the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Micro CPU. If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the 90-20 (Shift-F2) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software, the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Model 211 CPU. If the configuration file does not already exist in the selected program folder and the 90-30 (Shift-F3) key is pressed before booting the Logicmaster software, the reference defaults and CPU will be that of a Model 331 CPU.

After selecting Program (F1) or Config (F2), the following screen appears:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-17

2
When the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software powers up, it attempts to automatically select a program folder:

D D D D D

If there is a program folder beneath the drawer last selected, whose name matches the program name in the attached PLC, that folder is selected. If the current directory is a program folder and its name matches the program name in the attached PLC, that folder is selected. If there is a program folder beneath the current directory, whose name matches the program name in the attached PLC, that folder is selected. If the current directory is a program folder, it is selected. Other wise, the initial select screen is displayed with the name of the last folder selected in the Folder field.

Note
At serial baud rates of 1200 or less, the folder cannot be automatically selected during startup. Once in the programming software, however, you may use the auto function to automatically select a folder. (Refer to the information on Automatic Folder Selection in chapter 7, Program Folders.) Enter a name of up to seven characters for the program folder. (The name is also used for the program.) After entering a name, press the Enter key. If you need more information about program folders, refer to chapter 7, Program Folders.

Exiting (Quitting) the Programming or Configuration Software


To exit the software at any time, press CTRL-Break and confirm the prompt, or repeatedly press the Escape key at each prompt. You should always exit the software before turning the computer off; otherwise, some changes may be lost. If you respond to the exit prompt (Exit Logicmaster 90 Package? (Y/N)) by entering a 1 instead of a Y (Yes) or N (No), a bookmark feature saves the current context. The next time you run the software, you will return to the same general location when you re-enter the software.
2-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

2
Programming Software Main Menu
If you selected Program (F1) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions, the Programming Software main menu shown below is displayed. This menu is used to access the primary functions of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software.

Note
For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, WSI is displayed after the version number in the screen shown above. For the standard serial communications version of software, COM is displayed after the version number. Function Key
F1 F2

Function
Program Tables

Description
Create or edit a program or monitor program logic. Chapter 3 describes the program display and explains how to create or edit a program. Display and change reference data. To select a particular reference table, enter the reference type on the command line before pressing F2. Chapter 4 describes monitoring data and explains how to change tables and variable data. Select the status functions. These functions include displays of I/O faults and PLC faults. The memory configuration and the current PLC access level can also be viewed. Chapter 5 describes these functions. Display and change serial port setup and other programmer configuration. Chapter 6 describes these functions. Create, select, clear, rename, delete, lock, or back up a program folder. Chapter 7 explains how to use these functions. Load, store, or verify a program, or clear PLC memory. Chapter 8 explains how to use the utility functions. Print a program folder. Chapter 9 describes the print functions.

F3

Status

F7 F8 F9 F10

Setup Folder Utility Print

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-19

2
The function keys remain active after selecting a programming function. You can go directly from one programming function to another without returning to the main menu by simultaneously pressing the Shift key and the desired function softkey. The bottom of the main menu screen contains three lines of status information. Chapter 2, section 6, Screen Format, explains the content of the screens status area.
a43565 F7 Programmer Mode and Setup F1 Printer Serial Port Setup F2 Set Programmer Mode F3 Select SNP Connections F4 PLC Comm. Serial Port Setup F5 View Modes Setup F8 Program Folder Functions F1 Select/ Create F2 Delete F3 Auto Select F4 Backup F5 Restore F4 F5 Clear PLC Memory F2 Store to PLC F3 Verify PLC With Programmer F9 Program Utility Functions F1 Load from PLC F10 Print Functions F1 Setup Printer Parameters F2 Designate Screen Print Device

MAIN MENU F1 Program Display and Edit F1 Insert F2 Edit F3 Modify F4 Search F1 F2 Signed Integer F3 Double Precision Integer F4 Real F5 F5 Hexadecimal F6 F6 F7 Option F8 Goto F9 More F10 Zoom F1 Coil Check F2 Editor Options F8 Timer/ Counter F9 Mixed F10 Change All F10 (SEE NOTE) F10 F9 (SEE NOTE) F9 F9 F10 Copy to Current F9 F10 Read/Write/ Verify EEPROM Binary F7 ASCII F2 Reference Tables F3 PLC Control and Status F1 Run/Stop PLC F2 Password Protection F3 PLC Fault Table F4 I/O Fault Table F5 PLC Memory Usage F6 Block Memory Usage F7 Reference Table Sizes F8 PLC Sweep Table F8 F7 F6 F4 F5 F6

F3 F4 Print Program Logic F5 Select Cross Reference Options F6

F6 Rename F7 Clear F8 Lock Or Unlock F8 F7 F6

Print Values

F7

F8 F9 Pause F10 Save

F1 Select

F2 Cut

F3 Paste

F4 Include

F5 Write

F6 Delete

F7

F8 Goto

F9 More

F10 Zoom

NOTE:

Press Insert Rung (F1), Edit Rung (F2), or Modify Rung (F3) to display the programming instruction menus. When Password Protection (F2) is pressed (PLC Control and Status functions), F9 will become the OEM softkey. When PLC Fault Table (F3) or I/O Fault Table (F4) is pressed (PLC Control and Status functions) , F9 will become the Clear softkey and F10 will become the ZOOM softkey.

Figure 2-1. Programming Software Menu Tree


2-20 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

2
Configuration Software Main Menu
If you selected Configuration (F2) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions, the Configuration Software main menu shown below is displayed. The menu lists the primary functions of the software. The first three menu entries are used to select PLC configuration functions. The remaining entries are used to select support functions.

Note
For the WSI version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, WSI is displayed after the version number in the screen shown above. For the standard serial communications version of software, COM is displayed after the version number. Function Key
F1 F2 F3

Function
I/O CPU Status

Description
I/Oconfiguration is the process of describing to the software the content of a PLC systems rack(s). Chapter 10 tells how to complete I/O configuration. CPU configuration sets the operating characteristics of the CPU. Chapter 11 describes the CPU configuration. The status function displays I/O faults and PLC faults. You will also use this function to display PLC information such as memory usage and to assign passwords. Chapter 5 describes these displays. The programmer setup function sets up the computer s serial ports, current operating mode, and PLC connection. Refer to chapter 6 for information on the setup function. Program folder functions are a group of file-handling utilities which you will use to create, delete, back up, and limit access to configuration and program files. Chapter 7 describes these functions. Program utilities are used to transfer information between the computer and the PLC. An additional program utility is used to clear memory in the PLC. Chapter 8 explains how to use the program utilities. Print functions are used to generate configuration printouts and to set up a destination for screen prints. Chapter 9 describes these print functions.

F7

Setup

F8

Folder

F9

Utility

F10

Print

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-21

2
The functions are selected using the function keys shown on the top line of the screen. You can go directly from one function to another without returning to the main menu by using the shift function keys.
MAIN MENU F1 I/O Configuration F2 CPU Configuration F1 PLC Time of Day Clock F3 PLC Control and Status F1 Run/Stop PLC F2 F2 Password Protection F3 Assign SNP ID F4 Memory Allocation PLC Fault Table F4 I/O Fault Table F5 PLC Memory Usage F4 F5 F6 F7 Programmer Mode and Setup F1 Printer Serial Port Setup F2 Set Programmer Mode F3 Select SNP Connections F4 PLC Comm. Serial Port Setup F5 View Modes Setup F8 Program Folder Functions F1 Select/ Create F2 Delete F3 Auto Select F4 Backup F5 Restore F4 F5 Clear PLC Memory F5 F9 Program Utility Functions F1 Load Configuration from PLC F2 Store Configuration to PLC F3 Verify PLC Configuration with Programmer F10 Print Functions F1 Setup Printer Parameters F2 Designate Screen Print Device a43566

F3

F3 F4 Print Configuration

F5

F6

F6

F6

F6 F7

F6

F6

F7

F7

F7

Clear F8

F7

F7

F8

F8

F8

Lock or Unlock

F8

F8 F9

F9

F9

F9

F9

F9 F10

Pause F10 Save

F10

F10

F10

F10

Read/Write/ Verify EEPROM

F1 Equal

continued on next page

Figure 2-2. Configuration Software Menu Tree

2-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

continued from previous page F1 Model 30 I/O F1 Discrete Input F2 Discrete Output F3 Discrete Mixed F4 Analog Input F5 Analog Output F6 Analog Mixed F7 Other F7 F7 F7 F7 F6 F6 F6 F6 F5 F5 F5 F4 F4 F4 F3 F3 F1 F2 GCM F2 F2 F3 Serial F2 Genius F3 F4 Power Supply F1 F1 F5 Rack Selection F6 Communications F7 F8 Other

a44987

F9

F10 Zoom

F1 PCM F2 HSC F3 Foreign Modules F4 Operator Interface F5 APM

PS

F8

F8 F2

F8

F8

F8

F9

Default

F9

F9

F9

F10

F10

F10

F10

F10

Figure 2-2. Configuration Software Menu Tree (contd)

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-23

Section 5: Keyboard Functions


This section describes the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. It also describes playback functions, which can be used to assign sequences of frequently-used keystrokes to a file for simple recall later on.

Keyboards Supported
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software can be used with the 83-key or 101-key keyboard for an IBM PC personal computer, or a Workmaster, Workmaster II, or CIMSTAR I industrial computer. Other types of keyboards for the IBM PC-XT, PC-AT, or IBM-compatible computer may work with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, but have not been tested. The 91-key keyboard for the Workmaster computer, developed for use with Logicmaster 6 programming software, would be difficult to use since Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software was designed to use with standard keyboards.

Key Functions
Appendix E, Key Functions, lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software environment. Appendix E also contains a perforated Help card which can be removed from this manual. This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help.

Keyboard Macros (Teach Mode)


Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software can be instructed to record sequences of keystrokes and play them back with a single keystroke. These sequences of keystrokes are referred to as keystroke macros or teach sequences. A combination of keystrokes might represent a series of frequently used functions or part of a program that you want to duplicate. An example of a simple keystroke macro would be the sequence of keystrokes needed to create the following line of logic:

| | ??????? ??????? || |( ) |

The auto-next highest reference address function, described at the end of chapter 3, section 9, Rung Edit, provides another example of using a keystroke macro. The keystrokes that make up a keystroke macro are stored in a file named KEYx.DEF, where x is a digit in the set 0 to 9 that you choose when you create the keystroke macro. This file is called a teach file; it is located in the current program folder.

2-24

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
Creating a Teach Sequence
Follow the steps below to create a keystroke macro: 1. Select the starting point in Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software at which you wish your macro to begin. You must remember this starting point when you execute or play back the macro you are about to record. For example, if you are editing ladder diagram logic, you must ensure that a condition such as whether you were in EDIT mode when you started recording holds when you are playing back the macro. It is often simplest to begin the macro from an easy-to-remember starting point such as the main menu, the Print menu, or the Edit Program commands. When you wish to begin recording keystrokes, press and hold the ALT key while pressing the T key. Then, select a playback file by pressing one of the key combinations between ALT-0 and ALT-9. If you select a key combination that has been used previously in the current folder, the software will ask you if you want to overwrite it. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will now record all the keystrokes that you make. When you have completed your sequence of keystrokes, press ALT-Q to exit TEACH mode. The software will stop recording keystrokes and create a teach file.

2.

3.

Playing Back a Teach Sequence


Before replaying the keystroke macro, be sure that the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is in the state it was in when you started recording the macro. Then, press the ALT-digit combination you were prompted for when you started recording. The software will rapidly execute the keystrokes you recorded as though they were entered from the keyboard. The only keyboard input recognized during playback is ALT-A, which causes the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to ask you if you want to stop the playback. If an error condition is encountered during playback, an error message is displayed, playback is paused, and you will be prompted to continue or stop the key sequence.

Pausing the Playback of a Teach Sequence


A pause may be entered in a keystroke macro. If you are recording a sequence of keystrokes and need to pause playback to examine something on the screen, press ALT-Z at the point where you would like playback to pause. This may be done as many times as you like while recording a macro. A message will be displayed telling you that a user prompt key (a pause) has been recorded. When the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software encounters the ALT-Z key combination during playback, it displays a prompt and waits until the space bar is pressed to continue.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-25

2
Using a Teach File to Run Software from an MS-DOS Batch File
Beginning with Release 3.02, Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software may be run using a teach file, which contains keystrokes previously taught while entering the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming or configuration software packages. This feature allows LM90 to be invoked from an MS-DOS batch file, to play back keystrokes to perform desired function(s), and to return to the batch file to execute the next command. This can be helpful when executing multiple print requests. The keystroke macro is stored as the text file <filename>.tch. The file name must identify either the programming or configuration software package. For example, prg9030.tch could be used as the file name for the programming software and cfg9030.tch could be used for the configurator software. The file extension must be .tch. To begin recording keystroke macro, enter the executable path, at the MS-DOS prompt, which corresponds to the version of software installed on your computer: Software Version
WSIprogrammer WSI configurator Standardserialcommunicationsprogrammer Standard serial communications configurator

Executable Path
c:\lm90\p30\prg9030 c:\lm90\c30\cfg9030 c:\lm90\p30s\prg9030 c:\lm90\c30s\cfg9030

Enter the name of the teach file for this macro (e.g., prg9030.tch) and the letter t after the path. The t indicates TEACH mode. For example, to begin recording keystrokes to a teach file named prg9030.tch, enter:
C:\lm90\p30\prg9030 prg9030.tch t

To end the teach sequence, press ALT-Q, or CTRL-Break to end the teach sequence and exit the software. To play back the keystroke macro, enter the path and teach file name, followed by the letter p for PLAYBACK mode. For example, to play back a macro for the programming software, enter:
C:\lm90\p30\prg9030 prg9030.tch p

or

c:\lm90\p30\prg9030 p

To initialize the communications driver for the standard COM port version of Logicmaster 90 software, the batch file must contain the line: c:\lm90\wsil30 i before the command to create or play back the teach file. The line: c:\lm90\wsil30 r must be added after the command to create or play back the teach file in order to remove the communications driver. For example:
c:\lm90\wsil30 i c:\lm90\p30s\prg9030 p c:\lm90\wsil30 r

2-26

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 6: Screen Format


This is a typical bit-oriented reference table display for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

The main part of the screen shows menus, data, and other information related to the function you are currently using.

Function Key Assignments


The top two lines of the screen show the functions that are currently available. The main functions displayed in the upper line are selected by pressing the Shift key with a function key, F1 through F10. The active function appears in a reverse-video block. In the following example, the active main function is reference tables.

The lower line displays the secondary functions that can be selected with that main function key active. In the example above, they are the display formats that are available while using reference tables. These formats are selected by pressing a function key, F1 through F10, without using the Shift key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-27

2
Message Line
Directly under the function key area is the message line. Errors in command syntax, or those discovered while executing commands or selections, are displayed on the message line. Prompts for additional information required from the user are also displayed on the message line.

Command Line
The command line, identified by the > prompt, displays typed entries, such as data to be used for the table being displayed. It is used to enter instructions, references, or comments.

Status Information
The bottom three lines display information about the status of the programmer, the PLC, the program, and the keyboard. The information displayed will change depending on the programmer mode. For example:

ID CONVEY RUN/ENABLE 25msFIXED ONLINE C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\CVLINE3 PRG: CVLINE3 REPLACE

L3 ACC: WRITE LOGIC

LOGIC NOT EQ

Status Area
Top line Second line Third line Identifies the current program.

Description
Displaysinformation about the attached PLC and the programmer. Shows the status of the keyboard; whether Caps Lock, Scroll Lock or Num Lock is active, and whether the keyboard is in REPLACE or INSERT mode. For some programming functions, the third status line displays additional information, described in later sections of this manual. Items appear in the status information area only when needed.

2-28

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

2
PLC/Programmer Status: Definitions
The top line of the status area displays information about a PLC and about the programmer. Some of the information displayed reflects selections made using the PLC monitoring functions. For information about using these functions, refer to chapter 5, PLC Control and Status.

snp id

plc state

scan time

mode

access level

equality

Items that may appear on this line are explained in the following table. (Items will not appear on the status lines if they are not used for the currently active function.) Field
SNP ID PLC State The current status of the CPU: RUN/OUT EN: STOP/IOSC AN: STOP/NOIO: STOP/FAULT: Scan Time PLC running the logic program, outputs enabled. PLC stopped, not executing the logic program, scanningI/O. PLC stopped, not executing the logic program, no I/O scan. PLC stopped due to a fault; check fault tables.

Description
The Series Ninety Protocol (SNP) identifier assigned to the PLC.

The CPU sweep time in milliseconds. This is followed by the type of the scan, which may be: SCAN: FIXED: OVER: Each scan executed as fast as possible. Constant sweep timer enabled, scan fixed to set time limit. Constant sweep timer enabled, scan exceeds the set time limit.

Mode

The current mode of the programmer connected to the CPU: OFFLINE: ONLINE: MONITOR: No communications with PLC, or no PLC attached. Actively communicating with the PLC. Same as ONLINE, but programmer cannot modify the contents of the PLC.

Access Level

The password access level of the PLC: LEVEL 4: LEVEL 3: LEVEL 2: LEVEL 1: Changepassword,writelogic/configuration. Writelogic/configuration,PLCstopped. Write data, clear fault tables. Read PLC only.

Equality

This field compares the program in the PLC with the version in the folder: LOGICEQUAL: LOGICNOTEQ: BLOCKEDIT: Both program versions are the same. Program versions may be different. The PLC program is the same as that in the current programfolder, the current block is being edited online and may be different in the programmer. The block can be stored to the PLC by pressing ALT-S.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 2 Operation

2-29

2
Selecting the Programmer Operating Mode
Both the programmer and the configuration software operate in three modes: OFFLINE, MONITOR, and ONLINE. In OFFLINE mode, no data transfer takes place between the computer and the PLC. Programs and configuration data may conveniently be developed in OFFLINE mode, with or without the computer connected to a PLC. In MONITOR mode, if communications have been established between the computer and the PLC, the computer can read data from the PLC but may not transfer data to it. With communications established in ONLINE mode, programs and other data can be transferred between the PLC and the computer. If you are using a Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer, you may configure the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to use the keyswitch to select the operating mode. For those computers without a keyswitch, or if the keyswitch is not enabled, mode selection can be made by:

D D

Pressing the ALT and M keys simultaneously (i.e., press the Alt key and hold, then press the M key). Repeatedly pressing ALT and M switches the operating mode from OFFLINE to MONITOR to ONLINE and then back to OFFLINE. Going to the Programmer Setup screen (Shift-F7) and selecting an operating mode. For more information on using the Programmer Setup screen to select the operating mode, refer to chapter 6, Programmer Setup.

2-30

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Chapter

3 Program Editing 12section level 1


figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

This chapter describes the program edit features of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software. Program display and editing may be protected by passwords. If your system has been set up to use passwords and is in ONLINE mode, you may have to enter a password in order to use the functions described in this chapter. Chapter 3 contains the following sections: Section
1

Title
LadderLogic Program Elements Program Format Program Entry Program Annotation Variable Declaration Table Rung Comments Changing the Display Mode Subroutine Blocks Rung Edit

Description
SummarizestheSeries90-30/20/Microinstruction set. Refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467, for additional information on each of these instructions. Describes the format of a ladder logic rung. Describes how to insert logic elements and functions in a program and three ways to exit from a rung. Describes program annotation and how to enter nicknames and reference descriptions. Describes how to enter annotation using the variable declaration table. Also describes how to import and export files in SNF format. Describes how to insert rung comments. Describes how to show reference description information at each symbol or reference address in the program. Describes how to use block declarations in a main programblock. Describes how to modify an existing program by adding rungs, deleting rungs, and editing rungs. This section also describes how to select, cut, paste, include, and write rungs or declarations, and how to use the open space functions to open element spaces in the rung. Describes options in the program editor, including multiple coil use and automatic insertion of references. Describes how to search for a reference or instruction using the search function. Describes how to make changes to or debug a program while the program is running.

Page
3-2

2 3 4 5

3-18 3-23 3-30 3-33

6 7 8 9

3-46 3-52 3-57 3-67

10 11 12

Editor Options Search Function Online Editing/ Monitoring

3-92 3-98 3-104

Note
When the program editor is entered, the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software checks the amount of space on the disk containing the program folder. If insufficient space exists to support changes to the program, the folder is temporarily locked. Program logic may be viewed, but not changed. If space is freed up on the disk using MS-DOS, the lock state is automatically cleared when you runLogicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. 3-1

GFK-0466L

Section 1: Ladder Logic Program Elements

The tables in this section summarize the programming instructions available for Series 90-30 PLCs, Series 90-20 PLCs, and Micro PLCs. You can access all of these instructions from either the Insert (F1) or Edit (F2) function by selecting one of the main functions displayed in the upper line shown below. Press the Shift key and the function key for the function you wish to select. For example, to select one of the math functions, first press Shift-F3 to display the math functions listed in table 3-3 in this section. Then, select the appropriate math function by pressing the function key for that particular function.

These function keys provide access to the instructions required to edit ladder diagram rungs: Function Key
F1 F2

Function
Relay Functions Timer/ Counter Functions Math Functions

Description
Select contacts, coils, and links in ladder logic rungs. Select on-delay and stopwatch-type timers, up counters, and down counters.

Page
3-3 3-5

F3

F4

F5

F6 F7

F8

F9

Select addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, modulo division, square root, sine, cosine, tangent, inverse sine, inverse cosine, and inverse tangent functions. Relational Select functions which can compare two numbers: equal, not Functions equal, greater than, greater than or equal, less than, and less than or equal. Or, test a value against a range of numbers. Bit Select functions which can perform comparison and move Operation operations on bit strings: Logical AND, OR, and exclusive OR; Functions logical invert; shift left or right; rotate left or right; bit test, bit set, bit clear, and bit position. Data Move Select basic data move functions: move, block move, block Functions clear, shift register, bit sequencer, and communications request. Table Copy from one array to another; and search for all array Functions values which are equal, not equal, greater than, less than, greater than or equal, or less than or equal to a specified value. Conversion Convert a data item from one number type to another, such as Functions signed integer to 4-digit BCD format or BCD-4 to signed integer format. Control Limit program execution, call a subroutine, enter a comment in Functions a program, and alter the way the CPU executes the program.

3-6

3-9

3-10

3-11 3-11

3-12

3-13

3-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Appendix D, Instruction Mnemonics, lists the complete mnemonics for each programming instruction. Please refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467, for additional information on each instruction.

Table 3-1. Relay Functions


Key
F1 F2 F5 F6

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

Selecting Relay Functions(Shift-F1) displays these function key assignments: | | &NOCON Normally A normally open contact passes power Open Contact if the associated reference is ON. |/| &NCCON Normally A normally closed contact passes power Closed Contact if the associated reference is OFF. ( ) &NOCOIL Normally The associated reference is set ON if Open Coil the coil receives power. (SM) &SMLA T Retentive SET The associated reference is set ON if Coil the coil receives power. The reference remains set until reset by an (RM) coil. Its state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUNtransition. (RM) &RMLA T Retentive RESET Coil The associated discrete reference is reset OFF if the coil receives power. The reference remains reset until set by an (SM) coil. Its state is retained through power failure and STOP-TORUN transition. A vertical link with no contact function or reference. A shunt; also acts as a delete function. Additional relay functions you can select.

F7

F8 F9 F10

vert | horz more

&VE &HO

Vertical Link Horizontal Link

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-3

3
Table 3-1. Relay Functions (Continued)
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

Pressing More (F10) displays these additional relay function key assignments: <+> &COILCTD Continuation If power to the coil is ON, the Coil continuation coil sets the next continuation contact ON. If power is OFF, the continuation coil sets the next continuation contact OFF. <+> &CONCTD Continuation Contact Negated Retentive Coil The continuation contact passes power to the right if the preceding continuation coil is set ON. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the function does not receive power. The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil does not receive power. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil receives power. The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition. The associated discrete reference is set ON if the coil receives power. It remains set until reset by an (R) coil. The associated discrete reference is set OFF if the coil receives power. It remains reset until set by an (S) coil. If the associated discrete reference is OFF when the coil receives power, the reference will be set ON for one logic scan. This coil can be used as a one-shot. If the associated discrete reference is ON and the coil is not receiving power, the reference will be set ON for one logic scan. Return to the first level of relay functions.

F2

F3

(/M)

&NCMCOIL

F4 F5

(/) (M)

&NCCOIL &NOMCOIL

Negated Coil Retentive Coil

F6

(S)

&SLA T

SET Coil

F7

(R) ( )

&RLA T

RESET Coil

F8

&PCOIL

Positive Transition Coil

F9

( )

&NCOIL

Negative Transition Coil

F10

more

3-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-2. Timer and Counter Functions
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

Selecting Timer/CounterFunctions(Shift-F2) displays these function keyassignments. ondtr &ONDTR On-Delay The ONDTR function accumulates time Stopwatch while receiving power. It passes power if Timer the current value exceeds the preset value. The current value is reset to zero when the reset (R) input receives power. oftd &OFTD Off-Delay Timer The OFDT function increments while power flow is off, and resets to zero when power flow is on. Time may be counted in tenths of seconds (the default selection), hundredths of seconds, or thousandths of seconds. The range is 0 to +32,767 time units. The state of this timer is retentive on power failure; no automatic initialization occurs at power-up

F2

F3

F4

F5

F10

F2 F3 F4 F10

The current value of the TMR function is set to zero when the function transitions on. The function accumulates time while receiving power, and passes power if the current value is greater than or equal to a preset value. upctr &UPCTR Up Counter The UPCTR function increments by 1 each time the function receives transitionalpower. If the current value stored in the counter is greater than or equal to a preset value, the function passes power. The R input is used to reset the counter to zero. dnctr &DNCTR Down Counter The DNCTR function counts down from a preset value every time the function receives transitional power. If the current value of the counter is zero, the function passes power. The R input is used to set the current value to equal the preset value. tmbase Select the time base of a timer. Time may be counted in tenths of seconds or hundredths of seconds. Pressing Timebase (F10) displays these function key assignments: 0.1s _TEN 0.1 second Time is counted in tenths of a second. 0.01s _HUN 0.01 second Time is counted in hundredths of a second. 0.001s _TH 0.001 second Time is counted in thousandths of a second. instrs Return to the timer and counter functions.

tmr

&TMR

On-Delay Timer

Note
The Off-Delay timer and the thousandth of a second timebase are available to Release 4.5 and later of all models of CPUs, and when using Logicmaster 90-30/20 4.5 or higher. These features are not available to earlier releases of CPUs, nor earlier versions of Logicmaster.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-5

3
Table 3-3. Math Functions
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

SelectingMath Functions(Shift-F3) displays these function key assignments: add &ADD Addition Add two numbers. The ADD function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. sub &SUB Subtraction Subtract one number from another. The SUB function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. Multiply two numbers. The MUL function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow. Divide one number by another, yielding a quotient. The DIV function passes power if the operation does not result in an overflow and if there is no attempt to divide by zero. Divide one number by another, yielding a remainder. The MOD function passes power unless there is an attempt to divide by zero. Find the square root of an integer or real value. When the function receives power flow, the value of the output Q is set to the square root of the input IN. Pressing more (F9) displays the Trig functions plus the degree/radian functions (see next page). Select a data type for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15.

F2

F3

mul

&MUL

Multiplication

F4

div

&DIV

Division

F5

mod

&MOD

ModuloDivision

F6

sqrt

&SQRT

Square Root

F9

more

F10

types

Note
Math functions can generally use the Real data type, but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs; for all other 350 and higher CPUs, floating point support began with Release 9).

3-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-3. Math Functions (Continued)
Key
F1

Instruction
sin

Mnemonic
&SIN

Function
Trigonometric Sine

Description
Find the trigonometric sine of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the sine of IN, whose units are radians, and stores the result in output Q. Find the trigonometric cosine of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the cosine of IN, whose units are radians, and stores the result in output Q. Find the trigonometric tangent of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the tangent of IN, whose units are radians, and stores the result in output Q. Find the inverse sine of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the inverse sine of IN and stores the result in output Q, whose units are radians. Find the inverse cosine of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the inverse cosine of IN and stores the result in output Q, whose units are radians. Find the inverse tangent of the input. When the function receives power flow, it computes the inverse tangent of IN and stores the result in output Q, whose units are radians. When the function receives power flow, a RAD_TO_DEG conversion is performed on the real radian value of IN and the result is placed in output degree real value Q. When the function receives power flow, a DEG_TO_RAD conversion is performed on the real degree value in input IN and the result is placed in output real radian value Q. Changes the menu to additional math functions.

Pressing More (F9) displays these additional math function key assignments:

F2

cos

&COS

Trigonometric Cosine

F3

tan

&TAN

Trigonometric Tangent

F4

asin

&ASIN

Inverse Sine

F5

acos

&ACOS

Inverse Cosine

F6

atan

&ATAN

Inverse Tangent

F7

deg

&DEG

Convert to Degrees

F8

rad

&RAD

Convert to Radians

F9

more

Note
The above math functions require a floating-point CPU (all releases of 352 CPUs; for all other 350 and higher CPUs, floating point support began with Release 9).

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-7

3
Table 3-3. Math Functions (Continued)
Key
F1

Instruction
log 10

Mnemonic
&LOG

Function
Base 10 Logarithm

Description
When the function receives power flow, it finds the base 10 logarithm of the real value in input IN and places the result in output Q. When the function receives power flow, it finds the natural logarithm base (e) of the real value in input IN and places the result in output Q. When the function receives power flow, the natural logarithm base (e) is raised to the power specified by IN and the result is placed in Q. When the function receives power flow, X is raised to the power specified by IN and the result is placed in Q.

F2

ln

&LN

Natural Logarithm

F3

exp

&EXP

Power of e

F4

expt

&EXPT

Power of X

Note
The above math functions require a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs; for all other 350 and higher CPUs, floating point support began with Release 9).

3-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-4. Relational Functions
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F2

F3

F4

Selecting Relational Functions(Shift-F4) displays these function key assignments: eq &EQ Equal Test for equality between two numbers. The EQ function passes power if the two inputs are equal. ne &NE Not Equal Test for non-equality between two numbers. The NE function passes power if the inputs are not equal. gt &GT Greater Than Test for one number greater than another. The GT function passes power if the first parameter is greater than the second parameter. ge &GE Greater Than or Test for one number greater than or Equal To equal to another. The GE function passes power if the first parameter is greater than or equal to the second parameter . lt &LT Less Than Test for one number less than another. The LT function passes power if the first parameter is less than the second parameter . Test for one number greater than or equal to another. The LE function passes power if the first parameter is less than or equal to the second parameter . Test the input value against a range of two numbers. This instruction is only available for release 4.50 or higher CPUs (4.02 of the 341) and in Logicmaster90-30/20Version 4.5 and above. Select a data type for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15.

F5

F6

le

&LE

Less Than or Equal To

F7

range

&RANG

Range

F10

types

Note
You can use the Real data type for Relational functions except Range, but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs; for all other 350 and higher CPUs, floating point support began with Release 9).

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-9

3
Table 3-5. Bit Operation Functions
Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

F9

SelectingBit Operation Functions(Shift-F5) displays these function key assignments: and &AND LogicalAND Logical AND of two bit strings. or &OR Logical OR Logical OR of two bit strings. xor &XOR Logical Exclusive Logical Exclusive OR of two bit OR strings. not &NOT LogicalInvert Logical inversion of a bit string. shl &SHL Shift Left Shift a bit string left. shr &SHR Shift Right Shift a bit string right. rol &ROL Rotate Left Rotate a bit string left. ror &ROR Rotate Right Rotate a bit string right. more Additional bit operation functions you can select. types Select a data type for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. Pressing More (F9) displays these additional bit operation function key assignments: bittst &BTST Bit Test Test a bit within a bit string. bitset &BSET Bit Set Set one bit within a string to true. bitclr &BCLR Bit Clear Set one bit within a string to false. bitpos &BPOS Bit Position Locate a bit set to true within a bit string. mskcmp &MCM Masked Perform a masked compare of two Compare arrays (available only for Release 4.5 or higher CPUs and in Logicmaster 90-30/20 Version 4.5 and above.). more Return to the first level of bit operation functions.

3-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-6. Data Move Functions
Key
F1 F2 F3 F4

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F5 F7 F10

SelectingData Move Functions(Shift-F6) displays these function key assignments: move &MOV Move Move one or more bits of data within PLC memory. blkmov &BLKMOV Block Move Move a block of up to 7 constants to PLC memory. blkclr &BLKCLR Block Clear Clear (0) one or more bytes/words of PLC memory. shfreg &SHFR Shift Register Shift one or more words or bits of data through a block of PLC memory. bitseq &BITSEQ Bit Sequencer Sequence a 1 through a group of bits in PLC memory. comreq &COMMREQ Communication Send a communications request to a Request smart module in the PLC. types Select a data type for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in table 3-11 on page 3-15.

Note
You can use the Real data type with Move and Block Move functions, but Real data requires a floating-point CPU(all releases of 352 CPUs; for all other 350 and higher CPUs, floating point support began with Release 9)

Table 3-7. Table Functions


Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F10

Selecting Table Functions(Shift-F7) displays these function key assignments: srh eq &SRCHEQ Search Equal Search array for values equal to a specifiedvalue. srh ne &SRCHNE Search Not Equal Search array for values not equal to a specifiedvalue. srh gt &SRCHGT Search Greater Search array for values greater than Than a specified value. srh ge &SRCHGE Search Greater Search array for values greater than Than or Equal or equal to a specified value. srh lt &SRCHL T Search Less Than Search array for values less than a specifiedvalue. srh le &SRCHLE Search Less Than Search array for values less than or or Equal equal to a specified value. arrmov &ARRMOV Array Move Copy a specified number of data elements from a source array to a destination array. types Select a data type for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-11

3
Table 3-8. Conversion Functions

Key
F3

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F5

F6

F7

F8

F10

SelectingConversion Functions(Shift-F8) displays these function key assignments: bcd-4 &TO_BCD4 Convert to Convert a value to 4-digit BCD BCD-4 format. The BCD-4 function passes (From INT) power unless the number to be converted is out of range (greater than 9999), and no conversion is performed. word &TO_WORD Convert to Word Convert a Real value to Word (FromREAL) format. The [] WORD function passes power unless the number to be converted is out of range (0 to 65,535); if so, the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range), and power flow is not passed. int &TO_INT Convert to INT Convert a value to signed integer (From BCD-4 or format. The [] INT function passes REAL) power unless the number to be converted is out of range (32,768 to +32,767); if so, the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range), and power flow is not passed. tdint &TO_DINT Convert to DINT Convert a value to double precision (From BCD-4 or integer format. The [] DINT funcREAL) tion passes power unless the number to be converted is out of range (2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647); if so, the conversion is then set to the maximum or minimum (based on exceeding or going below the limits of the range), and power flow is not passed. real &TO_REAL Convert to Real Convert a value to real value format. (From INT, DINT, The [] REAL function always BCD-4 or WORD) passes power. types Select the type of data for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15. Pressing More (F9) displays these additional conversion function key assignments: int dint &TRINT &TRDINT Truncate to INT (from REAL) Truncate to Double Precision INT (from REAL) Truncate to a 16-bit signed number. The range is 32,768 to +32,767. Truncate to a 32-bit signed number. The range is 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. Return to the first level of conversion functions. Select the type of data for the function. Pressing Types (F10) displays the function keys described in Table 3-10 on page 3-15.

F1 F2

F9 F10

more types

3-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-9. Control Functions
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F2

F3 F4 F5 F6

F7

SelectingControl Functions(Shift-F9) displays these function key assignments: call &CALL Call Cause a program execution to go to a specified subroutine block. The CALL function always passes power. do io &DOIO DoI/O Service a specified range of inputs or outputs immediately (all inputs or outputs on a module will be serviced if any addresses on that module are included in the function partial I/O module updates are not performed). Optionally, a copy of the scanned I/O can be placed in internal memory. SER &SER Sequential Capture a series of events in the proEvent Recorder gram execution into an array. pidisa &PIDISA ISA PID Select the standard IDS PID algorithm. Algorithm pidind &PIDIND Independent Select the non-interacting PIDAlgorithm independent PID algorithm. sfcres &SFCRES SFC Reset Force an SFC block to start from the initial step on power-up or after a STOP-to-RUNtransition. end &END Temporary End The program executes from the first of Logic rung to the last rung or the END instruction, whichever is encountered first. This instruction is useful for debuggingpurposes. commnt &COMMENT Comment A rung explanation. After programming the instruction, the text can be typed in by zooming into the instruction. A special PLC service function. This function passes power if power is received and the function executes properly . Additional control functions you can select.

F8

F9

svcreq

&SVCREQ

Service Request

F10

more

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-13

3
Table 3-9. Control Functions (Continued)
Key
F1

Instruction

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F2

F3

F4

F6

F7

Pressing More (F10) displays these additional control function key assignments: mcrn &MCRN Nested Master Start a master control relay range. Control Relay This is the nested form of the MCR instruction. An MCRN causes all rungs between the nested MCRN and its subsequent ENDMCRN to be executed with no power flow. There can be nothing after an MCRN in a rung. endmcn &ENDMCRN Nested End End a nested master control relay Master Control range. This is the nested form of the Relay ENDMCR instruction. There can be nothing after a nested MCR in a rung. jumpn &JUMPN Nested Jump Jump to a specified location indicated by a LABELN in the logic. This is the nested form of the JUMP instruction. labeln &LABELN Nested Label The target location of a JUMP instruction. This is the nested form of the LABEL instruction. mcr &MCR Non-Nested Start a non-nested master control Master Control relay range. This is the non-nested Relay form of the MCR instruction. A non-nested MCR causes all rungs between the non-nested MCR and its subsequent non-nested ENDMCR to be executed with no power flow. There can be nothing after a non-nested MCR in a rung. endmcr &ENDMCR Non-Nested End End a non-nested Master Control Master Relay range. This is the non-nested Control Relay form of the ENDMCR instruction. There can be nothing after a non-nested ENDMCR in the rung. jump &JUMP Non-Nested Jump Jump to a specified location indicated by a LABEL in the logic. This is the non-nested form of the JUMP instruction. The target location of a JUMP instruction. This is the non-nested form of the LABEL instruction. Return to the first level of control functions.

F8

F9

label

&LABEL

Non-Nested Label

F10

more

3-14

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-10. Data Types
Key
F1

Instruction
bit

Mnemonic

Function

Description

F2 F3

SelectingData Types (F10) displays these function key assignments: _BI Bit A Bit data type is used with instructions which operate on bit strings that are not multiples of 16 bits, or whose reference address is not on a byte boundary (e.g., MOV or SHFREG). byte _BY Byte A Byte has an 8-bit value. word _W Word A Word data type uses 16 consecutive bits of data memory; but, instead of the bits in the data location representing a number, the bits are independent of each other. Each bit represents its own binary state (1 or 0), and the bits are not looked at together to represent an integer number. The valid range of word values is 0 to +65,535. dword _DW Double Word A Double Word data type has the same characteristics as a single word data type, except that it uses 32 consecutive bits in data memory instead of only 16 bits. Four-digit BCD numbers use 16-bit data memory locations. Each BCD digit uses four bits and can represent numbers between 0 and 9. This BCD coding of the 16 bits has a legal value range of 0 to 9999. Real numbers use 32 consecutive bits (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations). The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from 1.401298E45 to 3.402823E+38. Signed integers use 16-bit memory data locations, and are represented in 2s complement notation. The valid range of an INT data type is -32,768 to +32,767. Double precision integers are stored in 32-bit data memory locations (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations) and are always signed values. (Bit 32 is the sign bit.) The valid range of a DINT data type is -2147483648 to +2147483867. Return to the functions displayed on the screen.

F4

F5

bcd-4

_BCD4

Four-Digit Binary Coded Decimal

F7

real

_REAL

Floating Point

F8

int

_INT

Signed Integer

F9

dint

_DI

Double Precision Integer

F10

instrs

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-15

3
Data Zoom
The data zoom feature supports the PID functions by providing a display window that expands the parameters of the function block and displays them in real time with labels in a format consistent with their use. For example, a word of data may contain several boolean flags. Each flag is labeled and displayed separately. The boolean inputs and outputs to the function are also displayed. The data zoom feature is available in either ONLINE or OFFLINE mode. In ONLINE mode when the program folder is identical to the PLC, changes made to values are only stored to the PLC. Real-time updates are maintained within the data zoom window. In OFFLINE mode, changes made to values are only stored to disk.

Note
If you try to write-protect a floppy disk while the Data Zoom screen is displayed, any changes made on the Data Zoom screen will be lost when you exit the screen.

Using the Data Zoom Feature


The data zoom feature is only available in the program editor. To use this feature: 1. Position the cursor within a PID function block and press Zoom (F10). The following screen shows an example screen for the PID_ISA function.

2.

The PID function is displayed as a window, with the cursor positioned on the first field whose value can be changed. Each field in the window is displayed in a format consistent with its usage in the function. In the example above, Loop No. indicates the number this PID is within a loop structure and is, therefore, displayed as a signed integer; and Min slew time is a timing parameter displayed in seconds. Fixed point numbers, like those displayed in the Sample period field, are truncated upon entry.

3-16

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
While the data zoom window is active, the function softkeys normally displayed at the top of the screen will be blank. 3. The New Value field functions like a command line. To change the value of any field (provided that field can be changed), use the arrow keys to highlight the field, enter a new value in the New Value field, and press the Enter key. The value of the field will be changed when the Enter key is pressed. You can also use the Tab key to change the value of a field. Most field values associated with explicit parameters can be changed. The software will not allow you to highlight those fields whose values cannot be changed. In the PID function, the CV, PV, and Enable fields cannot be changed. The following table lists the formulas used to compute the percentages in these fields. Parameter
SP

4.

Formula
Percentage = (quantity - min value) / (max value - min value), where quantity is the current value of SP . Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 75% for SP: SP = [50 - (-100)] / [+100 - (-100)] = 150/200 = .75 or 75%

PV

Percentage = (quantity - min value) / (max value - min value), where quantity is the current value of PV. Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 50% for PV: PV = [0 - (-100)] / [+100 - (-100)] = 100/200 = .50 or 50%

CV

Percentage = (CV - lower clamp) / (upper clamp - lower clamp). Using this formula with the values displayed on the Data Zoom screen shown on the previous page results in a value of 10% for CV: CV = [0 - (-10)] / [+90 - (-10)] = 10/100 = .10 or 10%

Percentages are calculated to the nearest 1% on the screen. Percentages less than zero are set to 0%. Percentages greater than 999 are set to 999%. The bar will display up to 100%. Whenever a bar graph is displayed in data zoom, minimum and maximum scaling values will also need to be displayed. For the PID function, the recommended default minimum and maximum values for the SP and PV bars are -32,000 and +32,000. The minimum and maximum scaling values for the CV bar are the lower and upper clamp values. In the screen shown above, the 100 and +100 displayed immediately above the bar graphs correspond to the minimum and maximum SP and PV scaling values. 5. Press the Escape key to exit the data zoom window and return to your original position within the editor before the data zoom feature was begun.

For more information on the PID function and its parameters, refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-17

Section 2: Program Format


Program elements are combined to form rungs of ladder logic. A ladder diagram has a symbolic power source. Power is considered to flow from the left rail through a contact to the coil or function block connected to the right. From the main menu, select Program Display/Edit (F1). The screen displays a list of markers which represent parts of a program.

Marker
Variable Declarations Block Declarations

Description
To access the variable declaration table, move the cursor to this marker and press Zoom (F10). Nicknames and reference descriptions can then be entered in the table. A program can include more than one block of logic. Additional blocks, known as subroutine blocks, can be called from other blocks. When that is done, blocks must be declared before they are called. The main block has a block declaration table. This table lists all blocks which are part of the complete program. Blocks do not have block declaration tables. However, blocks can be called from the main block or from any block in the program. All logic is placed between these two markers. To enter logic, place the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker and press Insert (F1).

Start/End of ProgramLogic

The cursor keys are used to highlight the area of the program to be displayed or edited.

3-18

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Creating or Editing Program Logic
Program logic consists of various elements such as relays, timers, math functions, and other functions, placed together to form rungs of logic.

| _____ |%I0001 | | %Q0001 || || ADD_|( ) | | INT | | | | |%I0017 |I1 Q|%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST |I2 | | +0004 |_____|

Structure of a Ladder Logic Rung


The programmer allows great flexibility in entering program elements; however, it will not allow you to enter a rung with incorrect format or syntax. Each rung may contain up to eight parallel lines; each line may have up to ten elements connected in series. Examples of an element include a normally open contact, a normally closed contact, or a coil. Horizontal and vertical links are used to carry power around an element, or to place elements in parallel or series with one another.

1 | || | || | || | || | || | || | || | || | |

10

|| ||/|| || ||/||/|| || |( ) | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | vertical link | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | horizontal link

Note
Programs created using the Hand-Held Programmer must conform to this format to be totally compatible with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-19

3
The following example shows two separate rungs, which must be entered and accepted separately.

| || || || |( ) | || || ||/|( ) |

In the next example, two rung lines are connected by a vertical link, forming only one rung.

| || |+| || |( ) | | | +| ||/|( ) |

The last element of a group of rung elements in series must be a coil, a jump, or a function. Nothing may be to the right of a coil or a jump. The tenth position of a rung line is reserved for coils and jumps. A call instruction may occupy columns 9 and 10. A rung may contain up to eight coils. A rung line is not required to have elements in each column.

Ladder Logic Language Rules


These guidelines should be followed when creating or editing ladder logic: 1. 2. 3. If a rung has a transitional coil, it must be the only coil in the rung. There can be only one JUMP or MCR per rung. It must be the last instruction in the rung, and there cannot be a coil in the same rung. A rung must contain at least one contact before any coil, jump, MCR, function, or vertical link. Contacts must be entered and cannot be left blank. Function blocks cannot be tied directly into the power rail. Short circuits are not allowed.

4.

Note
The ALW_ON contact, shown below, may be used to satisfy rules 3 and 4 above.
ALW_ON | |

3-20

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
5. A rung must be composed of properly nested sub-expressions. There can be no branches either into or out of another branch. The following examples contain improperly nested rungs. A. In this example, the rung line containing the %I0005 contact branches into the middle of the sub-expression (%I0002 OR (%I0003 AND %I0004)).

| |%I0001 %I0002 %Q0001 || |+| |+( ) | | | | |%I0003 %I0004 | | +| |+| |+ | | |%I0005 | || |+ |

B. In this example, the rung line containing the %I0005 contact branches out of the middle of the sub-expression (%I0002 OR (%I0003 AND %I0004)).

| |%I0001 %I0002 %I0006 %Q0001 || |+| |+| |+( ) | | | | | |%I0003 %I0004 | | | +| |+| |+ | | | | | |%I0005 | | +| |+ |

6.

There can be no branch around (above or below) a function in a rung. The following rung is not allowed.

| |%I0001 %I0002 %Q0001 || || |+( ) | | | | | | FUNC| | |

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-21

3
7. There can be no sub-paths starting from a vertical in a rung containing a function, except for sub-paths leading directly to coils. A. The following rung is allowed because the first sub-path comes directly off the power rail and the second leads directly to coils.

| | _____ |%I0001 %I0002 | | %Q0001 || || || FUNC|+( ) | | X | | |%I0001 %I0002 %I0003 | | | %Q0002 || || || || | +( ) | |_____| |

B. The next rung is not allowed. It has a sub-path starting from a vertical and leading into the function. It also has a sub-path that does not lead directly to coils; it goes through contacts first.

| | _____ |%I0001 %I0002 | | %I0004 %Q0001 || || |+| FUNC|+| |( ) | | | X | | | |%I0003 | | |%I0005 %Q0002 | +| || | +| |( ) | |_____| |

8. 9.

There can be no contacts following a function in a rung. Note that the rung in the last example above fails this rule, too. In general, execution order of rung elements is left-to-right. Within a group of parallel branches, the first (lowest rung line) parallel branch is executed first. The first of multiple sub-paths is executed first.

3-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 3: Program Entry


Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software was designed to allow for rapid entry of relay ladder diagram programs. By allowing entry of program elements with either function keys or mnemonics, both frequent and occasional users can be satisfied. Annotation (nicknames, reference descriptions, and rung comments) can be input either prior to logic entry or as each logic element is entered. Rung comments can be entered as logic is created or inserted after the logic has been debugged. For information on annotation, refer to chapter 3, section 4, Program Annotation.

Note
Program folders on write-protected floppy disks are automatically locked. Remove the write-protect tab and unlock the folder using the lock/unlockcurrent program folder function (see chapter 7).

Using Mnemonics
Mnemonic entry enables you to enter an instruction by typing its mnemonic on the command line. For example, to enter the ADD function, you would type %ADD on the command line and press the Enter key. For some instructions, it is not necessary to type the entire mnemonic, just enough characters for the entry to be unique. For example, instead of typing &ADD to enter the ADD function, you could simply type &AD and press the Enter key. Appendix D, Instruction Mnemonics, lists the mnemonics of all program instructions. While programming, you can also display a list of mnemonics by pressing ALT-I. For many functions, you can also specify a data type or reference address. For example, &ADD_DINT would enter the double precision integer version of the ADD function at the current cursor position in the rung.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-23

3
Inserting Logic Elements
1. With the cursor on the [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker, press Insert (F1). Rungs are always inserted before the rung the cursor is on.

2.

To enter a relay element at the cursor location, press the desired function key. For example, to enter a normally open contact, press F1 with the relay functions displayed for the softkeys at the top of the screen. Or, you may enter the normally open contact by typing the mnemonic &NOCON on the command line and pressing the Enter key.

3-24

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
3. A reference may now be entered on the command line. For each reference, include both a user reference and location. There are two ways to do this: A. By entering the reference type and then the address (e.g., %I1), or B. By entering them in reverse order (e.g., 1I). The software automatically places the entry in the correct order and format when you press the Enter key. Entering the number before the reference type eliminates having to enter the % character. Then, press the Enter key. The cursor automatically advances to the next position, ready for entry of the next element. Some program functions require references that begin on a word or byte boundary. The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will automatically adjust the entries to be properly aligned. You may also combine the previous step and this step into one operation by typing the mnemonic &NOCON I1 on the command line and pressing the Enter key.

Note
The previous two operations can be combined into one by entering the reference address before pressing the contact function key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-25

3
4. This process can be continued until a rung is completed and is ready to be accepted. A rung can be accepted by pressing the Enter key with the command line empty, or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad. If there is an error in the rung, the rung is not accepted and the cursor is placed on the incorrect element for correction.

3-26

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Inserting Functions
Functions can be entered as easily as relay elements. 1. First, use the relay function keys to enter the enabling logic. In the first example screen shown below, a normally open contact with reference address %I1 is entered at the enabling logic. Select the type of function using the shift-function keys. For example, to select math functions, press Shift-F3.

2.

3.

Select the function desired using the function keys. For example, to select the ADD function, press Add (F1). Or, you may enter the ADD function by typing the mnemonic: &ADD on the command line and pressing the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-27

3
4. 5. The Tab key can now be used to move the cursor to each parameter position around the function. When the cursor is on the first input, simply type the value to be entered in this position on the command line (for example, %R0001 or 1R), and press the Tab key or Enter key to place this entry into its position. Pressing the Tab key will move the cursor to the next entry position. This process can be continued until the rung is completed and accepted.

For information on entering comments, refer to chapter 3, section 6, Rung Comments. For information on zooming into entries, refer to chapter 3, section 1, Ladder Logic Program Elements.

3-28

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Exiting Rung Entry
There are three ways to exit from a rung. 1. Press the Escape key to attempt to accept the current rung. If the rung passes the software validity test, the original function key selections (shown below) are restored and the new logic is added to the program. After accepting a rung, the cursor moves to the next rung, ready for the next rung to be entered. However, in INSERT mode a new rung is automatically opened below the newly created rung.

If the logic fails the check, an error message is displayed and the cursor is positioned on the location where the error occurred. Informational messages relating to the executability of the logic may also be displayed. 2. 3. Press the Enter key with the command line empty (or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad). This causes the same response as pressing the Escape key. Press ALT-A to exit the insert or edit function without modifying the existing ladder diagram logic. Confirmation is required. Pressing ALT-A the first time will restore the rung to its original state. In INSERT mode, this would be an empty rung. Pressing ALT-A a second time exits the insert function.

Each rung is not saved to disk as it is accepted. To update the disk, press the Escape key to exit the program editor and return to the Programming Software main menu, or press ALT-U.

Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table


You may go directly to the reference table of a reference (e.g., of a function block operand, contact, coil, etc.) under the cursor by pressing ALT-F2. Then, press Shift-F1 from the reference table to return to the same place in the program.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-29

Section 4: Program Annotation


Annotation is optional explanatory text in a program. This text makes the program easier to read and to understand.

Note
Files containing program annotation exist only in the folder, not in the PLC. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provides the following types of program annotation:

Table 3-11. Program Annotation


Type
Nickname

Description
An optional 1- to 7-character identifier, which can be used for each program reference. The characters used in a nickname may be a letter from A through Z, a numeral from 0 through 9, an underscore, or the special characters +, -, %, #, @, <, >, =, and &. The first character of the nickname must be a letter. A nickname is case-insensitive, unless a global nickname has been reassigned in a subroutine. When a global nickname (e.g., SWITCH1) has been reassigned in a subroutine, the local use of that nickname will remain in upper-case letters; however, the global use of that nickname will be displayed in lower-case letters (e.g., switch1). An optional text description of up to 32 characters which is associated with a machine reference or with implicit identifiers (e.g.,program name,subroutineblock,orJUMP/LABEL/MCR/ENDMCR).A reference description can be used with or without a nickname. Longer blocks of text (rung explanations). A comment consists of up to 2048 characters of text. On the screen, the text of a comment can be read by pressing Zoom (F10) with the cursor located at the comment rung. The comment can also be printed as part of the ladder logic.

ReferenceDescription

Comment

3-30

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Entering Nicknames and Reference Descriptions
Nicknames and reference descriptions can be entered in two different ways. The first way is to create a nickname while programming. This is done by entering the nickname and/or reference description on the command line as the reference is used.

The order of entry is not important. For example:

>%I0001 name Reference Description

Reference Description Space (required) Nickname Space (required) Machine reference

Separate the reference, nickname, and reference description by a space. Use quotation marks before and after the reference description. A double colon (::) may also be inserted between the nickname and the reference description. If a double colon is used, quotation marks are not required around the reference description.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-31

3
When you press the Enter key, if there are no conflicts, the nickname is displayed above the program element. It is also temporarily included in the variable declaration table for that program. While inserting or editing a rung, you can press ALT-V to view the variable declaration table. Temporary entries are marked with an asterisk. When the rung is accepted, the nickname is permanently added to the table. If the rung is aborted before it is accepted, this information is removed from the table. If a conflict or error occurs when you press the Enter key, the contents of the command line are not applied to the instruction and a message is displayed. Press CTRL-Home to recall the last entry made on the command line. Then, press the CTRL key and the Left or Right cursor key to move within the command line to correct the entry. Depending on which display mode is active, if you enter a nickname for a reference, it is displayed in the program instead of the reference. For example, if you entered the reference %I0104 for a normally closed contact in the logic, the display would look like this:

| |%I0104 ||/| |

If you entered a nickname and (optionally) a reference description for the reference on the command line:
%I0104 XWATMOV x APM waiting move

The display would look like this instead:

| |XWATMOV ||/| |

Note
Use ALT-N to toggle between reference address display, nickname display, reference description display, and compressed rung display. Refer to chapter 6, Programmer Setup, for more information on specifying which modes will be displayed when ALT-N is pressed. The second and simplest way to enter nicknames and reference descriptions, however, is to use the variable declaration table, described in the next section. As each entry is made in the variable declaration table, the reference description for the current entry will appear in a window in the upper right portion of the table. This window consists of 4 lines, each 7 characters in length, and will show the way the description will look above a reference when printed or displayed in expanded mode.
3-32 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

Section 5: Variable Declaration Table


Program annotation can be entered in a program using the variable declaration table, as described in this section. You may enter nicknames in the program or any subroutine. Nicknames in the programs _MAIN (global) variable declaration table are known to all subroutine blocks. Nicknames in a subroutine blocks (local) declaration table are known only to that subroutine. Each subroutine block may have its own local use of nicknames. The same reference may have different local nicknames in different subroutine blocks, as shown in these examples:
BLOCK A BLOCK B %R1 %R1 Light_1 Light_2

Two subroutine blocks may have the same nickname for different references, as shown in these examples:
BLOCK A BLOCK B %L1 %L2 RESET RESET

When using a reference address in a program block, Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software retrieves the nickname from the local table. If it does not have a local nickname, the software retrieves the nickname from the programs _MAIN table. If the nickname is not in the programs _MAIN table, the software then looks at the reserved nicknames (e.g., FST_SCN, %S0001).

Note
5000 declarations (variables and identifiers) are allowed in the programs _MAIN variable declaration table, and 256 declarations (variables and identifiers) are allowed in each subroutine blocks variable declaration table. Each table is always arranged in sorted reference address order. As more nicknames are used, performance in the program editor may be affected. To enhance performance, 736K of Expanded Memory (LIM/EMSVersion 3.02 or later) or SMARTDRV may be used.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-33

3
Displaying the Variable Declaration Table
To display the variable declaration table: 1. Move the cursor to highlight the

[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker.

2.

Press Zoom (F10).

3-34

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
3. The identifier table can be displayed from this screen by pressing Switch (F10). This table lists the program name, JUMPs, LABELs, MCRs, ENDMCRs, and subroutine blocks declared in this folder. You cannot insert new entries on this display screen; however, you can edit entries already displayed. For example, you could assign an identifier description to the program name. Variable declarations may be viewed in a window on the screen, without leaving the insert or edit function, by pressing ALT-V (ALT-V once for local variables, ALT-V twice for global variables). The variable declarations displayed in this window, however, cannot be edited. Entries temporarily listed (those created or modified during the current editing session) in the variable declarations table can be easily identified by an asterisk (*). Use the Up/Down cursor keys or Page Up/Down keys to scroll through the entries in this window; then, press the Escape key to exit the window.

4.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-35

3
Entering Variable Declarations
To enter new nicknames and reference descriptions as you go: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Insert (F1). A field will appear in the reference column. Enter the reference in this field (e.g., %R2 or 2R), and then press the Enter or Tab key to move to the Nickname field. Enter a nickname (e.g., IN_REG), and then press the Enter or Tab key to move to the Reference Description field. Enter a 1- to 32-character description of this reference. The Logicmaster software breaks reference descriptions on boundaries after every seventh character for display in a 4-line x 7-character window. Only 28 characters of the 32-character reference description are displayed in the window. You may want to add extra space in the reference description in order to have the words correctly separated in the window. To accept this entry, press the Enter key, or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad. The variable declaration table is automatically sorted each time you press the Enter key to accept a new entry. The cursor then moves to the Reference field on the next line.

5.

To enter a nickname for the next reference, simply press the Enter or Tab key and the next reference in sequence (in this example, %R0002) will be inserted into the Reference field. The cursor will move to the Nickname field. To enter a nickname for a different reference, simply type in this reference and press the Enter key. You can continue this process until all references have been defined. To exit INSERT mode, press the Escape key. To exit the variable declaration table and return to the logic entry screen, press Escape again.
GFK-0466L

6. 7.

3-36

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

3
Copying a Variable Declaration
You can copy text from the NICKNAME and REFERENCE DESCRIPTION of another variable. This editing feature is particularly useful when you are creating a program that has several similar variables using similar nicknames and reference descriptions as in the example shown on this page. To use this feature, follow these steps:

D D D D

Enter the line you wish to copy in the standard way. After you press Enter at the end of the reference description, press the Escape key to accept that variable and change the selections available through the function keys. Press the Up Arrow key (i.e., the upward cursor mover key) once to move the cursor back to the line you just entered. Press the Copy function key (F5 as can be seen in the sample shown below).

The line you copied moves down one, and a copy of it appears where your cursor is located (awaiting your modifications). First enter a new reference number, then edit the nickname and description. The sample shown on the next page shows the screen that appears immediately after pressing the Copy key (F5) from the screen shown above.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-37

Notice that the cursor is resting in the REFERENCE (i.e., reference number) field so that you can assign a unique reference number to it. You will also need to assign a unique NICKNAME and REFERENCE DESCRIPTION. Remember, you can use Ctrl-Right Arrow, i.e., hold the Control key down and press the Right Arrow (or Right cursor key), to move the cursor across the letters or words you want to keep. Then key over or add to the text you want to change; e.g., in the example shown above, you would only need to key over the last digit on both the nickname and the description.

Note
Make sure you enter a unique reference number. If you just press the Right Arrow key to advance to the NICKNAME field, the reference number from the line you copied will drop in by default which will force you to change it to an unused number when you press Enter at the end of that line.

3-38

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Editing Variable Declarations
To change the content of a variable declaration: 1. 2. 3. Place the cursor at the declaration to be changed, and press Edit (F2). Use the Enter key, cursor keys, or Tab key to move from field to field. Type over the entry as needed. After changing the entry, press the Enter key or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad to accept the changes and move to the next table entry to continue editing. Press the Escape key to accept the changes and terminate the editing session.

The region functions, described in the rung edit section of this chapter, can also be used to select, cut, paste, include, write, and delete variable declarations. For more information on these functions, refer to chapter 3, section 9, Rung Edit.

Deleting Variable Declarations


To remove one or more entries from the variable declaration table, place the cursor at the first declaration to be deleted and press Delete (F3) or ALT-D. Another way to delete entries from the table is to use the Select (F1) softkey to select the variable declaration you wish to delete, then press the Delete (F6) edit softkey. Repeat this procedure until all the entries you wish to delete have been removed from the table. To undo the delete, press ALT-A before leaving the table. Once you leave a table, you cannot undo a deletion made within that table.

Searching for Variable Declarations


The variable declaration table may be searched for a reference or nickname; it cannot be searched for a reference description. To initiate a search in the variable declaration table: 1. 2. Press Search (F4) to display the search function window. Enter either the reference or its associated nickname into the Search for field. You cannot enter a reference description in this field. Then, press the Enter key.

Using Goto
The Goto (F8) function key may be used to move the cursor within the variable declaration table. To move to the nth variable declaration, enter n on the command line, and press Goto (F8). For example, to move the cursor to the first variable declaration, enter 1 on the command line, and press Goto (F8).

Cut/Pasting Variable Declarations


The region functions, described in the rung edit section of this chapter, can also be used to select, cut, paste, include, write, and delete variable declarations. For more information on these functions, refer to chapter 3, section 9, Rung Edit.

Note
You may not paste or include variable declarations if a reference address in the paste buffer or include file is already in the variable declaration table. However, you may edit the variable declaration table before the paste or include operation to eliminate any reference address conflicts.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-39

3
Automatically Inserting References
References which do not have nicknames or reference descriptions can be automatically inserted into the variable declaration table as the program is being developed. Then, at a later time, you can go to the variable declaration editor and enter just the annotation. For information on automatically inserting references, refer to chapter 3, section 10, Editor Options.

Viewing the Identifier Table


The identifier table may be displayed by pressing Switch (F10) from the variable declaration table.

The identifier table in the _MAIN program contains the program name, subroutine block names, JUMPs, LABELs, MCRs, and ENDMCRs. The identifier table in a subroutine block contains JUMPs, LABELs, MCRs, and ENDMCRs. You cannot insert new entries on this display screen. The program name cannot have its identifier edited. A subroutine block can have its identifier edited if it is not called. All other identifiers and descriptions can be edited. The identifier table may be searched for a reference or nickname; it cannot be searched for a reference description. To initiate a search in the identifier table: 1. 2. Press Search (F4) to display the search function window. Enter either the reference or its associated nickname into the Search for field. You cannot enter a reference description in this field. Then, press the Enter key.

3-40

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Importing to and Exporting from the Variable Declarations Table
Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format
For Logicmaster uses an extension of the industry-standard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format called Shared Name File (SNF) format. Importing an SNF into the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to define nicknames ahead of time in a spreadsheet program. Exporting an SNF from the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to use the exported file with CIMPLICITYr and third party operator interfaces. The steps for importing and exporting files that use the SNF format are shown here. For information about SNF format, see Appendix I.

Importing SNF Formatted Files


When importing Shared Name File (SNF) format files, the SNF files must adhere to the standards discussed in Appendix I of this manual. If your file does adhere to those standards, then follow these steps to import: 1. Before you begin the next steps (which are all from within the programming software), make sure that your SNF is in the same directory as the program into which you are going to import. Move the cursor to highlight the shown on page 3-34. Press Zoom (F10).

2. 3.

[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker as

4.

Press region (F9). Your screen display will change to the one shown on the following page.
3-41

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

5.

Press import (F7). You will see the message shown in the following sample screen.

6.

Type the file name. The path is optional because in Step 1 you ensured that the SNF was in the same directory as the folder. As long as your SNF follows the guidelines discussed in Appendix I, it will import correctly into the Variable Declarations Table.

3-42

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Exporting SNF (CSV) Formatted Files
SNF is an extension of the industry-standard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format. For more information about CSV and SNF formats, refer to page 3-41. When exporting your Variable Declarations Table to SNF format, Logicmaster will put the Variable Declarations into Shared Name File (SNF) format. For information about SNF format, refer to Appendix I of this manual. 1. 2. Move the cursor to highlight the shown on page 3-34. Press Zoom (F10).

[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] marker as

3.

Press region (F9). The selections at the top of the screen will change to the ones shown below.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-43

3
4. Press select (F1). Then press the Cursor Down key (the Down Arrow key) until you have highlighted the portion of the Variable Declaration Table you wish to export.

The selected region will appear in reverse video as represented in the sample shown below.

5.

Press export (F8); then type the name you wish to call the SNF that Logicmaster will create from your Variable Declarations. You do not have to add an extension; Logicmaster will automatically add the extension .SNF. (The recommended method of nomenclature is to use the same name for your SNF as the folder from which it came.) If you do not enter a path, the file will save in the same directory where your program resides. Refer to Appendix I for more information about SNF format.

3-44

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
6. 7. After typing in a name, press Enter. The words Export completed will appear in the upper left portion of your screen just below the menu. Press the Escape key after seeing the Export completed to return to the program.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-45

Section 6: Rung Comments

Each COMMENT instruction has a unique text block associated with it. Pasting/including a comment will create a copy of the text block for each COMMENT instruction pasted. The text for any COMMENT instruction is edited independently of any other COMMENT instruction. This allows you to copy a COMMENT instruction by cutting and pasting the text; then, you can edit the pasted text. Refer to chapter 3, section 5, Variable Declaration Table, for information on cutting and pasting variable declarations. Release 1 and Release 2 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software permitted two or more comments to be associated with one block of text. If you have such duplicate comments and want to separate them, write the entire block contents to a side file and delete all the logic. Then, include the side file into the empty block. Now, each of the duplicate comment locations will have its own copy of the text.

Inserting a Rung Comment


To insert rung comments, move the cursor to the rung you wish to insert a comment before. 1. 2. Press Insert (F1) and then Control (Shift-F9) to select the control functions. Press F8 to select the COMMENT function, or use the mnemonic by typing: &COMMENT on the command line and pressing the Enter key. The screen should appear as shown below:

3.
3-46

Press the Escape key to accept the rung and exit INSERT mode.
GFK-0466L

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

3
Adding Text
Text can be entered into the COMMENT instruction by positioning the cursor on the COMMENT instruction and pressing Zoom (F10).

This is a simple full-screen editor, which allows you to input your rung description. Up to 2048 characters of text are permitted. The available keys in the comment editor include: Key
Cursor keys Page Up key Page Down key Insert key Delete key Backspace key Home key End key

Description
Move the cursor within the rung. Move the cursor up one page. Move the cursor down one page. Change the text editing mode (INSERT or REPLACE). Delete the character at the cursor position. Delete the character to the left of the cursor position. Position the cursor on the first character of the first line of the comment text. Position the cursor at the end of the comment text.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-47

3
User-Defined Footers in Listings
You can define up to four (4) lines of text to be printed at the bottom of each listing page generated by the Logicmaster 90-30 Programmer printing utility. Specify these lines of text using comment directives similar to the existing title, subtitle and border directives (\T , \S, and \B respectively). To use create a footer for a program file, follow these steps: 1. 2. Follow the steps described on the previous pages to create a COMMENT. On a separate line at the beginning of the comment text, key in \F1 (for Footer 1); then key in the text you wish to appear in the footer. (You can enter up to four footers in this manner, using F1, F2, F3, and F4 as the footer line directives for footers 1 through 4 respectively. You can enter them in any order, but each must be on a separate line and must be at the beginning of the comment text in which they are entered. Regardless of the order entered, they will always print with Footer 1 before Footer 2, Footer 2 before Footer 3, etc.) A sample of this is shown below:

3.

When you are finished with your footers, press the Escape key to return to your program and accept that rung.

Note
Footer 4 supercedes the standard LM90 listing page footer line. If \F4 is not specified, the standard Logicmaster 90 footer is printed. If the \F4 directive is specified without text, the LM90 footer line will not be printed.

3-48

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
The following text shows the footer that resulted from the comment/footer settings shown on the previous page:
Issued by: DB Introduced: EC Number: 14012 Approved: LM Latest: EC Number: 14013 xxxx This is a sample program xxxx Program: STATMNG C:\LM90\STATMNG Block: _MAIN

The following restrictions should be observed:

D D D D D D

Any blank footer lines will be printed in the listing as blanks. If text for a specified footer line has been previously defined and that footer line directive is specified again, but without text, that footer line will no longer be printed. Once specified, footer lines will be printed on each page of the listing until they are changed with user-defined footer line directives in subsequent comment text. For an 80-column listing, you can enter text up to 80 characters in length. For a 132-column listing, you can enter up to 132 characters. Footer line text less than the page width is centered to the page. To start user-defined footers on the pages prior to the logic, the comment containing the user-defined footers must be the first instruction in the main block of the program.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-49

3
Creating Borders
To make comments stand out in program printouts, borders can be printed around them. The software will automatically create the border using any character you enter, as instructed below: 1. 2. Create the text for the comment. At the beginning of the comment on a line by itself, enter \B (or \b, as lowercase alphanumeric characters are also recognized) and an ASCII character to be used as the border. The ASCII character must be the next character after the B. For example, entering \B? would create a border of question marks around the outside of the text. If the comment text does not contain \B followed by the ASCII character for the border, then Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software prints asterisks by default.

12/2/93

11:49

GE FANUC LOGICMASTER 90-30 DOCUMENTATION TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page 3

| << RUNG 4 STEP #0049 >> | | (???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????) | (? The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling ?) | (? conditions are met. ?) | (???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????) | | <<RUNG 5 STEP #0050 >> Cross reference for AUTO | |/| 5, 7 | | AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO +| || || || |+|/||/||/||/|( ) | 9 10 19 | | AUTO | +|/|+ | 5 | | << RUNG 6 STEP #0060 >> Cross reference for EMERGST | | | 5, 6 | | EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +| |+| |+| |+| |( ) | | | 29 | | |EMERGST|SPN MTR| | +|/|+|/|+ | 6 8 |

The border of question marks shown in this example will be used for all subsequent rung comments in the program, unless it is changed or the border is deleted. 3. To print out a comment with no border, enter \B followed by the space character.

3-50

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Starting a New Page of Comments
To print a new page of comments: 1. 2. Create the text for the comment. Enter \P or \p, as lowercase alphanumeric characters are also recognized, on a line by itself.

The text following the \P character will then begin on a new page. The \P can be used several times within a comment, with text before and after each one.

Printing a Title
When the printer output is defined as described in chapter 9, a title and subtitle for the printout are created. This title and subtitle will appear on every page, unless changed as described below: 1. 2. At the place in the program where the new title and subtitle should begin, enter a comment in the logic. This will be printed as the beginning of a new page. On the first line of the comment, enter the following: A. \T or \t with the new title (up to 62 characters) on the same line. B. \S or \s with the new subtitle (also up to 62 characters) on the same line. The new title and subtitle will appear on each subsequent page. \T or \S alone can be specified. \B, \T, or \S must be on separate lines. Those lines must be first in a comment, but they can be in any order.

Creating Longer Comments


The maximum number of characters that can be included in a comment is 2048. Longer text can be included in printouts (but not displayed in program function or mode) using an annotation text file, as described below: 1. Create the comment as described on the previous page. A. Enter text to the point where the text from the other file should begin. B. Move the cursor to the beginning of a new line and enter \I or \i, the drive followed by a colon, the subdirectory or folder, and the file name, as shown in this example:
\I d:\text\commnt1

The drive designation is not necessary if the file is located on the same drive as the program folder. C. Continue editing the program, or exit to MS-DOS. 2. After exiting the programmer, create a text file using any MS-DOS compatible software package. Give the file the file name in the comment, and place it on the drive specified in the comment.
3-51

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

Section 7: Changing the Display Mode


The view mode setup function, described in chapter 6, Programmer Setup, enables you to specify which modes are displayed when you press ALT-N. These view modes range from showing only rung references to showing reference names and reference descriptions in an expanded rung form (display all mode). You can also view the maximum amount of program logic on a screen by selecting a compressed rung mode. Display all mode shows reference description information in four 7-character segments at each occurrence of an identifier or reference address in the program editor. The Variable Declaration Editor displays a 4 x 7 character window with the reference description for the current entry.

Note
The display mode (ALT-N) cannot be changed during RUNG EDIT or RUNG INSERT mode. Each time ALT-N is pressed, the editor display will move to the next display mode. The five display modes are listed below. Display All Mode
A B C D E

Description
Reference descriptions off, nicknames on. Reference descriptions off, nicknames off. Reference descriptions on, nicknames on. Reference descriptions on, nicknames off. Compressed rung mode.

Lines / Rung
3 screen lines per rung line. 3 screen lines per rung line. 7 screen lines per rung line. 7 screen lines per rung line. 1 screen line per rung line.

Mode A is the default mode. Each time ALT-N is pressed, the mode changes to the next mode (e.g., mode A to B). If ALT-N is pressed while mode E is displayed, the display cycles back to mode A. Refer to the information on View Modes Setup (ALT-N) in chapter 6, Programmer Setup, in order to select the modes displayed when ALT-N is pressed.

Note
The mode identifier letters A, B, C, D, and E are used for reference in this document only.

3-52

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Display Mode A: Reference descriptions off, nicknames on.

Display Mode B: Reference descriptions off, nicknames off.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-53

3
Display Mode C: Reference descriptions on, nicknames on.

Display Mode D: Reference descriptions on, nicknames off.

3-54

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Display Mode E: Compressed rung mode.

Display Mode D without status lines (press ALT-E to remove the status lines):

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-55

3
The following screen shows how the reference description breaks within the 4-line x 7-character window when the cursor is on %I0105.

3-56

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 8: Subroutine Blocks

Subroutine blocks in Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software provide structured programming for the Series 90-30 PLC. Subroutine blocks are not available for the Series 90-20 PLC nor for Micro PLCs. For 90-30 PLCs, up to 64 subroutine block declarations are allowed. Subroutines are declared through the block declaration editor. To create or modify subroutine declarations, place the cursor on the [ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] marker. Then, press Zoom (F10) to display the block declarations screen.

Subroutine block declarations consist of:

D D D D

A label identifying the block as being used with a subroutine instruction. The number corresponding to the Hand Held Programmer s subroutine number. A graphic box containing a subroutine name of up to 7 alphanumeric characters. The language the subroutine was programmed in. Initially, this field is blank. It will remain empty until you have entered some logic for the subroutine. Once you have zoomed into the block to enter logic, the letters LD (ladder diagram language) are displayed after LANG: beside the block name. A 32-character descriptive explanation. An indicator that it has errors. This indicator is only displayed if the block is not executable. (See screen capture at top of the next page for an example of the error message.)
3-57

D D

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3
The following screen shows an example of two subroutine block declarations, one without errors and one with errors.

Adding Subroutine Block Declarations


To add a subroutine block declaration, place the cursor at the desired location, enter the block name on the command line, and press Insert (F1). A 32-character explanation can also be inserted at this time. If you press F1 with the command line blank, a box containing seven question marks (???????) will be displayed for the subroutine block. When the subroutine block declaration is inserted in the software, the next available Hand Held Programmer number (from 1 to 64) is assigned to it.

Editing Subroutine Block Declarations


To change a subroutine block declaration, place the cursor at the declaration to be changed and press Edit (F2). Type over the entry as needed. After changing the entry, press the Enter key (or Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad) to move to the next table entry and continue editing; or press the Escape key to exit editing. Use the Tab, Back Tab, Previous, or Next key, or the cursor keys to move the cursor. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll the display up and down. When you leave the subroutine block declarations, any changes made are automatically stored to the current program folder. You can also update the program folder while working on the screen by pressing ALT-U.

3-58

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Deleting Subroutine Block Declarations
A subroutine block declaration can be deleted if there are no CALL instructions to that subroutine block in the program logic. Deleting a subroutine block also deletes its associated logic. To delete a subroutine block and declaration, place the cursor at the declaration to be deleted and press Delete (F3).

Searching for Subroutine Block Declarations


In order to search for a subroutine block declaration, you must have the Block Declaration screen displayed on your programmer. Then, press Search (F4). Enter the name of the subroutine block in the Search for field, set the Scope to LOCAL, and press the Enter key. You can search for a subroutine CALL instruction from either the logic or the Block Declaration screen by pressing Search (F4). Then, enter the name of the subroutine block in the Search for field, or enter &CALL to search for all subroutine CALL instructions, and press the Enter key.

Using Goto
The Goto (F8) function key may be used to move the cursor. To move to a particular subroutine block declaration, enter the number of that declaration on the command line, and press Goto (F8). For example, to move the cursor to the first subroutine block declaration, enter 1 on the command line, and press Goto (F8). You may also go to a subroutine block by simply entering the block name on the command line and pressing Goto (F8).

Zooming into Subroutine Block Logic


To display the subroutine block logic, place the cursor on the block name and press Zoom (F10). You can edit the logic on this screen.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-59

3
Locking/Unlocking Subroutines
The block locking feature allows you to lock subroutines. Four types of locks are available: Type of Lock
View Edit Perm View Perm Edit

Description
Once locked, you cannot zoom into that subroutine. Once locked, the information in the subroutine cannot be edited. The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked. The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked.

In addition to the locking capability, locked subroutines can also be unlocked, unless they are permanently locked. A search or search and replace function may be performed on a view-locked subroutine. If the target of the search is found in a view-locked subroutine, one of the following messages is displayed, instead of logic: For view-locked subroutines:
Found in locked block. (Continue/Quit)

For edit-locked subroutines:


Cannot write to locked block. (Continue/Quit)

You may continue or abort the search. If you decide to continue, the locked subroutine is skipped and the search continues from the next subroutine. If you decide to quit, the search is aborted. For more information on search and search/replace, refer to chapter 3, section 11, Search Function. Folders that contain locked subroutines may be cleared or deleted. If a folder contains locked subroutines, these blocks remain locked when the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software copy, backup, and restore folder functions are used. For more information on program folders, refer to chapter 7, Program Folders.

3-60

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Locking a Subroutine
To lock a subroutine: 1. Move the cursor to the

[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] marker and press Zoom (F10).

2.

In the block declaration editor, move the cursor to the desired subroutine and press Lock (F5) to display the Lock/Unlock Block screen. The subroutine name is included as part of the title on this screen.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-61

Field
Lock State

Description
Specify the operation to be performed on the current subroutine. Use the Tab key to view the values for this field: S UNLOCK: The current subroutine is unlocked. S VIEWLOCK : A view lock is set on the subroutine, and you cannot zoom into the subroutine. If you try to zoom into the subroutine, the error message Zoom denied because the block is locked is displayed. S EDITLOCK : An edit lock is set on the subroutine, and the subroutine cannot be changed. If you try to edit the subroutine, the error message Edit denied because the block is locked is displayed. S PERMVIEWLOCKorPERMEDITLOCK: The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked once it is locked. When the desired value is displayed in the Lock State field, press the Enter key. If you try to enter an incorrect value or leave the field empty, a message is displayed in the message area of the screen and the field remains active. If you try to lock a subroutine that is already locked, the message Block already locked is displayed in the message area and the screen remains displayed. Specify a password of up to four characters to lock a subroutine. Validcharacters include A through F and 0 through 9. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is converted to an uppercase letter. Once a password is set, the same password must be entered before the subroutine can be unlocked. The characters of the password are displayed as they are typed into the Password field. For PERMVIEWLOCK and PERMEDITLOCK, the Password field is ignored. Passwords are not required and cannot be used with permanently locked blocks.

Password

3.

If no lock is set on the current subroutine, the Lock State field is set to UNLOCK when the screen is displayed. If a lock is set on the current subroutine, then the LockState field is set to the type of lock imposed on the block. Initially, the Password field is empty. To set the lock, enter the value in the LockState field. Move the cursor to the Password field, and enter a password. Then, press the Enter key. The software will prompt you to confirm the locking process with the message Is logic block to be locked?(Y/N). If you enter Y (Yes) after the confirmation prompt, the locking process begins. Entering N (No) aborts the process. Once the subroutine is successfully locked, the message Block locked is displayed in the message area of the screen, the type of lock and password are written to the subroutine lock header, and the Password field is cleared. To quit the Lock/Unlock Block screen, press the Escape key. To restore the value of the fields to their original values, press ALT-A.

4.

5.

6.

3-62

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Unlocking a Subroutine
A previously view-locked or edit-locked subroutine may be unlocked in the block declaration editor, unless it is permanently view locked or permanently edit locked. 1. Move the cursor to the desired subroutine block and press Lock (F5) to display the Lock/Unlock Block screen.

The current subroutine name is included as part of the title on this screen. If the current subroutine is locked, the LockState field indicates the type of lock. If the subroutine is not locked, the field is set to UNLOCK. The Password field is initially empty. 2. 3. 4. To unlock the subroutine, set the value of the LockState field to UNLOCK. Move the cursor to the Password field, and enter the correct password. As each character of the password is typed, an asterisk is displayed in the field. Then, press the Enter key. The password you entered is compared with the password last set. If the two passwords are identical, the subroutine is unlocked and the message Block unlocked is displayed in the message area of the screen. Once the subroutine is unlocked, the LockState field is set to UNLOCK and the Password field contains the password of the block just unlocked. In addition, the password is cleared in the subroutine header. If the passwords do not match, the subroutine is not unlocked, the error message Incorrect password given for unlock is displayed in the message area of the screen, the Password field is cleared, and the Lock/Unlock Block screen remains displayed. To quit the Lock/Unlock Block screen, press the Escape key. To restore the value of the fields to their original values, press ALT-A.

5.

6.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-63

3
Permanently Locking a Subroutine
In addition to VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK, there are two types of permanent locks. If a PERMVIEWLOCK lock is set, all zooms into a subroutine are denied. If a PERMEDITLOCK lock is set, all attempts to edit the block are denied. Therefore, passwords are not required and cannot be used with permanently locked subroutines.

Warning
Permanent locks differ from the regular VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK in that once set, they cannot be removed.

Once a PERMEDITLOCK is set, it can only be changed to a PERMVIEWLOCK; you cannot unlock the block first and then set a PERMVIEWLOCK. A PERMVIEWLOCK cannot be changed to any other type of lock. When you press the Enter key to initiate the locking, the software will prompt you to confirm any permanent lock.

Displaying the Lock Status of the Subroutine


The display zoom level function (ALT-X) can be used to display the lock status of the subroutine in the block declaration editor. Move the cursor to the desired block, and press ALT-X. The following example screen shows a block that is locked for view.

3-64

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Periodic Subroutines
Model 340 and higher CPUs support the use of a periodic subroutine. A periodic subroutine is a single subroutine with a unique name in the form 1Tiiii, which will execute periodically during RUN mode. If a subroutine with this name is present in the PLC when it transitions from STOP to RUN mode, this subroutine will be executed at periodic intervals while the PLC is in RUN mode. If a RUN MODE STORE is performed, a periodic subroutine will be stopped while the PLC is in PAUSE mode. (For more information on RUN MODE STORE and PAUSE mode, refer to chapter 8, Program Utilities.)

Note
Only Model 340 and higher Series 90 -30 PLCs support use of a periodic subroutine. More specifically, Model 341 CPUs, Version 4.20 or later, all Model 340 CPUs, and all 350 and higher CPUs support periodic subroutines. You can specify a periodic subroutine by giving the block a name in the form: 1T0001, where the four digits after the T indicate the number of time intervals between executions of the block. If the leading zeros of the interval are not specified, the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will fill them in so that the total number of characters is six. If the time interval specified is too small for execution of the subroutine and the rest of the normal PLC sweep, the PLC watchdog timer may be activated. The time per interval is .001 seconds. The maximum time allowed between executions is 10 milliseconds. When you enter a subroutine name with the correct format for a periodic subroutine, the timebase, interval value, and INTR will be displayed beside the subroutines name and number, instead of SUBR.

Executing a Periodic Subroutine


Each execution of the periodic subroutine will occur interval seconds after the previous start, as shown below:

t start < end interval start > end

>

Note
The latency for the periodic subroutine (i.e., the maximum interval between the time the periodic subroutine should have executed and the time it actually executes) can be around .35 milliseconds if there is no PCM, CMM, or ADC module in the main rack. If there is a PCM, CMM or ADC module in the main rack even if it is not configured or used the latency can be almost 2.25 milliseconds. For that reason, use of the periodic subroutine with PCM-based products is not recommended.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-65

3
Restrictions on Use of the Periodic Subroutine

D D D D

Only one periodic subroutine per program is allowed. Periodic subroutines cannot be called by the main program or by another subroutine. If you call another subroutine from the periodic subroutine, the subroutine being called must not be called from anywhere else in the program. If you attempt to load a program with a periodic subroutine into a version of Logicmaster 90-30 software prior to Release 4.01, you will not be able to display or edit the program. Likewise, you cannot store a periodic subroutine to a PLC prior to Version 4.20. If a DOIO function block whose I/O reference range includes an intelligent module is executed within a periodic subroutine, communication with the module may be lost. Timer (TMR, ONDTR, and OFDTR) function blocks will not execute properly within a periodic subroutine. A DOIO function block within a periodic subroutine whose reference range includes references assigned to a Smart I/O Module (HSC, APM, Genius, etc.) will cause the CPU to lose communication with the module. The FST_SCN and LST_SCN contacts (%S1 and %S2) will have an indeterminate value during execution of the periodic subroutine. A periodic subroutine cannot call or be called by other subroutines. The PID function block depends in its implementation on the sweep time of the main program. Consequently, it will not function properly when called from a periodic subroutine.

D D

3-66

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 9: Rung Edit


After a logic program has been entered, there is always a need to make modifications, either to correct logic errors or to add new capabilities. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software has an array of features to make this process easy. The same function keys used to initially enter a rung are available to insert new rungs. In addition, there are function keys to edit or modify existing rungs.

Function Key
F1

Function
Insert

Description
Add one or more rungs to the program. Selecting the insert function opens a new space above the rung where the cursor is positioned and displays the Edit Rung keys, which are used to select program elements. This allows you to create a new rung. Edit the rung at the cursor location. The edit function activates the current rung, enabling you to modify that rung. When F2 is pressed, the Edit Rung keys are displayed at the top of the screen. These keys are used to select program elements. Initiateword-for-word instruction changes using the rung edit softkeys instead of mnemonics. Locate a program element. Access coil checking and other editor options. Go to the specified rung. To use this feature, type the rung number you want to go to, then press F8. Access additional rung edit softkeys. Go to a more detailed level. To return to the original level, press the Escape key.

F2

Edit

F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10

Modify Search Option Goto More Zoom

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-67

3
Pressing More (F9) displays these additional rung edit softkeys.

Function Key
F1

Function
Select

Description
Select or deselect a rung or group of rungs. Rungs or declarations may also be deselected by pressing F1 again, by pressing ALT-A, or by pressing the Escape key. After deselecting the rungs or declarations, the message Select mode cancelled is displayed on the message line and the cursor remains on the last rung or declaration that had been selected. Delete the selected section of rungs or declarations from a program and put them in the cut buffer. After a cut operation, the cursor will appear on the rung or declaration immediately after the selected region. Insert previously cut rungs or declarations from the cut buffer. Cut rungs and declarations may be pasted any number of times, until they are replaced by new information in the cut buffer, or until the program editor is exited. Insert previously written rungs or declarations back into the original program, or into any other program. Written rungs and declarations may be included any number of times. Copy the selected section of rungs or declarations from a program into a special file. After a write, the cursor remains on the last rung or declarationselected. Delete the rung at the cursor location or a range of selected rungs. Enter the rung number on the command line, and then press F8 to go to a specific rung in the ladder diagram logic. You can also specify a subroutine number and rung number in the subroutine to go to a specific rung in that subroutine. Return to the first level of rung edit softkeys. Zoom into the item the cursor is on.

F2

Cut

F3

Paste

F4

Include

F5

Write

F6 F8

Delete Goto

F9 F10

More Zoom

Note
The function keys listed above can also be applied to the variable declaration table. Using the file write function, a group of reference descriptions can be written to a file to be used by another program.

3-68

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Editing a Rung
When either the insert, edit, or modify function is activated by pressing F1, F2, or F3, respectively, the following softkey selections are displayed at the top of the screen.

These function keys provide access to the instructions required to edit ladder diagram rungs.

Note
Only one rung is active at a time in either the insert or edit function. Each rung must be completed and accepted by the software before the next rung can be edited.

Entering Insert or Edit Mode


Enter either INSERT or EDIT mode by: 1. Pressing F1 to enter INSERT mode. In this mode, the new rung is inserted before the rung on which the cursor is positioned. Therefore, make sure the cursor is on the rung following the location for the new rung before you press F1. Pressing F2 to enter EDIT mode. Then, move the cursor to the rung element you want to change.

2.

Entering Instructions
Select instructions by: 1. After entering Insert or Edit mode (as discussed above), typing the mnemonic for the instruction, preceded by an ampersand character (&). (Refer to appendix D, Instruction Mnemonics, for a listing of the mnemonics for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software.) Then, press the Enter key. After entering Insert or Edit mode (as discussed above), pressing the Shift key and a function key to display a specific group of instructions. Then, select a specific instruction within that group by pressing its function key.

2.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-69

3
In this example, the ADD function is selected by typing the mnemonic: &ADD on the command line.

After pressing the Enter key, the screen adjusts to display the complete new instruction and the ADD function is inserted.

3-70

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Entering/Modifying Data Types
Some instructions support different data types. To change ADD_INT to ADD_DINT, press Types (F10) with the math functions still displayed on the screen. Then, press DINT (F9) with the cursor on the ADD function block to create the following screen. An alternative way to select ADD_DINT is to type &ADD_DINT on the command line, and then press the Enter key.

Moving the Cursor within a Rung


Use the keys listed in the table below to move within the rung. Key
Cursor keys Tab and Shift-Tab Home key End key Insert key Delete key Backspace key CTRL-Left Cursor or CTRL-Right Cursor

Description
Move the cursor within the rung. Move among the inputs and outputs of a function. Position the cursor on column 1 in row 1. Position the cursor on the last defined row. For Command Line Entry Change the text editing mode (INSERT or REPLACE). Delete the character at the cursor position. Delete the character to the left of the cursor position. Move the cursor within the command line.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-71

3
Entering a Reference Address
Enter a reference address on the command line. Then, press the Enter key to apply the reference to the operand at the current cursor location. Repeat this step for each operand in the instruction. For multiple operand instructions, you may find that pressing the Tab key is more efficient because doing so causes Logicmaster to apply the reference to the operand at the current cursor location and automatically moves the cursor to the next operand location awaiting your input. For single operand instructions, the reference address can be entered on the command line before pressing the function key (described in the previous step). Then, when the function key is pressed, the reference address is automatically applied to the instruction.

Entering Nicknames
Nicknames can also be created or modified on the command line. To do this, enter the nickname together with its machine reference and any associated reference description. (Refer to chapter 3, section 4, Program Annotation, for more information on entering nicknames and reference descriptions.)

Using Vertical and Horizontal Links


Use Vertical Links (F8) and Horizontal Links (F9) to connect the instructions within a rung. These links are available from the relay functions, but may also be entered without returning to the relay function menu by pressing the Vertical bar (|) key to enter a vertical link or the Tilde (~) key to enter a horizontal link.

3-72

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Using Continuation Coils and Contacts
Use the Continuation Coil (F1) and the Continuation Contact (F2) to continue relay ladder rung logic beyond the limit of ten columns. These keys are available from the relay functions by pressing More (F10); they may also be entered using their mnemonics (&COILCTD and &CONCTD). There can be only one continuation coil and/or one continuation contact per rung. The Continuation Coil (F1) is used to carry the current rungs status to the rung which has a continuation contact. The continuation coil can only be placed in column 10 of the rung. It does not require the use of a continuation contact in following rungs for editing. The Continuation Contact (F2) is used to continue the status of the continuation coil rungs logic on the continuation contacts rung.

The state of the last executed continuation coil is the flow state that will be used on the next executed continuation contact. The continuation contact does not require the use of a continuation coil in previous rungs for editing. However, if the flow of logic does not execute a continuation coil before it executes a continuation contact, the state of that contact will be no flow.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-73

3
Deleting an Element
To delete an operand or instruction from a rung while in INSERT or EDIT mode, press ALT-D or Open Space (Shift-F10) and then press Delete Instruction (F10). Enter another instruction in the space left by the deleted instruction, or enter a horizontal link. An instruction may also be deleted by replacing it with another instruction. To remove the horizontal links and coil that follow the ADD_DINT instruction, place the cursor on each logic segment and press ALT-D. The Tilde (~) key or Horizontal Link (F9) softkey can also be used to clear the link.

Using Open Space Functions


To add open space to a rung in INSERT or EDIT mode, select Open Space (Shift-F10). Then, select the specific function key described below: Function Key
F1

Function
Move Right

Description
Move the element at the cursor position, and all the elements to the right of the cursor position, one position to the right in all lines. Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. Create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. Delete an entire column of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. All elements to the right of the deleted column will automatically move left. Delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. Remove nicknames from the variable declaration table. Enter the nickname to be deleted on the command line before pressing F9. Delete an operand or instruction from a rung. (You may also press ALT-D to delete an operand or instruction.)

Page
3-83

F3 F5

Move Down Delete Column Delete Row Delete Nickname Delete Instruction

3-84 3-85

F7 F9

3-86 N/A

F10

3-87

3-74

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Completing (Accepting) Rung Entry
After changing the rung, press the Enter key with the command line empty (or Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad) to accept the edited rung and move the cursor to the next rung for editing. In EDIT mode, you must press the Edit (F2) key after the rung is accepted in order to edit the next rung. In INSERT mode, it is not necessary to press Edit (F2). You will still be in INSERT mode after the rung is accepted and can enter the next rung. You will remain in INSERT mode until you press the Escape key. Press ALT-A to quit the rung without saving any changes in the program.

Entering an Instruction Length


To change the length of the instruction (in this example to 8), do the following:

D D D

Position the cursor on the function. Type 8 (i.e., the length appropriate for your situation8 in this example) on the command line. Press the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-75

3
Viewing Variable Declarations
To view the current set of variable declarations from anywhere in the Program Editor, press ALT-V to invoke the variable declaration window. The window allows cursor and page key scrolling. Pressing ALT-V again will show the next table if it exists (local or global). In RUNG INSERT or EDIT mode, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the variable declarations that were created or modified during the current editing session. These new or modified declarations will remain declared if the rung is accepted.

Deleting a Rung
To remove a single rung of logic, place the cursor at the rung, press More (F9), and then press Delete (F6); or simply press ALT-D (while not in INSERT or EDIT mode).

3-76

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Selecting Rungs
The cutting and file writing of rungs requires that a section of rungs first be selected. To select the rungs: 1. 2. Press More (F9) to display the cut/paste function keys. Move the cursor to the rung at the beginning or end of the section to be selected. Then, press Select (F1). The message Select mode initiated ... displayed on the message line indicates that the select function has been activated. Once this function is active, the only functions available are cursor, page, cut, write, help, and goto. The current rung is automatically selected. By pressing the Up/Down cursor keys, Prev, Next, Page Up/Down, Home, or End keys, you can add subsequent or previous rungs into the selected region. Selected rungs are shown in reverse video on the display.

3.

4.

The Select (F1) softkey acts as a toggle between the select and deselect functions. To deselect the selected rungs, press the Select (F1) key or ALT-A. A. Press Cut (F2) to cut the selected rungs. B. Press Write (F5) to write the selected rungs to a file. C. Press Delete (F6) or ALT-D to delete the selected rungs.

5.

To deselect the selected rungs, press Select (F1). The F1 key acts as a toggle between the select and deselect functions.

Note
The select function can also be used to select variable declarations and interrupt declarations.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-77

3
Cutting Selected Rungs
The cut function enables you to remove a section of previously selected rungs from the current program. Any nicknames, reference descriptions, or comment annotation used within the selected rungs are also copied with the cut rungs for later use in a paste operation. However, nicknames and reference descriptions remain in the variable declaration table. This function can be used to reorder logic within the program; it is also useful for deleting a section of rungs. To cut a section of rungs from the current programs logic: 1. 2. Select one or more rungs, as previously described. Press Cut (F2) to cut the selected rungs from the program. The select function is automatically exited as part of the cut operation. The cursor will be on the rung after the cut section of rungs.

If the cut buffer becomes full, repeat the operation, selecting a smaller amount of logic. 3. All rungs below the selected section will scroll up to fill the gap of the just-cut section.

Note
Cut rungs are saved only as long as you remain in the program editor.

3-78

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Pasting Previously Cut Rungs
The paste function enables you to insert a copy of a section of previously cut rungs before the current rung. Any unique reference address nickname assignments and any identifier name will be added to the current programs variable declaration table. Once the cut operation is complete and the logic has been placed in the buffer, press Paste (F3) to initiate the paste function. The position of the cursor remains the same. All entries below the inserted section will scroll down to make room for the just-pasted rungs.

Conflicts may occur between declarations in the section of rungs to be pasted (buffer) and declarations in the existing (target) program. A nickname in the buffer that is identical to one in the target program is simply passed over and ignored during the paste operation. When a declaration in the buffer has the same reference address but a different nickname than a declaration in the target program, the declaration from the buffer is not added to the existing programs declaration table. A name conflict occurs when a declaration in the buffer has the same name as a declaration in the target program, but a different meaning. For a nickname, the different meaning would be a different reference address. Name conflicts are resolved by automatically generating a unique system name for the conflicting declaration in the buffer, and then adding it to the target program. The presence of system names (any name beginning with the $ character, e.g., $LA00001) in the pasted logic indicates that name collisions have occurred during the paste operation. Implicit declarations, such as JUMPs, LABELs, and MCR names, are handled in the same way.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-79

3
Note
If coil checking is set to SINGLE, rung(s) may not be pasted should a coil-use conflict occur. %T references should be used on coils to allow rungs to be pasted, or use the WARN MULTIPLE coil check option. (Refer to the information on coil checking later in this section.) %T references may later be replaced with %Q or %M references.

Writing Selected Rungs to a File


The file write function enables you to store a copy of a section of previously selected rungs from the program logic to a disk file called a side file or program segment. This function is useful for creating a file of commonly used rungs which can be used in different programs. Only variable declarations used in the rungs that are selected are written to the file. To write the entire variable declaration table to a file, you should select the entire table from the variable declaration section of the program.

Note
The file write function differs from the cut function in that selected rungs are not removed from the program. 1. 2. To use the file write function, you must first select the rungs to be written to the side file. Press F1 to select the current rung; then, select additional rungs required. Enter the name of the side file on the command line, and press Write (F5). The selected section of rungs is written out to the specified file.

Any valid file name, minus an extension, can be used for the side file. If the file specification includes a path, the specified directory must already exist. It is not created as part of a file write operation. If no path is specified, the current folder is assumed.

3-80

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Including Rungs from a File
The file include function enables you to insert a copy of a file of previously written rungs before the current rung in the program logic. All rungs below the inserted section will be scrolled down to make room for the just-included rungs.

Note
Side files which contain subroutines cannot be inserted into folders using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software releases prior to Release 3. Any unique reference address nickname assignments and any identifier names are added to the current programs variable declaration table. If the program name in the include file declaration matches a program name in the target folder, the duplicate entry is not added. Conflicts are handled as previously described under Pasting Previously Cut Rungs. If the program name from the include file conflicts with a non-program name in the target folder, a unique system name is automatically generated for the program declaration before it can be added to the target folder. For example, an MCR has the name END_OP in the include file, but END_OP is also the name of the folder (or a nickname). A new name is generated for END-OP ($MC0001). A corresponding initial logic block and data block are also created. 1. 2. To use the file include function, the program logic to be included must have been previously stored to a particular disk file. Press Include (F4) and enter the name of the side file on the command line. Then, press the Enter key. The contents of the specified disk file are included before the current rung in the program.

Any valid file name, minus an extension, can be used for the side file. The file specification may include a path; however, if no path is specified, the current folder is assumed.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-81

3
Open Space Functions
Open space functions are used, while editing a rung, to open element spaces in the rung. To display the open space function keys shown below, press F10.

Function Key
F1

Function
Move Right

Description
Move the element at the cursor position, and all the elements to the right of the cursor position, one position to the right in all lines. Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. Create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. Delete an entire column of instructions(includingverticals) and operands within a rung. All elements to the right of the deleted column will automatically move left. Delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. Remove nicknames from the variable declarations table. Enter the nickname to be deleted on the command line before pressing F9. Delete an operand or instruction from a rung. (You may also press ALT-D to delete an operand or instruction.)

Page
3-83

F3 F5

Move Down Delete Column Delete Row Delete Nickname Delete Instruction

3-84 3-85

F7 F9

3-86 N/A

F10

3-87

3-82

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Move Logic Right
The Move Right (MOV RT) function moves the element at the cursor position, and all the elements to the right of the cursor position, one position to the right in all lines. Shunts are automatically inserted into the new column in the rung. In the following example, the column next to the power rail is moved right one column by positioning the cursor in column 1 and pressing Move Right (F1). Before:

After:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-83

3
Move Logic Down
The Move Down (MOV DN) function is used to create room for an additional line of logic above the line the cursor is on. All elements in the region to be moved must be located entirely in the same row as the cursor, or in the rows below. In the following example, the rung of logic beginning with %I0002 is moved down one row by positioning the cursor in row 2 and pressing Move Down (F3). Before:

After:

3-84

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Delete Column
The Delete Column (DEL CN) function is used to delete an entire column of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. It can be used to delete a column that contains functions as well as contacts or coils, as long as the function template itself is totally contained within the column. When the column to be deleted is within a rung that contains no coil or jump instructions, all columns to the right of the deleted column are moved left one column. In the following example, the column which contains %I0007 is deleted by positioning the cursor in column 3 and pressing Delete Column (F5). Before:

After:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-85

3
Delete Row
The Delete Row (DEL RW) function is used to delete an entire row of instructions (including verticals) and operands within a rung. It can only be used to delete a row whose instructions, together with their operands, are totally contained within the row. For example, the DEL RW function can be used to delete a row with a function such as MCR, but it cannot delete a row containing an ADD_INT function because the ADD_INT function spans several rows. After the deletion, all rows beneath the deleted row move up one row. When a row is moved up to the first row position, its verticals are automatically deleted. In the following example, the row which contains %I0001 is deleted by positioning the cursor on that row and pressing Delete Row (F7). Before:

After:

3-86

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Delete Instruction
The Delete Instruction (DELINS) function is used to delete an operand or instruction from a rung. Another instruction or a horizontal link may then be entered in the space left by the deleted instruction. The ALT-D key sequence may also be used to delete instructions; however, the cursor will automatically move to the right after the deletion. In the following example, the ADD instruction is deleted by positioning the cursor on the ADD function block and pressing Delete Instruction (F10). Before:

After:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-87

3
Increment/Decrement Reference Address
The increment/decrement reference address feature is available in either INSERT or EDIT mode in the program editor and from the variable declaration editor. It allows you to increment or decrement the reference address where the cursor is located by either one or the amount specified on the command line. Key
CTRL-U CTRL-D

Description
Increment key sequence. Decrement key sequence.

Note
For reference operands which must be byte-aligned, the reference address is incremented/decremented by one byte.

For example, a discrete input reference address of a MOVE_INT function block will increment or decrement by one byte (e.g., %I0001 to %I0009). The same reference address on a normally open contact will increment or decrement by one (e.g., %I0001 to %I0002). A register reference address on the input of an ADD function block will also increment or decrement by one (e.g., %R0005 to %R0006). If there is a numeric value on the command line, it is used as the number of bits to add to or subtract from the reference address. For parameters that are byte-aligned, the increment/decrement value is one byte when the value on the command line is between 0 and 8, two bytes when the value is between 9 and 16, etc. The value will remain displayed on the command line after the function is completed so that the reference address can be incremented/decremented by the same value again. If the reference address reaches the current configuration limit, an error message is displayed and the function is not performed. If the cursor is not on a reference address and you attempt to increment or decrement the address, an error message is also displayed.

3-88

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Incrementing/Decrementing within a Rung
This example illustrates how to increment reference address %I0001 in a ladder diagram rung. 1. First, position the cursor on the reference address to be changed. In this example, that would be %I0001.

2.

Press CTRL-U five times to display the reference address %I0041, as shown in this screen.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-89

3
3. To decrement the reference address to %I0025, press CTRL-D twice. Or, you could enter the decrement amount 16 (2 bytes) on the command line and press CTRL-D. The value 16 displayed on the command line does not disappear when the decrement is completed. It continues to be displayed on the command line so that you may continue decrementing by that same amount.

Auto-Next Highest Reference


The auto-next highest reference address function automatically uses the next reference offset of the specified type, after the highest currently used in the folder during an editing session. If the parameter requires a byte-aligned reference offset, the next available aligned offset is automatically provided. To use this function, enter the % character and the user reference (e.g., %I, %Q, %R, etc.) on the command line. The % character is used to distinguish a reference type from a nickname character. Then, press the Enter key. For example, if the highest %I reference already used during an editing session is %I0019 and %I is specified as the address for an input operand to an ADD_INT function block, %I0024 (the next available aligned reference) is automatically used. The following example illustrates how useful the auto-next highest reference address function can be, when used in conjunction with TEACH mode. It allows rungs to be entered and reference addresses automatically assigned to the next available reference address. (For more information on TEACH mode, refer to chapter 2, section 5, Keyboard Functions). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter INSERT mode by pressing Insert (F1) from the program editor. Press ALT-T to enter TEACH mode, and then press ALT-N, where n is the number to be used for the teach file. For this example, use ALT-0. On the command line, type ALW_ON &NOCON and press the Enter key. Then, type &MOV on the command line and press the Enter key. Use the Tab key to position the cursor on parameter IN of the MOVE function block. Type %R on the command line, and press the Tab key. Then, enter %R on the command line again (or press CTRL-Home to display the previous command line contents), and press the Enter key twice. Press ALT-Q to exit TEACH mode.

3-90

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
9. Press ALT-0 to play back the teach file. The following screen is displayed. Note that the reference address has automatically been changed to the next available address.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-91

Section 10: Editor Options


The Program Editor Options menu provides access to options in the program editor. These options include multiple coil use and automatically inserting references.

Coil Checking
The coil check function of the programming software checks for multiple uses of %M or %Q references with relay coils or outputs on functions. Beginning with Release 3 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, you can select the level of coil checking desired from a screen similar to the one shown below. To access this screen, press Program (F1) from the Programming Software main menu. Then, press Options (F7) from the program editor. Instructions for selecting the desired level of coil checking begin on page 3-93.

3-92

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Three levels of coil checking are available: Level
SINGLE

Name
Coil checking enabled

Description
Single coil use only. When coil use is set to SINGLE, Logicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftwaredoesnotallow multiple coil use. When the rung is accepted and multiple use is detected, an error message is displayed and the cursor is placed on the first conflict found. You cannot exit the rung edit until the conflicts are resolved. When this setting is accepted, the coil use map is rebuilt. A checking coil use message is displayed while the map is rebuilt. If conflicts are found, only the reference address of the conflict is listed. Only one screen full of conflicts is displayed. If conflicts are found, the Current Coil Use field is not updated; it is only updated when no conflicts are found. When coil use is set to WARN MULTIPLE, Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareallowsmultiplecoilusewith warning messages. The Current Coil Use field is updated, and the coil use map is rebuilt. A message is displayed while the map is rebuilt and the conflicts are listed. Only one screen of conflicts is displayed. When coil use is set to MULTIPLE,Logicmaster 90-30/20/Microsoftwareallowsmultiplecoiluse without any restrictions or messages. The CurrentCoil Use field is updated, and the coil use map is not rebuilt. No conflicts are displayed.

WARNMULTIPLE*

Coil checking disabled with warning

MULTIPLE

Coil checking disabled

* Default selection.

Note
If the program folder is locked, the level of coil checking cannot be changed and the coil map cannot be rebuilt. Refer to the information on unlocking program folders described in chapter 7, Program Folders. The Coil Check screen shows the current level of coil checking, allows you to change the level, and checks for and displays coil use conflicts on demand. You can change the level selected, regardless of which level was previously selected. Coils can function as SET Coils or as RESET Coils with MULTIPLE or WARN MULTIPLE coil checking enabled. For details on the possible effects of MULTIPLE and WARN MULTIPLE checking on Coils, refer to the information on SET Coils and RESET Coils in Section 1, Relay Functions, of Chapter 3 of the Series 90 -30/20/Micro Reference Manual (GFK-0467).

Note
When the program mode is MONITOR or ONLINE and the program in your computer is identical to the program in the PLC (i.e., LOGIC EQUAL status is displayed), only the current level of coil checking is displayed. An error message is displayed if you try to change the coil check level. Warn Multiple can give misleading feedback for Micro PLCs: if coil references are added or deleted in the RLD program, the Logic-Not-Equal warning will be displayed. You can correct the inaccurate message by following the steps on the next page or you can avoid using the Warn Multiple setting with Micro PLCs.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-93

3
To change the level and check for conflicts: 1. Press Program (F1) from the Programming Software main menu. Then, press Options (F7) from the program editor to display the Program Editor Options menu.

2.

Press Coil Check (F1) to display the Multiple Coil Use screen.

3-94

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
3. The screen shows the current level of coil checking. To select another level, repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired setting is displayed. Then, press the Enter key to accept the change. Or, you can type the desired setting into the Coil Use field, and then press the Enter key. The coil use map is automatically rebuilt when the SINGLE or WARN MULTIPLE level is accepted. To rebuild the coil map without changing the current setting, press Check (F1). F1 may be used regardless of the current coil use setting. The message Checking Block . . . is displayed as the map is built, along with the name of the block currently being checked. The rebuilding of the map takes approximately 15 seconds per block. For example, a program consisting of 10 to 15 blocks may take up to two minutes to rebuild the map. 5. 6. Press ALT-A to abort the rebuild and restore the old coil use map. A message indicating that an abort has occurred is displayed. When the rebuild is complete, any conflicts found are listed. Both explicit and implicit use conflicts are displayed. Only one screen full of conflicts is displayed.

4.

Conflicts are not saved in memory. When you leave this screen, they will not be redisplayed if you re-enter this display screen. However, the Check (F1) softkey may be pressed to check for coil conflicts. ALT-P may be used to print a screen of conflicts. For information on printing a screen display, refer to chapter 9, section 2, Selecting a Screen Print Device.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-95

3
Automatically Inserting References
References which do not have nicknames or reference descriptions can be automatically inserted into the variable declaration table as the program is being developed. Then, at a later time, you can go to the variable declaration editor and enter just the annotation. To enable the automatic insertion of references: 1. From the Programming Software main menu, press Program (F1) and then Options (F7) to display the Program Editor Options menu.

2.

Press Editor Options (F2) to display the Editor Options screen.

3-96

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
3. Enter Y (Yes) and press the Enter key to enable automatic insertion. Explicit references entered on the command line during an edit session are automatically inserted in the variable declaration table; implicit references (those references not entered while programming logic) are not automatically inserted in the table. In the following example, the explicit reference %I0001 is inserted automatically in the variable declaration table. %I0002 through %I0016 are implicit references and are not inserted automatically in the table.
| _____ |%M0001 | | %Q0001 || || ADD_|( ) | | INT | | | | |%I0001 |I1 Q|%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST |I2 | | +0004 |_____| |

In addition, %S and %T references are not added to the table. References associated with rungs that are pasted or included are added to the variable declaration table only if this operation were enabled when the rungs were cut or written. Removing rungs using either the cut/paste function or the file include function does not affect the table. Any reference to be removed from the variable declaration table must be deleted using the variable declaration table editor. References entered during a word-for-word operation are not automatically inserted into the variable declaration table. 4. If the variable declaration table becomes full, a message is continuously displayed for each reference entered until some of the references are deleted. Use the variable declaration table editor to delete some references in order to make room for more insertions. To disable the automatic insertion feature, enter N (No). When this feature is disabled, references entered on the command line are not placed into the variable declaration table, unless they have a nickname or reference description associated with them.

5.

Note
The default selection for automatically inserting references is N (No). Every new folder defaults to NO.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-97

Section 11: Search Function


The search function enables you to locate an identifier name, reference address, nickname, instruction, instruction plus reference address, instruction plus nickname, instruction plus identifier name, and reference description anywhere in the program. 1. To begin the search function, select Search (F4) from the program edit functions. When F4 is pressed, a search function window is displayed on the screen.

2.

To continue searching for the same target, press ALT-F4. Pressing only the Search key accesses the search function again. Since all fields are already set as desired, simply press the Enter key to initiate the search.

3. 4.

If the target is not found, a message indicating this is displayed. The search function will remain active. If the target is found in a block that is locked for view, the following message is displayed: Found in locked block <block_name>. (Continue/Quit)

If you continue, all remaining blocks are searched. If you decide to quit, the search is aborted. For more information on viewing locked blocks, refer to chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks. 5. The search can be aborted at any time by pressing ALT-A (abort). A message acknowledging the abort is displayed, and the search function will remain active.

3-98

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Refer to the definitions in the following table when making entries in the search function window. To change a selection in one of the fields, other than the Search for and Replace with fields, use the Tab key to toggle through the available choices.

Field
Search for

Description
The target to be searched for. It may be an identifier name, a reference address (e.g., %I0012) or nickname (e.g., WIDGET), an instruction (e.g., &COIL), an instruction plus reference address (e.g., & COIL %Q0001), nickname (e.g., &COIL WIDGET), or identifier name (e.g., &JUMP BLK1), or a reference description entered in quotes. Enter the desired target into this field. Search allows you to locate all uses of a nickname. First, the software searches the local table if you are in a subroutine block. Next, it searches the main variable declarations table and finally the reserved table. The search operation stops when the first occurrence of the search target is found.

Replace with Scope

What will replace the target being searched for. Modify the search by specifying whether the target should be searched for in the current subroutine block only or across all subroutine blocks in the program. Choices for this field include LOCAL for the current block only or GLOBAL f or all blocks. The search order for all blocks is the subroutine block declaration order, beginning with the current block. Modify the search by specifying whether only explicit usage of the reference is checked for (EXPLICIT) or both explicit and implicit usage (IMPLICIT). More information about implicit search can be found at the end of the search function. Action to be taken if the search target is found. For the search function, selecting Y (Yes) indicates that the system will prompt you for confirmation before searching for the next target. When Y (Yes) is selected and the target is found, you may display the search target, disregard this instance of the target and continue searching, or terminate the actual search but remain in the search function. For the search and replace function, selecting Y (Yes) indicates that the system will prompt you for confirmation before the found target is replaced. There are four choices available: 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the current found target and continue. Disregard the found target and continue. Starting from this found target, replace the rest of the found targets without prompting (i.e., change the prompt value to N (No)). Terminate the replace but remain in the function.

Usage

Prompt

Direction Start From

The direction of the search, either FORWARD or BACKWARD. The starting point of the search, either from the current position (CURRENT), from the top of the block (TOP), or from the bottom of the block (BOTTOM).

Note
You should change the default Scope to Global and change Usage to Implicit when searching a program for address conflicts. Global will search all blocks including _MAIN. Implicit will check for memory usage by functions with memory lengths greater than 1 as well as memory addresses explicitly visible in the logic.
GFK-0466L Chapter 3 Program Editing 3-99

3
The following table shows the legitimate replacement items for the different types of search items.

Search Item
Reference address or nickname Identifier Instruction

Replacement Item
Reference address or reference nickname. Identifier of the same type. Word-for-word equivalent instruction. Refer to chapter 3, section 12, OnlineEditing/Monitoring,formoreinformation on making word-for-word changes. Word-for-word instruction or reference or nickname. Refer to chapter 3, section 12, Online Editing/Monitoring, for more information on making word-for-word changes. Identifier of the same type. No replacement allowed.

Instruction and reference

Instruction and identifier Description

Note
If a program contains references that have the same reference description text, searching for the reference description always finds the first occurrence of the reference description.

3-100

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Using Search and Replace
The search and replace function is used to search and replace the target within the same variable declaration table. It cannot be used to search for the target in one variable table and replace it in another variable table. To use the search and replace function: 1. 2. Enter the target to be searched for in the Search for field and the replacement item in the Replace with field. Other fields can be changed to further modify the search. Press the Enter key to begin the search function, or press the Escape key to exit this screen. If the Prompt field is set to No, a busy prompt is displayed on the search screen with the current replacement count, indicating that the search and replace function is in progress. If the target is found in a block that is locked for view, the following message is displayed: Cannot write to locked block <block_name>. (Continue/Quit)

3.

You may continue the search and replace operation at the next block or terminate the search and replace. For more information on viewing locked blocks, refer to chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks. In the following example, %M0016 will be searched for and replaced with %M0020. Since the Prompt field is set to No, no confirmation is required. This screen shows the parameters selected for this search.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-101

3
4. If the Prompt field is set to Y (Yes), confirmation is required before each replacement. The following prompt is displayed each time the found target (in this example, %M0016) is found: Replace %M0016 with %M0020 ? (Yes, No, All, Quit)

Press Y (Yes) to replace the current found target with the replacement item and then continue the search. Select N (No) to disregard this instance of the target and continue the search. Press A (All) to drop the confirmation process, beginning with this found target, and proceed to replace the rest of the found targets with the replacement item. Pressing Q (Quit) terminates the current search and replace process, but remains in the function. 5. Assuming that the function replaced one occurrence of %M0016 with %M0020 without error, an appropriate message including the replacement count is displayed and the function remains active.

6.

If an error occurs while replacing one of the reference addresses, the rung number where the error occurred is displayed at the top of the ladder diagram screen with the cursor on the erroneous item. In addition, a prompt displayed on the message line will ask you to either stop the function or skip the erroneous replacement and continue the function. Press Y (Yes) to skip the erroneous replacement and continue with the search and replacement function, or press N (No) to stop. A search and replace function, however, cannot be aborted.

3-102

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Implicit Search
Implicit references are those references which are not directly programmed in the logic. However, due to the length of a function parameter, they are included. An implicit search enables you to locate these implicit references within a program. Selecting IMPLICIT in the Usage field of the search function window means that both explicit and implicit references will be searched for. (Explicit references are those references you entered while programming the logic for your program or subroutine block.) In the following example, %I0001 is an explicit reference and %I0002 through %I0016 are implicit references.
| _____ |%M0001 | | %Q0001 || || ADD_|( ) | | INT | | | | |%I0001 |I1 Q|%Q0017 | | | | | | | CONST |I2 | | +0004 |_____| |

Search by Reference Type


The search by reference type function allows you to locate all uses of a specific reference type within the program. To initiate this type of search, enter the % character and the user reference (e.g., %R for register references) in the Search for field. Then, press the Enter key. The % character is required in order to distinguish a user reference from a name character.

Quick Search for a Coil


The quick search feature allows you to search for a coil with a particular reference address by entering the reference address on the command line and then pressing the Search (F4) softkey. The search will begin at the current location and continue to search for the reference address until a coil with the specified address is found. The reference address continues to be displayed on the command line so that you can find the next occurrence of a coil with the specified reference address by simply pressing Search (F4) again.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-103

Section 12: Online Editing/Monitoring


In addition to offline editing, Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software supports several online functions. To make online changes, the programmer must be in ONLINE mode; and logic in the current folder and PLC must be EQUAL. Refer to chapter 8, Program Utilities, for information on verifying the program with the PLC. The functions available when online and equal include:

D D D D D

Monitoring logic and registers. Forcing and overriding discrete references. Substituting instructions, constant values, and reference addresses. Online changes for data values. Block edit Run Mode store

Note
Changes made when ONLINE and EQUAL are restricted to those of equal size. The PLC is updated as each change is completed.

Inserting or Editing Rungs (Block Edit)


Logic in the program folder and the PLC may be inserted or edited from the program editor while the PLC is in STOP mode and the programmer is ONLINE and EQUAL. After pressing INSERT (F1) or EDIT (F2) to enter INSERT or EDIT mode and making a change, the status line will change from LOGIC EQUAL to BLOCK EDIT. One or more rungs may be inserted or modified. After accepting all the changes, the modified logic may be saved to both the program folder and PLC by pressing ALT-S. ALT-S may also be used to save a single subroutine block while the PLC is in STOP mode.

Block Edit (Bumpless) Run Mode Store Function (6.61 or Later CPUs)
Press ALT-S (holding the ALT key and then press the S key) from the Program Logic Editor while in Block Edit mode to store changes to a program in the PLC. Prior to Release 6.61 of the CPU firmware and Release 6.60 of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro, this operation was not allowed while the PLC is in RUN mode. However, starting with Release 6.61, editing (changing, adding to, or deleting from) a program while the PLC is in RUN mode is allowed. Please note the following:

Only one subroutine may be modified at a time, and there must be enough unused, unfragmented memory to store the subroutine that is being modified and the main program. Otherwise, the PLC will need to be stopped to perform the store. Note that stores while in RUN mode from the Program Utility Store screen in Logicmaster will behave as before (i.e., those stores will pause the execution of the PLC while the store takes place). There must be enough PLC memory to store both the old block and the new block.
GFK-0466L

S S
3-104

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

3
Substitutions
If the programmer is in ONLINE mode and communicating with an operating PLC and if the program logic in the PLC and in the programmer are EQUAL, an instruction, constant, or reference address may be substituted with another. Every substitution updates the logic in the program folder and in PLC memory. Instruction substitutions are permitted within the groups listed in the following table. Data types cannot be changed within each group; therefore, it is not necessary to include the data type.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-105

3
Table 3-12. Substitution Groups
Function
| | |/| ( ) (/) (S) (R) (M) (/M) (SM) (RM) ( ) ( ) ONDTR_TENTHS ONDTR_HUNDTHS ONDTR_THSDTHS TMR_TENTHS TMR_HUNDTHS TMR_THSDTHS TMR_TENTHS TMR_HUNDTHS TMR_THSDTHS UPCTR DNCTR ADD_INT SUB_INT MUL_INT DIV_INT MOD_INT ADD_DINT SUB_DINT MUL_DINT DIV_DINT MOD_DINT

Description
Contacts Normally open contact. Normally closed contact. Coils Normally open coil. Negated coil. SET coil. RESET coil. Retentive coil. Negated retentive coil. Retentive SET coil. Retentive RESET coil. Positive transition coil. Negative transition coil. Retentive On-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. Hundredth of a second time base. Thousandth of a second time base. On-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. Hundredth of a second time base. Thousandth of a second time base. Off-Delay Timer Function Tenth of a second time base. Hundredth of a second time base. Thousandth of a second time base. Counter Functions Up counter. Down counter. Integer Math Functions Signed integer addition. Signed integer subtraction. Signed integer multiplication. Signed integer division. Signed integer modulo. Double Integer Math Functions Double precision integer addition. Double precision integer subtraction. Double precision integer multiplication. Double precision integer division. Double precision integer modulo.

Type This
&NOCON &NCCON &NOCOI &NCCOI &SL &RL &NOMC &NCM &SM &RM &PCOI &NCOI &ON_TE &ON_H &ON_TH &TM_TE &TM_H &TM_TH &OFDT_TE &OFDT_H &OFDT_TH &UP &DN &AD &SUB &MUL &DIV &MOD &AD_DI &SUB_DI &MUL_DI &DIV_DI &MOD_DI

3-106

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-12. Substitution Groups (Continued)
Function
ADD_REAL SUB_REAL MUL_REAL DIV_REAL EXPT_REAL SIN_REAL COS_REAL TAN_REAL ASIN_REAL ACOS_REAL ATAN_REAL SQRT_REAL LOG_REAL LN_REAL EXP_REAL RAD_TO_DEG DEG_TO_RAD EQ_INT NE_INT GT_INT GE_INT LT_INT LE_INT RANG_INT EQ_DINT NE_DINT GT_DINT GE_DINT LT_DINT LE_DINT RANG_DINT

Description
Real / Floating-Point Math Functions Real/floating-point addition. Real/floating-point subtraction. Real/floating-point multiplication. Real/floating-point division. Real/floating-pointpowerofX. Real / Floating-Point TrigonometricFunctions Sin. Cosine. Tangent. Inverse sine. Inverse cosine. Inverse tangent. Real / Floating-Point Logarithmic Functions Square root. Base 10 logarithm. Naturallogarithm. Power of e. Degree / Radian Conversion Functions Convert to degrees. Convert to radians. Integer Comparison Functions Test for equality between two integers. Test for no equality between two integers. Test for one integer value greater than another. Test for one integer value greater than or equal to another. Test for one integer value less than another. Test for one integer value less than or equal to another. Test the input value against a range of two numbers. Double Integer Comparison Functions Test for equality between two double precision integers. Test for no equality between two double precision integers. Test for one double precision integer value greater than another. Test for one double precision integer value greater than or equal to another. Test for one double precision integer value less than another. Test for one double precision integer value less than or equal to another. Test the input value against a range of two numbers.

Type This
&AD_R &SUB_R &MU_R &DIV_R &EXPT_R &SIN &COS &TAN &ASIN &ACOS &ATAN &SQRT &LOG &LN &EXP &DEG &RAD &EQ &NE &GT &GE &LT &LE &RANG &EQ_DI &NE_DI &GT_DI &GE_DI &LT_DI &LE_DI &RANG_DI

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-107

3
Table 3-12. Substitution Groups (Continued)
Function
EQ_REAL NE_REAL GT_REAL GE_REAL LT_REAL LE_REAL

Description
Real / Floating-Point Comparison Functions Test for equality between two real/floating-point values. Test for no equality between two real/floating-point values. Test for one real/floating-point value greater than another. Test for one real/floating-point value greater than or equal to another. Test for one real/floating-point value less than another. Test for one real/floating-point value less than or equal to another. Bit Operation Functions (Words) Logical and of two 16-bit word strings. Logical or of two 16-bit word strings. Logical exclusive or of two 16-bit word strings. Shift Bit String Functions (Words) Shift bit string left. Shift bit string right. Rotate Bit String Functions (Words) Rotate bit string left. Rotate bit string right. Bit Set/Clear Functions (Words) Set a bit within a bit string to 1. Clear a bit within a bit string. Integer Search Table Functions Copy from one array to another. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value. Double Integer Search Table Functions Copy from one array to another. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value.

Type This
&EQ_R &NE_R &GT_R &GE_R &LT_R &LE_R

AND_WORD OR_WORD XOR_WORD SHL_WORD SHR_WORD ROL_WORD ROR_WORD


BIT_SET_WORD BIT_CLR_WORD

&AN &OR &XO &SHL &SHR &ROL &ROR &BS &BCL &AR &SRCHE &SRCHN &SRCHGT &SRCHGE &SRCHL T &SRCHLE &AR_DI &SRCHE_DI &SRCHN_DI &SRCHGT_DI &SRCHGE_DI &SRCHL T_DI &SRCHLE_DI

ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE

3-108

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Table 3-12. Substitution Groups (Continued)
Function
ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE

Description
Integer Search Table Functions (Words) Copy from one array to another. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value. Integer Search Table Functions(Byte) Copy from one array to another. Search for array values equal to a specified value. Search for array values not equal to a specified value. Search for array values greater than a specified value. Search for array values greater than or equal to a specified value. Search for array values less than a specified value. Search for array values less than or equal to a specified value.

Type This
&AR_W &SRCHE_W &SRCHN_W &SRCHGT_W &SRCHGE_W &SRCHL T_W &SRCHLE_W

ARRA Y_MOVE SRCH_EQ SRCH_NE SRCH_GT SRCH_GE SRCH_LT SRCH_LE

&AR_BY &SRCHE_BY &SRCHN_BY &SRCHGT_BY &SRCHGE_BY &SRCHL T_BY &SRCHLE_BY

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-109

3
Modifying Instructions
The following steps describe how to change relay ladder diagram elements and update the PLC while online and the PLC is running. 1. 2. Place the cursor on the element to be changed. Enter the new instruction mnemonic on the command line. The new instruction must be in the same instruction group as the existing instruction. (Instruction groups are listed in the table at the beginning of this section.)

3.

Press the Enter key, and then type Y (Yes) in response to the confirmation prompt.

3-110

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
The same steps are used to replace functions for other functions in the same instruction group. For example, the NE_INT function can be replaced with the LE_INT function. With the cursor on the NE_INT function, enter the new instruction mnemonic &LE_INT on the command line and press the Enter key.

Using the Modify Softkey


The Modify (F3) softkey enables you to substitute instructions from the rung editor environment by using the rung editor instruction softkeys. Position the cursor on the rung where the substitution is to be made and press Modify (F3). Then, use the function softkeys to enter the new instruction. You can also use the Modify (F3) softkey to change a reference address or constant parameter and to create/modify nicknames. To restore the original values prior to the substitution, press ALT-A. When the change is completed, press the Escape key.

Modifying a Reference Address or Constant


A reference address or other parameter can be changed while online and the PLC is running. 1. Place the cursor on the reference to be changed. In this example, the cursor is positioned on the TMR functions PV parameter, which currently contains a value of 20. Enter a new value of 40 on the command line, and press the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-111

3
2. Press Y (Yes) in response to the confirmation prompt to update the PLC with the new operand value.

3-112

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

3
Forcing and Overriding Discrete References
A value that is overridden can be protected from change by the program logic; however, an overridden value can be forced or toggled. 1. Discrete points can be forced or toggled by positioning the cursor on a contact or coil with the reference address to be modified, and pressing F12 or the keypad () key. For input points that are being scanned or output points that the logic program changes, you must first override the point by pressing F11 or the keypad (*) key before forcing the reference. Once a point has been overridden, the first character of the reference address or nickname will flash. To remove an override, position the cursor on the use of the reference address, and press F11 or the keypad (*) key again.

2.

3. 4.

To force the discrete reference %T0001 in the following example, position the cursor on an element which uses that reference. Then, press F12 to update the PLC.

Note
Only 331 and higher CPUs are capable of forcing and overriding discrete references.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 3 Program Editing

3-113

3
Changing Register Values
The following steps describe how to change the value of a register at the current cursor position. 1. 2. Place the cursor on the register to be changed. (For this example, place the cursor on %R0003.) Enter the new value on the command line. (For this example, enter 30 on the command line.)

3.

Press the Enter key. The register value for this example will change from 0 to 30, as shown in the screen below.

3-114

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Chapter

4 Reference Tables
section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

The display reference tables function is used to:

D D D D D

Display tables of reference values. Set all the reference values in the table to zero. Change the formats in which reference tables are displayed or printed. Change reference values. Override discrete references (remove reference control from the PLC).

Chapter 4 contains the following sections: Section


1 2 3 4 5

Title
DisplayingReference Tables Changing Reference Table Values Using Overrides Changing Display Formats Mixed Reference Tables

Description
Explains how to display reference tables. Explains how to change reference values. Explains how to remove control of discrete references from the logic program. Explains how to make format changes. Describesmixed reference tables.

Page
4-2 4-4 4-9 4-11 4-20

GFK-0466L

4-1

Section 1: Displaying Reference Tables


Reference tables can be displayed directly from the main menu in any programming mode, or from any main menu function screen. While a table is displayed, you can change the format of any references in the table for a particular application. This is a sample reference table used for discrete inputs (%I):

Note
In OFFLINE mode, reference values from the current program folder are displayed. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode, references from the PLC are displayed. Offline values from a reference table (values from the folder) can also be printed using the print function. These values will have the formats you set up on the display. To print values displayed online, the values must first be loaded from the PLC and then printed.

4-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
Displaying a Reference Table
To display a reference table: 1. Enter one of the reference types listed in the following table: User Reference
%I %Q %M %T %G %S, %SA, %SB, %SC %AI %AQ %R

Reference Table
Discrete input. Discrete output. Discrete internal. Discretetemporary. Discrete Genius global data. Discrete system. Analoginput. Analogoutput. Register .

A. To view the lowest-numbered table of a particular type, enter just the reference type. For example, for the lowest-numbered analog input table, enter %AI. B. To view a table containing a specific reference, enter the reference or its nickname. For example, %AI123 or 123AI. 2. 3. Then, press Tables (Shift-F2). Once in the reference tables function, you may go to a different reference table by entering the reference on the command line and pressing the Enter key.

Using the Cursor to Select a Reference Table


You may go directly to the reference table of a reference (e.g., of a function block operand, contact, coil, etc.) under the cursor by pressing ALT-F2. Then, press Shift-F1 from the reference table to return to the same place in the program.

Moving the Cursor in a Reference Table


Follow these guidelines for moving the cursor in a reference table:

D D

Use the cursor keys to move one value horizontally or vertically in the table. To move the cursor to a specific reference in the same table, enter the reference on the command line and press the Enter key. To move to a specific reference in any table, enter the reference in the command line and press the Enter key, or use Shift-F2. To display the next screen of the same table, use the Page Down key. Use the Page Up key to display the previous screen. Use the CTRL-Page Down keys to move the cursor to the first reference of the next line. Use the CTRL-Page Up keys to move the cursor to the first reference of the previous line. Use the Home key to go to the first value in the table. Use the End key to go to the last value in the table.
4-3

D D D

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

Section 2: Changing Reference Table Values


You can force (change) both discrete and register reference values with the reference tables function.

Note
If the programmer mode is OFFLINE, changes will only be made to the current program folder. Changes made to the program folder may later be stored to the PLC by using the store utility function, described in chapter 8, Program Utilities. If the programmer mode is ONLINE, any changes will only be made to reference values in the PLC. Reference values in the PLC may then be loaded to the program folder by using the load utility function, also described in chapter 8. No changes to the PLC can be made while the programmer is in MONITOR mode.

Warning
Improper use of online program changes can damage equipment or cause personal injury. Online program changes should always be made with extreme care. Online changes can have serious and unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is recommended that these functions not be used with people near the equipment. If possible, they should be done with direct visual control over the system and the process. Proper external power disconnects should be made to prevent undesired equipment operation. In order to make online changes, the status line at the bottom of the screen must show that the programmer is online to the CPU.

Changing a Register Reference


You can enter or change the values of a register reference as described below. This method can be used to load a value into a register. To change a register reference value: 1. 2. In the reference table that contains the reference, move the cursor to highlight the reference or enter the reference on the command line. Enter a new value on the screens command line and press the Enter key. The new value will be interpreted in the format (for example, signed integer) currently assigned to the reference.

4-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
ASCII String Entry
An ASCII string up to 79 characters, the size of the command line, can be entered in word-oriented tables. The string of text is entered the same as a name explanation and is displayed one character at a time, beginning with the reference the cursor is on. The string is entered by typing the text, enclosed in quotes, on the command line and then pressing the Enter key. To include quotes within a string of text, you must begin the string with two colons. For example, to enter the string: Use ALT-N to toggle you must enter ::Use ALT-N to toggle on the command line. A string can be accepted without a closing quote, but only to the last non-space character. Trailing spaces are lost without the closing quote. The following screen shows the reference table display after the string Registers in this table are displayed from left to right is entered. (The display mode of any reference table can be changed from right to left or left to right, as explained on the following pages of this manual.)

Non-printable characters (e.g., null to terminate a string) may be included in the ASCII string by entering a backslash and the three-digit decimal value of the non-printable character (e.g., \000). If you wish to include a backslash (\) in the text, enter two backslashes. There is no limit, other than the size of the command line, on the number of non-printable characters a string may have. The software performs a check to verify that the value is a valid decimal number.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-5

4
This example shows a null terminated string.

The next example shows the reference table after the null terminated string is accepted.

4-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
Changing the Reference Display Mode (ALT-N)
The ALT-N key sequence enables you to display table data either right to left (lowest reference address on the right) or left to right (lowest reference address on the left). The display mode can be changed in any table (fixed or mixed) and in any program mode (OFFLINE, ONLINE, or MONITOR). The Home End, Page Up and Page Down, Previous, Next, and cursor keys function the same, regardless of the view mode selected. Data displayed in ASCII format differs slightly, in that the quotes are removed and the format is treated more as a byte (1 character) instead of a word (2 characters).

Note
The print function cannot distinguish between these two display modes and prints all tables right to left. The default display mode is the last mode selected with ALT-N. If the display mode has never been changed, the default set in the programmer setup is used (see chapter 6, Programmer Setup)., Follow the steps below to change the display mode. 1. The default reference table display mode is displayed on the View Modes Setup screen. To display this screen, press Setup (F7) from the Programming Software main menu and then View Modes Setup (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu. The view mode in the following screen is right to left (the default display).

2.

To change the default view mode to display left to right, move the cursor to the, Enabled, field for the, Reference Table View Modes, entry. Then, use the Tab key to toggle the selection to N (No) or enter N. To validate and save the default view mode selection in the home directory file %LM090.PSU, press ALT-U, the Escape key, or the shifted function key.
4-7

3.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4
Forcing a Discrete Reference
In discrete reference tables, a reference can be forced on or off. If the reference being forced is currently overridden (described below), it retains its new status until forced again. If the reference is not overridden, it retains its new status until changed by some other function, such as rung solution or I/O servicing. This usually occurs within one sweep. You can enter the desired state (0 or 1) on the command line, or toggle the reference state as described below. The following method is easier. To toggle a reference: 1. 2. With the table displayed on the screen, place the cursor on the reference to be forced. Press the keypad minus (-) key or F12 key to change that reference to its opposite state. All logic elements in the program that use the reference will reflect the new status.

Changing the Values of a Word of Discrete References


You can change the value of the word where the cursor is. To do that, first you must change the number base of the references. For example, suppose you want to convert discrete references (see below) 0225 through 0240 to ones.
References 0225 through 0240 _______|_______ | | 0256 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

Follow the steps below to change a word of discrete references. 1. The cursor indicates the rightmost (lower-numbered) byte of the word to be changed. (The software automatically adjusts the cursor position if it is incorrectly placed.) Use the function keys to change the number base to one of the following: signed integer (by pressing F2) or hexadecimal (by pressing F5). On the command line, type the equivalent of the binary value in the selected format. Press the Enter key to change the reference at the cursor position to the new value. Press Binary (F6) to convert the base back to binary values.
References 0225 through 0240 _______|_______ | | 0256 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2. 3. 4.

4-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 3: Overrides
Discrete references in Models 331 or higher CPU can be overridden from the reference tables display. (This feature is not available in Models 323, 321, 311, 313, 211, and Micro CPUs.)

Note
If you attempt to use overrides with a CPU below Model 331, you will see an error message on your screen stating that overrides are not allowed. Discrete references that have been overridden are indicated by flashing digits on the reference table screen. An override removes control of the reference from its normal source. Overridden inputs ignore information from the devices wired to the I/O structure, such as limit switches or pushbuttons. Similarly, overridden outputs ignore programmed logic and internal power flow. Overrides are retained even when power is removed from the system. Non-relay functions such as timers, counters, math functions, and data move functions still work when a coil is overridden.

Warning
If overrides are applied to a reference associated with a transitional coil, the coil may pulse on for one sweep when the override is removed. The override is a very powerful tool for program checking and maintenance. You can test a program in a PLC that is not connected to I/O hardware by using overrides to simulate inputs. You can also check a program when I/O is connected, by using overrides to prevent coil operation. After the I/O is wired up, it can be tested by activating each coil with an override to verify I/O communications, module operation, power to a device, wiring to a device, indicator lights, fuses, and other hardware. After the control system is thoroughly checked and placed in operation, the override is useful in a monitored system. If a sensor or input module should fail while the process is in operation, that input can be overridden. Thus, the process can be continued until it can be shut down safely. References should not be overridden when the programmer is removed from the process, or when making copies of a program. Use the reference tables function to verify all inputs and coils before removing them from the programmer, or copying the program.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-9

4
Using Overrides
Overrides should be used on an operating system only with extreme care.

Warning
Improper use of the override can damage equipment or cause personal injury. 1. Place the cursor on the reference to be overridden.

Caution
The reference will be overridden throughout the program, not just at the cursor location. 2. Press the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. This toggles the state of the reference between overridden and not overridden. When overridden is selected as the state of reference, the value displayed in the table will flash.

Removing Overrides
All discrete reference bits on a reference table screen, or starting character in a tag name on a displayed rung, will flash if they have been overridden. To remove an override from one reference, toggle it by placing the cursor on the reference and pressing the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. To remove all overrides shown on the current screen, including the last three lines which may be hidden beneath the status lines (Press ALT-E to remove the status lines.): 1. 2. 3. Press Change All (F10). Press the keypad Asterisk (*) key or F11. The screen prompts: Remove overrides from displayed references ? (Y/N). Enter Y (Yes) to remove the overrides.

4-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 4: Changing Display Formats


The format of any reference in a table can be changed for a particular application while the table is displayed on the programmer screen. This section explains how to make format changes.

Discrete Reference Tables


The sample reference table below is used for discrete inputs (%I), discrete outputs (%Q), discrete internal coils (%M), discrete temporary coils (%T), discrete system status references (%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC), and discrete global data (%G).

The default format for discrete reference table displays is to have the values displayed or printed in binary. The format may be changed to signed integer or hexadecimal. Any of these formats can be used for some of the values in the table, or for the entire table. Thus, each reference table can be uniquely formatted to be most meaningful for the type of information it contains. (Double precision integer and timer/counter are not allowed for discrete references.)

Note
The format for system status references (%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC) cannot be changed. System status references can only be displayed in binary format. The %S reference table values cannot be cleared or changed. %S memory is read only and cannot be written. The bit values in the %SA, %SB, and %SC reference tables can, however, be cleared or toggled.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-11

4
Register Reference Tables
The sample register reference table below is used for system registers (%R), analog inputs (%AI), and analog outputs (%AQ).

The default format for register reference table displays is for the values to be shown or printed as signed integers. The format can be changed to double precision integer, hexadecimal, binary, ASCII, or timer/counter. The format can also be changed for some of the values in the table or for the entire table. In addition, the value of the reference at the cursor is displayed at the top of the table in binary format.

4-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
Display Formats
Use the function keys to change display formats. Changes are automatically saved when you leave a reference table display. The table will continue to be displayed in the new format until the format is changed again. If you want to save changes to the program folder without leaving the reference table display, press ALT-U. Function Key
F2

Format
Signed Integer

Description
A 16-bit number from 32,768 to +32,767. In discrete reference tables, 16 consecutive references are used for the display, beginning at a multiple-of-8-plus-one boundary (e.g., 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, etc.). In register reference tables, a single reference is required (e.g., 21846). A 32-bit number from 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. This format can be used for register reference tables only. Two consecutive references are required, beginning at a multiple-of-2-minus-one boundary (e.g., 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.). 32 consecutive bits (actually two consecutive 16-bit memory locations). This format can be used for register reference tables only. The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from 1.401298E45 to 3.402823E+38. The Real format requires a 352 CPU. A 16-bit number from 0000 to FFFF. When entering hexadecimal numbers on the command line, a leading A through F must be preceded by a zero. In addition, type an h at the end of the numeric string to ensure that the entry is read as a hexadecimal number. In discrete reference tables, 16 consecutive references are used, beginning at a multiple-of-16 boundary (e.g., 1, 17, 33, etc.). In register reference tables, a single reference is required (e.g., 0AAAAh). A 1-bit number with a value of 0 or 1. This format can be used for discrete reference tables only. A single reference is used. Binary values are displayed in groups of 8 references (e.g.,10101010). Register references cannot be displayed in binary format. However , the 16-bit binary equivalent of the value indicated by the cursor is automatically displayed at the top of the table. 8-bit encoded characters. This format can only be used in register reference tables. A single reference is required to make up 2 (packed) ASCII characters. The rightmost character of the pair corresponds to the low byte of the reference word. Bit 8 of each pair is a parity bit and is ignored. The remaining 7 bits in each section are converted as shown below. Command codes and non-displayable characters appear on the screen as the characters ^@ (e.g., X W). Three contiguous reference addresses, which support timer/ counter functions, display the current value, the preset value, and the control word. Regardless of whether the reference is assigned to a timer or counter, the format can be used as long as the reference type is %R. More information on this format is provided later in this chapter. Select a user-defined table. Up to 99 user-defined tables may be created. Press F10 to change the format of all elements in the table.

Signed Double Integer

F3

Real

F4

Hexadecimal

F5

Binary

F6

ASCII

F7

TMRCTR

F8

Mixed Change All

F9 F10

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-13

4
Table 4-1. ASCII Characters
Bit Pattern
X0000000 X0000001 X0000010 X0000011 X0000100 X0000101 X0000110 X0000111 X0001000 X0001001 X0001010 X0001011 X0001100 X0001101 X0001110 X0001111 X0010000 X0010001 X0010010 X0010011 X0010100 X0010101 X0010110 X0010111 X0011000 X0011001 X0011010 X0011011 X0011100 X0011101 X0011110 X0011111

Character
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] _

Bit Pattern
X0100000 X0100001 X0100010 X0100011 X0100100 X0100101 X0100110 X0100111 X0101000 X0101001 X0101010 X0101011 X0101100 X0101101 X0101110 X0101111 X0110000 X0110001 X0110010 X0110011 X0110100 X0110101 X0110110 X0110111 X0111000 X0111001 X0111010 X0111011 X0111100 X0111101 X0111110 X0111111

Character
(blank) ] # $ % & ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

Bit Pattern
X1000000 X1000001 X1000010 X1000011 X1000100 X1000101 X1000110 X1000111 X1001000 X1001001 X1001010 X1001011 X1001100 X1001101 X1001110 X1001111 X1010000 X1010001 X1010010 X1010011 X1010100 X1010101 X1010110 X1010111 X1011000 X1011001 X1011010 X1011011 X1011100 X1011101 X1011110 X1011111

Character
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] _

Bit Pattern
X1100000 X1100001 X1100010 X1100011 X1100100 X1100101 X1100110 X1100111 X1101000 X1101001 X1101010 X1101011 X1101100 X1101101 X1101110 X1101111 X1110000 X1110001 X1110010 X1110011 X1110100 X1110101 X1110110 X1110111 X1111000 X1111001 X1111010 X1111011 X1111100 X1111101 X1111110 X1111111

Character
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } tilde delta

4-14

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
Changing the Display Format
To change the format of one reference, move the cursor to that reference and press the appropriate function key. The new format will appear at the rightmost position of the reference(s). Within any standard reference table, you can change as many reference formats as you want, as shown by the example below.

Changing the Format of a Table


You can also change the format of an entire table, including the values not currently on the screen or portions of the table. To change the format of an entire table: 1. 2. Press Change All (F10). Select the format for the display. For example, press F2 to select signed integer.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-15

4
The Change All (F10) key can also be used to change a specified block of range formats. 1. 2. 3. Enter a starting reference (the lower address) and an ending reference (the higher address) from the current table (e.g., 65i 128i). Press Change All (F10). Select the format (e.g., hex).

Entering only a valid starting reference will cause the formats from the starting reference to the end of the table to change. Entering a valid starting reference followed by an invalid entry will also cause the formats from the starting reference to the end of the table to change. To restore the previous format (and in OFFLINE mode, restore the data values stored at the time of the last disk update), press ALT-A to abort the change. Pressing ALT-A will undo all format changes and value changes made since the last disk update. To save all the changes and remain in the reference table, press ALT-U. To save the changes and exit from the reference table, press the Escape key.

4-16

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
Timer/Counter Format
To support the timer/counter function, a timer/counter format requiring three contiguous reference addresses will display the current value, the preset value, and the control word. In the control word, bit 15 contains the output status (Q), and bit 16 contains the enable status (EN). The rest of the bits in the control word are not used by a counter. For a timer, the rest of the control word bits contain the timer accuracy. The preset value (PV) can be modified in both ONLINE and OFFLINE mode. If a reference or constant was assigned to the PV parameter of the timer/counter function, the contents of the reference or the constant are written to the PV reference of the timer/counterformat when in RUN mode. Regardless of whether the reference is assigned to a timer or counter, the format can be used as long as the reference type is %R. The example screen below shows the timer/counter format displayed, using the Timer/Counter (F8) function key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-17

4
Returning to Default Values
After editing, you can return a standard reference table to its default format and fill the table locations with zeros. This will:

D D D

Set all the reference values in the table to zero. Change all references in a discrete reference table back to binary format. Change all references in a register reference table back to signed decimal format.

To restore the table to its default content: 1. 2. 3. Select Change All (F10). Enter 0 on the command line, and press the Enter key. The screen prompts: Initialize table data and formats to default ? (Y/N. Enter Y (Yes) to restore the tables default content. For example:

4-18

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
System Reference Table
The sample system reference table below is used for system references (%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC), while in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. (No data is displayed in OFFLINE mode.) The system reference table resembles a mixed reference table; however, format changes are not allowed, the Change All (F10) function key cannot be used, and the cursor cannot be moved to blank lines.

The system reference table is displayed with the cursor on the reference address entered, or the reference address associated with the nickname entered. In the screen shown above, pressing the Home or Page Up key will position the cursor on %S0001. Pressing the End or Page Down key will place the cursor on %SC0032.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-19

Section 5: Mixed Reference Tables


A mixed table represents a collection of data from one or more of the fixed tables. Therefore, the identical information displayed in a mixed table could also be displayed on the related fixed tables. A total of 99 user-defined mixed reference table displays can be supported. A number from 1 to 99 is associated with each table.

Note
The mixed table function is used only for viewing PLC information; therefore, mixed reference tables are not valid when the programmer mode is OFFLINE. When OFFLINE, no cursor movement or other mixed table functions are allowed, except for changing tables, exiting reference tables, or changing modes. To select a mixed table, enter a number from 1 through 99 on the command line and press Mixed (F9). This is an example of a mixed reference table display:

Field
User-Defined Table Title

Description
A description of the mixed table. A maximum number of 63 characters is allowed. When the cursor is on the 63rd character, it remains fixed, overwriting the last character. A number from 1 to 99, which indicates the mixed table currently displayed. Information about the address the cursor is on; namely, the current reference, reference nickname, and current value binary representation. 16 display lines. Some may be program block headers or blank lines.

Mixed Table Number Cursor Item Line

Table Data

4-20

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
If the mixed table entered is not defined, a blank mixed table (no data, no title, only the mixed table number) is displayed, as shown below.

Editing the Title


To edit the table title, position the cursor on the title of the display by moving the cursor to the topmost data display line and pressing the Up cursor key. While editing the title, the Update or Abort key can be used to save or restore a title. A message is displayed when the function is complete.

Note
Since mixed reference tables are defined on a line-by-line basis, the abort function will restore the lines, formats, and title displayed upon entry. Unless an update to disk was done, any lines defined or title edited are lost.

The Mixed (F9) key is used to change from one mixed table to another. The Tables (Shift-F2) key sequence can also be used to get to any table. The Change All (F10) key is not supported for global format changes, as in fixed table displays. To return to the display area, press the Enter key or the Down cursor key. The cursor will return to the original position in the topmost data display line.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-21

4
Defining a Mixed Table
A mixed reference table display is created or changed by pressing the Change Line (F10) key. 1. 2. First, position the cursor on the display line where a certain data value should be displayed. The line may already be defined, or it may be a blank line. Enter the reference address or nickname of the desired data value on the command line. In the following example, a line is defined in mixed reference table 1. With the cursor positioned on the top line of the display, enter %I1 onto the command line.

4-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

4
3. Press Change Line (F10) to display the desired information. The cursor will be positioned on the requested data value. Any information currently displayed is replaced with the new requested information. In this example, when F10 is pressed, the data value positioned at reference %I0012 is entered into the topmost display line.

The default display format for data extracted from a discrete table is binary; for register tables, it is signed integer. The timer/counter format can be used for a %R line in a mixed table if enough exists for the format. If the two lines below the %R line are defined or are beyond the table size, an error message is displayed.

Deleting a Line
If the command line is blank when the Change Line (F10) key is pressed, the line is cleared and the cursor is automatically moved to the next line. If the current line is already blank, moving the cursor to the next line will produce the same result as pressing F10 with the command line blank.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 4 Reference Tables

4-23

4
Moving the Cursor
Cursor movement is the same in mixed tables as in fixed tables. Since blank lines can be defined in a mixed table, the cursor is allowed on blank lines. Cursoring up is allowed when the cursor is on the topmost line, in order to access the title. You can cursor to lines which contain a message, indicating that the reference is out of range. This allows you to delete or re-define the line. The same line of references can also be defined twice on the same mixed table display. If the Enter key is used to move the cursor to a duplicate reference address, the search for the reference address begins with the next reference and continues to the end of the table. If the reference address is not found in that section, the search begins with the first non-blank line, lowest reference. If the reference address is still not found, an error message is displayed. The Enter key cannot be used to change tables.

Timer/Counter Format
The timer/counter format in a mixed table is the same as in a fixed table, except for the first timer/counter format of the line. In the timer/counter format, the next two lines must be blank so that there is sufficient room for the format. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.

4-24

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Chapter

5 PLC Control and Status


section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

The programmer can interact with an operating PLC in many ways. Monitoring program execution and reference tables was described in previous chapters. Several additional features involve interaction between the programmer and an operating PLC. To use most of them, the programmer must be connected to the PLC and must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. If the programmer is not connected or is in OFFLINE mode, asterisks may be displayed in place of values in many fields when the function screens are displayed. In addition, some of these features may be protected by passwords. To use these features, press STATUS (F3) from the main menu, or Shift-F3 from any other main menu function.

Note
The screen displayed above identifies the CPU model which is attached and its software revision. The F9 and F10 softkeys are now blank when the PLC Control and Status menu is displayed. F9, which had previously been designated as the OEM softkey, is not present unless the active function is OEM protection. When the function is OEM protection, F9 will become the OEM softkey.
GFK0466L 51

5
F10, which had previously been designated as the Clear softkey, is not used unless the active function is either the PLC fault table or the I/O fault table. When either fault table function is active, F10 will become the Zoom softkey and F9 will become the Clear softkey.

Run/Stop the PLC


To start or stop program execution in the PLC, and to determine the state of outputs if the PLC is started, press PLC Run (F1) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. Communications between the programmer and the PLC must already be established.

If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode, default values are displayed on the screen. Press ALT-M to change the programmer operating mode to ONLINE or MONITOR mode. (For the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers, use the keyswitch. Refer to appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup," for instructions on using the keyswitch.) ALT-R can also be used to toggle the PLC mode between RUN and the configured STOP mode. The PLC field on the screen shown above indicates whether the attached PLC is to be started or stopped. When the programming software is initially executed, this field is initialized to STOP . Use the Tab key to select one of the modes listed below; then, press the Enter key. Mode
Run/Outputs Enabled Stop/IOScan Stop/No IOScan 52

Description
The PLC is running the logic program with outputs enabled. The PLC is stopped, not executing the logic program, but is scanning I/O. The PLC is stopped, not executing the logic program, no I/O scan. GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

5
PLC Password Protection
PLC password protection can be used to restrict access to selected PLC functions. After passwords have been set up, a protected function cannot be used unless the proper password has been entered. Password protection is not intended to restrict access to the programming or configuration software. If PLC communications are suspended, protection level will automatically return to the highest unprotected level. To display or change the current protection level of the PLC, the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode and communicating with the intended PLC. Select Password (F2) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen.

If the screen appears without entries, the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. Press ALT-M to change the programmer operating mode to ONLINE or MONITOR mode. (For the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers, use the keyswitch.)

GFK0466L

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

53

5
Field
Access Level

Description
Each access level includes all the privileges of lower levels: D Level 4: Write to all configuration or logic. Configuration may only be written in STOP mode; logic may be written in STOP or RUN mode. Display, set, or delete passwords for any level. (This is the default if no passwords are assigned.) Write to any configuration or logic, including wordforword changes, the addition/deletion of program logic, and the overriding of discrete I/O. Write to any data memory, except overriding discrete I/O. The PLC can be started or stopped. PLC and I/O fault tables can be cleared. Read any PLC data except passwords; no PLC memory may be changed.

D Level 3:

D Level 2:

D Level 1: Password Active Current Level Access Description

A Y (Yes) displayed in this column indicates that a password has been assigned to this access level in the PLC. An X displayed in this column indicates the current protection level of the PLC. Access allowed at each level. Privileges accumulate as the level increases; at any given level, all privileges at lower levels are permitted.

Changing the Privilege Level


To access any level, the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode and communicating with the PLC. 1. 2. Move the cursor to the line at the bottom of the screen which prompts you to enter a password to change the access level. Type a password, consisting of up to 4 ASCII hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F), and press the Enter key. Characters are not displayed as you type them.

A valid password enables you to access the protection level for that password, and also all protection levels below that level.

54

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

5
Creating, Changing, or Removing Passwords
Passwords are created in the configuration software, using the status function as described below. They are then transmitted to the PLC, where they are stored.

Caution
The PLC may not save passwords through a loss of power, if the CPU battery is not attached. After restarting the PLC, passwords must be sent to the PLC again. The use of passwords is an optional feature; it is not necessary to use any passwords at all. You can also use passwords to restrict access to some PLC features but not to others. Note, however, that the PLC always defaults to the highest unprotected level, so there should not be any gaps" in protection levels. To enter or change passwords, the computer must be in ONLINE mode and communicating with the PLC. Entering or changing passwords requires access to the highest level. If no passwords have been set up for the system, this level is automatically available. Once passwords have been entered, they can only be changed by performing one of the following tasks: D OR D In the configuration software, by place the master diskette No. 1 in the system disk drive of the computer and press the ALT and O keys. Because this allows passwords to be overridden or changed without entering the correct password, it is important to keep the original software master diskettes in a secure location. Access the Password Protection screen in the configuration software by pressing Password (F2) from the PLC Control and Status menu. A column titled Password" appears on this screen; this column is not displayed in the programming software. Use this column to enter new passwords. If there is not already a password set for the highest level, begin by creating one. This will protect the passwords you enter against unauthorized changes. In the password column, locate the cursor at a level you want to protect or unprotect. Then: A. To create or change a password, enter a password consisting of up to 4 ASCII hexadecimal digits (0 9, A F). B. To remove an existing password previously stored to the PLC, enter four blank characters or press ALT-C to clear the field. C. Press the Enter key to validate your entry. 4. To save each new password to the PLC, press the Enter key again. Respond to the prompt that appears by pressing the Y (Yes) key. If you want to quit without saving any passwords to the PLC, press the N (No) key. 5.
GFK0466L

Enter the correct password to access the highestlevel privileges.

To create, change, or remove passwords: 1.

2. 3.

To exit, use the Escape key or any main menu function key.
55

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

5
Enabling/Disabling Passwords
The ability to use passwords may be enabled or disabled in the configuration software. You may want to disable this feature to prevent someone from setting passwords in the CPU. A sample CPU module detail screen displaying the Passwords field that would be used to enable or disable the password feature is shown below. To access this screen, press Zoom (F10) with the cursor positioned on the CPUconfigured slot on the Rack Configuration screen.

The values for the Password field are ENABLED (default selection) or DISABLED. Entering ENABLED will allow the password feature to be used; entering DISABLED will prevent the password feature from being used.

Caution
In order to reenable passwords once they have been disabled, PLC memory must be cleared with an HHP . The HHP needs to be connected. Then power off the PLC. Then hold both the <CLR> and <M/T> keys down while powering the PLC back up. If you do not have an HHP , call the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline (18008285747) for assistance.

Please refer to chapter 10, section 3, Configuring the CPU Module," for more information on configuring this module.
56 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

5
OEM Protection
The OEM protection feature provides a higher level of security than password protection. It may be used to further restrict access to program logic and configuration parameters. To display the OEM Protection screen, press OEM (F9) from the Password Protection screen.

OEM protection is enabled and disabled by entering the OEM key. The OEM key is a 1 to 4 hexadecimal digit password. If the OEM key has never been set, it will equal the NULL (blank) string. Definition of the OEM key may only be performed in the configuration software; however, OEM protection may be locked or unlocked in the programming software. The OEM protection state is toggled between unlocked and locked each time the OEM key is correctly entered. The OEM protection state cannot be toggled to locked until the OEM key is set to something other than the NULL (blank) string. Once the OEM protection is locked, it will remain locked until the OEM key is correctly entered to toggle the protection state. The OEM protection state is retentive across a power cycle. If the OEM protection is locked in the PLC and power is lost, the OEM protection state will remain locked when power is restored to the PLC if the CPU battery is attached.

Note
Beginning with version 3.0 of Logicmaster, Subroutine View and Edit Lock features have provided a more flexible method for limiting access to OEM logic than the OEM Password feature which locks both configuration and all logic. Moving logic to a block and locking only that block allows the end user to access other parts of the PLC. Refer to page 460 for a description of each of the Lock options and page 461 for directions on how to use the Lock feature.
GFK0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 57

5
PLC Fault Table
The PLC Fault Table screen lists PLC faults such as password violations, PLC/configuration mismatches, parity errors, and communications errors. For example:

To display the PLC Fault Table screen, press PLC Fault (F3) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. The programmer may be in any operating mode. However, if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode, no faults are displayed. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode, PLC fault data is displayed. In ONLINE mode, faults can be cleared (this may be password protected). Field
Top Fault Displayed Total Faults Table Last Cleared Entries Overflowed PLC Time/Date

Description
The index of the PLC fault currently at the top of the fault display is shown on the first line of this screen. The total number of faults since the table was last cleared. The date and time faults were last cleared from the fault table. This information is maintained by the PLC. The number of entries lost because the fault table has overflowed since it was cleared. The PLC fault table can contain up to 16 faults. The current date and time. This is also maintained by the PLC.

Note
Because the Model 323, 321, 311, 313, 211, and Micro CPUs do not support the timeofday clock, entries for date and time in the fault tables are displayed as 0000 00:00:00.

58

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

5
Fault Table Entries
For each fault, the display shows the date and time the fault occurred, and the following information about the fault: Field
Fault Location Fault Description

Description
The location of the fault (rack/slot address). For example, 3.2 refers to rack 3, slot 2. The fault that has occurred: Loss of, or missing, I/O module. Loss of, or missing, option module. Addition of, or extra, rack. Addition of, or extra, I/O module. System configuration mismatch. PLC CPU hardware failure. Nonfatal module hardware failure. Option module software failure. Program checksum failure. Low battery signal. Constant sweep time exceeded. PLC system fault table full. User application fault. No user program present. Corrupted user program on powerup. Password access failure. PLC CPU system software failure. Communications failure during store.

Different faults will result in different reactions; e.g., some faults will stop the CPU; others will not. For more information about each type of fault, refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467. For diagnostic faults, the CPU sets fault references. For fatal faults, the CPU sets fault references and places the CPU in STOP mode. Informational faults do neither. If there are more faults than will fit on one screen, you can display them using the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down, and cursor keys. Refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467, for more fault information.

GFK0466L

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

59

5
Number of Faults in the PLC Fault Table
The PLC fault table can contain up to 16 faults. Additional faults cause the table to overflow, and faults are lost. The system reference SY_FULL (%S0009) is set to indicate that the fault table is full. As faults occur, the first 8 faults are logged into the table and remain there until the table is cleared. None of these eight faults is dropped if the table overflows. For faults 9 through 16, however, the fault table operates as a FirstInFirstOut queue. When fault 17 occurs, fault 9 is dropped from the table. Clearing the fault table removes all the fault entries.
Fault 16 Fault 15 Fault 14 Fault 13 Fault 12 Fault 11 Fault 10 Fault 9 Fault 7 Fault 6 Fault 5 Fault 4 Fault 3 Fault 2 Fault 1 New faults are added here.

Faults overflow here.

510

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

5
Zooming into the PLC Fault Table
The Zoom (F10) softkey enables you to obtain additional information pertaining to each fault listed in the PLC fault table. By moving the cursor to a particular fault and pressing Zoom (F10), information about the error code, default action, description of the error, and appropriate corrective action is displayed on a screen similar to this one for a low battery signal.

Note
A hexadecimal dump of the fault can be displayed by pressing CTRL-F from this screen. For more information on fault explanations and correction and CTRL-F, please refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467. All softkeys are disabled on this screen, except for Exit (Shift-F10). The Abort key (ALT-A) and the Escape key may also be used to exit from this screen and return to the PLC fault table.

Clearing the Fault Table


Pressing Clear (F9) in ONLINE mode clears all faults from the fault table. Faults can also be cleared from the program logic using the SVCREQ function, as described in the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467. If passwords have been enabled in the PLC, you must be at level 2 or higher in order to clear the fault table. If a printer is connected to the programmer, you may want to print a copy of the fault table screen by pressing the Print Screen key before clearing the fault table. Clearing the fault table, of course, does not clear fault conditions in the system. If the condition that caused a fault still exists, the fault may be reported again after storing the configuration, cycling power to the PLC, or during a STOP-TO-RUN transition.
GFK0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 511

5
I/O Fault Table
The I/O Fault Table screen lists I/O faults such as circuit faults, address conflicts, forced circuits, and I/O bus faults. For example:

To display the I/O Fault Table screen, press I/O Fault (F4) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. The programmer may be in any operating mode. However, if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode, no faults are displayed. In ONLINE or MONITOR mode, PLC fault data is displayed. In ONLINE mode, faults can be cleared (this feature may be password protected). Field
Top Fault Displayed Total Faults Fault Description Table Last Cleared Entries Overflowed PLC Time/Date

Description
The index of the I/O fault currently at the top of the fault display is shown on the first line of this screen. The total number of faults since the table was last cleared. An explanation of the fault that is currently highlighted in the I/O fault table. The date and time faults were last cleared from the fault table. This information is maintained by the PLC. The number of entries lost because the fault table has overflowed since it was cleared. The I/O fault table can contain up to 32 faults. The current date and time. This is also maintained by the PLC.

Note
Because the Model 311, 313, 211 and Micro CPUs do not support the timeofday clock, entries for date and time in the fault tables are displayed as 0000 00:00:00.
512 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

5
Fault Table Entries
For each fault, the display shows the date and time the fault occurred, and the following information about the fault: Field
Fault Location Circuit Number Reference Address Fault Category

Description
The location of the fault (rack/slot address). For example, 3.2 refers to rack 3, slot 2. The relative position of a point within its module. The value may be from 0 to 1023. The I/O reference address where the fault was detected. The address consists of a two or three character identifier (%I, %Q, %IQ, %AI, %AQ) specifying the memory type and a fivedigit offset within the memory type. The general type of fault that has occurred. For more information, refer to GFK0467. For diagnostic faults, the CPU sets fault references. For fatal faults, the CPU sets fault references and places the CPU in STOP mode. This further explains the fault category. For more information, refer to GFK0467.

Fault Type

If there are more faults than will fit on one screen, you can display them using the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down, and cursor keys.

Number of Faults in the I/O Fault Table


The I/O fault table can contain up to 32 faults. Additional faults cause the table to overflow, and faults are lost. The system reference IO_FULL (%S0010) is set to indicate that the fault table is full. As faults occur, the first 16 faults are logged into the table and remain there until the table is cleared. None of these 16 faults is dropped if the table overflows. For faults 17 through 32, however, the fault table operates as a FirstInFirstOut queue. When fault 33 occurs, fault 17 is dropped from the table. Clearing the fault table removes all the fault entries.
Fault 32 Fault 31 D D D Fault 17 Fault 16 Fault 15 D D D Fault 1 New faults are added here.

Faults overflow here.

GFK0466L

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

513

5
Zooming into the I/O Fault Table
The Zoom (F10) softkey enables you to obtain additional information pertaining to each fault listed in the I/O fault table. By moving the cursor to a particular fault and pressing Zoom (F10), information about the error code, default action, description of the error, and appropriate corrective action is displayed on a screen similar to this one for an Addition of I/O Module error.

Note
A hexadecimal dump of the fault can be displayed by pressing CTRL-F from this screen. For more information on fault explanations and correction and CTRL-F, please refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467.

514

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

5
Press the Page Down key to display additional data pertaining to the fault.

For more information on fault explanations and correction, refer to chapter 3, Fault Explanation and Correction," in the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467. All softkeys are disabled on this screen, except for EXIT (Shift-F10). The Abort key (ALT-A) and the Escape key may also be used to exit from this screen and return to the PLC fault table.

Clearing the Fault Table


You can clear the fault table in ONLINE mode by pressing Clear (F9). (This may be password protected.) Faults can also be cleared from the program logic. Clearing the fault table removes the faults it contains. Clearing the fault table does not clear fault conditions in the system. If the condition that caused a fault still exists, the fault may be reported again after storing the configuration, cycling power to the PLC, or during a STOPtoRUN transition.

GFK0466L

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

515

5
PLC Memory Used
The PLC Memory Usage screen shows the amount of PLC memory available and the amount used for application program information. To display this screen, press PLC Memory (F5) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. This is an example of the PLC Memory Usage screen:

Field
PLC ID

Description
In ONLINE or MONITOR mode, the name of the PLC being communicated with. It will always be the same as that shown in the status area of the screen. The ID name can be set on the Assign PLC ID screen in the configuration software. The model number of the attached PLC: D CPU 211: Series 9020 PLC Model 211 D UDR1/2: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UDR001 or UDR002 D UAA003: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAA003 D UDR005: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UDR005 D UAL006: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAL006 D UAA007: Series 90 Micro PLC Model UAA007 D CPU 311: Series 9030 PLC Model 311 (5slot) or 321* (10slot). D CPU 313: Series 9030 PLC Model 313 (5slot) or 323* (10slot). D CPU 331: Series 9030 PLC Model 331 with a 10slot rack. D CPU 340: Series 9030 PLC Model 340 D CPU 341: Series 9030 PLC Model 341 D CPU 350: Series 9030 PLC Model 350 D CPU 351: Series 9030 PLC Model 351 D CPU 352: Series 9030 PLC Model 352 D CPU 360: Series 9030 PLC Model 360 D CPU 363: Series 9030 PLC Model 363 D CPU 364: Series 9030 PLC Model 364 The revision of PLC software. The amount of memory in the PLC that is available for application program information. The amount of program memory occupied by the logic program. The amount of program memory remaining.

Model

Software Revision User Memory Available User Program Program Remaining

*PLC model 321 uses the CPU311 in a 10slot rack. Likewise, PLC model 323 uses the CPU313 in a 10slot rack. This field displays the actual CPU model, not the PLC model. 516 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

5
Block Memory Usage
The Block Memory Usage screen shows the amount of memory used for different parts of the application program. For example:

To display the Block Memory Usage screen, press Block Memory (F6) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen. The first block for which information appears is the _MAIN block. To display information for another subroutine block, enter its name on the command line and press the Enter key. Field
Block Name

Description

The name of the block for which values are displayed. Values can also be displayed for locked blocks. Block Checksum The result of a comparison of the code checksums for the block from the programmer and from the PLC. This is either EQUAL or NOT EQUAL. Program The block's logic memory size. Declarations The block's symbol table size. Explanations The block's explanation text size. This field will always display asterisks since no explanations are currently stored in the PLC.

GFK0466L

Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status

517

5
Configured Reference Sizes
To see how much memory has been used for program references, press Reference Size (F7) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen.

This function is available in all programmer operating modes and also to locked blocks. No values are displayed for the PLC if the programmer is in OFFLINE mode. No values are displayed for the configuration file if there is no configuration file in the current folder. Values that do not match are highlighted. Field
Highest Used - Folder Config Limit - Folder Config Limit - PLC

Description
Lists the highest value used. Lists a configuration value for each reference type in the folder. Lists a configuration value for each reference type in the PLC.

518

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

5
PLC CPU Sweep Control
You can set the Sweep while the PLC is in RUN mode, and it only affects the PLC during that RUN; i.e., each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode, the default sweep mode takes effect. No matter what the default sweep setting is, you can change it for the current RUN and have the resulting effects immediately applied. You can use the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter to toggle the sweep mode of the PLC without having to change the configured sweep settings, or you can change the amount of time for the constant sweep on this same screen. (This may be very useful when you need to fine tune the sweep time while the PLC is running a program.) To display or change PLC timers, press sweep (F8) from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC functions screen.

In ONLINE or MONITOR mode, the software shows the current CPU sweep time information.

Note
The default window mode for the programmer window is LIMITED"; i.e., if a request takes more than 6 milliseconds to process, it is processed over multiple sweeps, and no one sweep is impacted by more than 6 milliseconds. For CPU models 313, 323, and 331, the sweep impact may be as much as 12 ms. during a RUNMode store. If you change the programmer window mode to COMPLETE," then the sweep time may be impacted by as much as 50 milliseconds, but the response to external programmer devices will be quicker. To change the programmer window mode from LIMITED" (the default) to COMPLETE," press the down arrow (cursor) key once to highlight the programmer window field. Then press the Tab key to change the first selection. To change the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter, press the Tab key to change the first selection (Mode") from NORMAL" to CNST SWP" (if necessaryif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep, it will already say CNST SWP"). Press the
GFK0466L Chapter 5 PLC Control and Status 519

5
Right Cursor (arrow) key to advance the cursor to the Time" selection. Then enter the desired number of milliseconds (5 to 200 with a default of 100 for most CPUs5 to 500 for the 350 and higher CPUs).

Note
Remember that the number of seconds entered here cannot exceed the value of the Watchdog Timer. Also remember that the change you make through the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter will have immediate effect but will be replaced by the default sweep mode each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode.

Press the Escape key when done.

Note
Remember, settings from this screen are only stored in the PLC, not in the folder. These settings may be configured and stored in the folder using the configuration function. For more information, refer to chapter 10, section 3, Configuring the CPU Module."

Active Constant Sweep Mode Setting


No matter what the default sweep setting is, you can change it when the PLC is in RUN mode and have the resulting effects immediately applied. You can use the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter to toggle the sweep mode of the PLC without having to change the configured sweep settings, or you can change the amount of time for the constant sweep on this same screen. (This may be very useful when you need to fine tune the sweep time while the PLC is running a program.) To change the constant sweep time (unless it is passwordprotected) or the mode, Logicmaster must be in ONLINE mode. To set the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter, after entering the PLC Sweep Control screen, press the Tab key to change the first selection Sweep Mode" from NORMAL" to CNST SWP" (if necessaryif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep, it will already say CNST SWP"). Press the Right Cursor (arrow) key to advance the cursor to the Time" selection. Enter the desired number of milliseconds (5 to 200 with a default of 100).

Note
Remember that the number of seconds entered here cannot exceed the value of the Watchdog Timer. Also remember that the change you make through the Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter will have immediate effect but will be replaced by the default sweep mode each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode. For an explanation of the PLC sweep, refer to chapter 2, System Operation," in the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467.
520 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

Chapter

6 Programmer Setup
section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

This chapter explains how to set up the programmer for communication with the PLC and how to select the programmer operating mode. To use the programmer setup features, press SETUP (F7) from within the programming software.

Note
On computers with a keyswitch, such as the Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer, the Mode Selection (F2) key does not appear on the Programmer Setup screen, unless the keyswitch was disabled during programmer setup.

GFK0466L

61

Section 1: Programmer Operating Mode


During configuration and programming, the computer is always in one of three operating modes: Mode
OFFLINE

Description
OFFLINE mode is used for program development. The programmer does not communicate with the PLC in OFFLINE mode; power flow display and reference values are not updated. ONLINE mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to be both read and written. MONITOR mode allows programs to be examined and realtime status to be displayed, but no changes of logic, reference values or I/O overrides are allowed. For Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers, MONITOR mode is the only mode which allows the key to be removed from the keyswitch.

ONLINE MONITOR

Many functions require the computer to be in either MONITOR or ONLINE mode. To use either of these operating modes, communications must have been established between the computer and the CPU.

Mode Selection
Both the Workmaster and CIMSTAR I computers have a keyswitch which must be used to select the programmer operating mode. The presence of this keyswitch must be indicated in the programmer setup file, as described in appendix C. For computers without a keyswitch (e.g., the Workmaster II computer), the programmer mode can be selected by pressing Mode (F2) from the Programmer Setup menu or the Serial Port Setup screen. The programmer mode can also be changed by pressing ALT-M from another programming function.

To change the programmer operating mode, use the Tab key to toggle choices at the cursor position or type in a new value. Press the Enter key.
62 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

Section 2: Selecting SNP Connections


The Select SNP Connections" screen provides a log of SNP IDs defined by the user. Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software does not create or use the information in these fields, but it may be helpful to refer to this listing when selecting a specific SNP ID.

Field
File Name

Description
The name of a disk file containing the PLC selection information. If no file name is entered, the default name %PLC030.PSU is used. This field allows you to save the setup parameters to a file other than the default file name. You can then recall the setup from this saved file and perform the setup within that screen. The name used to identify the PLC to be communicated with. A null string may be specified as the SNP ID by leaving the field blank. This allows communication to any PLC using the currently active serial port setup. The null string SNP ID should be used only for direct (pointtopoint) PLC connections, since all PLCs will respond in a multidrop configuration. Prior to Release 6.6, the maximum length was six characters. Beginning with Release 6.6 CPUs, the SNP ID may be up to seven characters long. The serial link configuration. The serial port can be set up for direct (pointtopoint) communication with one PLC, or multidrop configuration with several PLCs connected to the WSI Board serial port. Direct connection should not be used with a multidrop configuration. In a multidrop configuration, all PLCs must be set up with the same parity and number of stop bits. They can, however, have a different baud rate. These fields allow you to enter the SNP IDs which have already been defined.

Selected SNP ID

Port Connection

SNP ID Numbers

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

63

Section 3: PLC Communications Serial Port Setup


In the standard serial communications version of the software package, the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen takes the place of the Programmer WSI Serial Port Setup screen used in the WSIbased version. If you are using the WSI Board for serial communications, skip this information and go to the information on WSI serial port setup which follows. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software provides logic programming and configuration for the Series 9030, 9020, or Micro PLC, using the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 serial port instead of a Work Station Interface (WSI) board. This version is available as a separate programming package. It also supports offline programming.

Standard Serial COM Port


The contents of the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro programming package include: D D D D D Two 5.25inch High Density diskettes, three 3.5inch Double Density diskettes. Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual, GFK0466. Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controller Reference Manual, GFK0467. Important Product Information for the Standard Serial COM Port Version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software, GFK0683. If the programming package is ordered as IC641SWC306 (or IC641SWC307 depending on the type of diskettes used), a Miniconverter Kit, IC690ACC901, is included. The kit consists of an RS422 (SNP) to RS232 miniconverter, a 6foot (2 meter) serial extension cable, and a 9pin to 25pin converter plug assembly.

The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software uses a software communications driver to perform the functions of the WSI board. This communications driver, when added to the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software, may not fit in the available memory of most computers unless MSDOS Version 5.0 ( or higher) or a commercially available memory manager is used. The following steps must be performed in order to establish communications with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC: 1. Configure the computer memory for the communications driver. Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software uses a communications driver that may be loaded into different memory areas. Please refer to Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver" on page 66. If both versions of the software package (WSI or Standard Serial COM Port) are installed on your computer, you must select which version to run from the Startup Menu's Setup File Editor. (For directions on how to set up your startup menu to handle both versions, refer to page 316 and appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup.") Connect the cable between the computer's serial port (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4), the RS422/RS485 Converter, and the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC serial port.
GFK0466L

2.

3.

64

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

6
Note
If you have the Miniconverter Kit, IC690ACC901, please refer to GFK0682 for more information. If you wish to make your own cable, refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controller Installation Manual, GFK0356, for more information. 4. Set up the computer's serial port to be used for PLC communications. It should match the characteristics of the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC serial port. Please refer to Setting up the Computer's Serial Port," on page 610.

Requirements
To run the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software, you will need: Requirement
MSDOS Memory Manager

Description
MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher. MSDOS Version 5.0 (or higher) or a memory manager that complies with one of the following specifications: The LIM/EMS (Lotus Intel Microsoft/Expanded Memory Specification) Version 3.2 or later. The XMS (eXtended Memory Specification) Version 2.0 or later. A list of some compliant memory managers is included at the end of this section.

Computer Hard Disk RAM

Miniconverter Kit

A Workmaster II, Zenith Mastersport SL Notebook, or other computer with a 80386 or higher processor and at least one available COM port. At least 4 Megabytes of hard disk space. At least 564 KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS conventional memory; or 520 KB of available DOS conventional memory and 42 KB of High Memory Area, Upper Memory Block, or Expanded Memory, for the COM port driver. A Miniconverter Kit, IC690ACC901, may be ordered. This kit contains the necessary cable and converter to connect from your computer to the Series 90 PLC.

Port Requirements
The Standard Serial COM Port version requires at least one Standard Serial COM Port in the host computer in order to provide communications with the PLC. This version will support either the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 port in common use by IBMcompatible machines. These ports must use the INS8250 UART chip, or functional equivalent. The COM port I/O addresses and interrupt requests are shown in the following table: Port
COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4

Port Address
3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8

IRQ
IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ3

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

65

6
While the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software is active, the serial port assigned to PLC communications will be used exclusively for PLC communications. If a serial printer is being used, a second serial port is required; or you may direct print output to disk files, and then use MSDOS to print the disk files while outside the Logicmaster environment. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software monitors CleartoSend (CTS) to determine a cable disconnect. Therefore, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software must use a connection with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC that will keep its RequesttoSend (RTS) active in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. The RTS at the PLC must be connected to CTS at the Logicmaster computer serial port. Halfduplex modems cannot be used with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software since they rely on RTS/CTS flow control, which is not supported by the software. The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software supports multidrop connections, using RS422 4wire hookups or modems. RS422 multidrop will work as long as the Series 90 PLC slaves transmit only in response to requests from an attached Logicmaster host.

Configuring Memory for the Communications Driver


The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software requires a communications driver that may be loaded in different memory areas. The communica tions driver requires 42 KB of memory. A memory manager may be required, depending on the computer and the amount of installed memory. That is to say, you can load the communications driver (requiring 42 KB of memory) into conventional memory if you have enough available conventional memory to do so; if not, then you will need to ensure that it can be loaded into one of the other areas of memory described on the next page and discussed in detail on page 613 and following. If you are using MSDOS version 6.0 or later, try the following techniques for increasing the amount of free memory. First, at a DOS prompt, type the command MEM /C /P and press Enter to list all programs and how much Conventional and Upper Memory each program is using as well as showing you the total amount of free memory. Then remove any programs not needed. MSDOS also includes the MEMMAKER program to help optimize usage of upper memory. To use it, type MEMMAKER at the DOS prompt; select the Custom option using the space bar. Choose YES on the questions about using EMS memory. Select YES for Scan Upper Memory Aggressively" and for Use Monochrome Area" if you have a color monitor. MEMMAKER will reboot your computer several times as it tries and tests CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT memory options. If MEMMAKER fails to provide enough memory for the serial comm driver, use the MEM /D /P command to display which regions of upper memory have free space and use the /L:region_number switches in CONFIG.SYS to load programs manually.

66

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

6
MSDOS Memory Areas Defined
One of the following memory areas is used to load the communications driver: D D D Extended Memory, consisting of the High Memory Area and extended memory blocks. MSDOS System Memory, consisting of Conventional Memory and Upper Memory. Expanded Memory. Type
High Memory Area

Description
65,520 bytes of memory space just above the 1 Megabyte boundary (addresses 0FFFFF to 10FFFF). This area can only be accessed by computers with 80286/ 80386/80486 microprocessors. PCs with 8086/8088/80188/80186 microprocessors cannot address this memory space. Use of the High Memory Area (HMA) requires either HIMEM.SYS or QEMM386t memory manager. The memory manager must comply to the Extended Memory Specification XMS 2.0. For more information on using the High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer, refer to page 614.

Upper Memory Memory space between 640 KB and 1 Megabyte. This memory space is usually Block used for BIOS or video RAM. On computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors and extended memory installed, extended memory can be mapped into this area with the aid of a memory manager or MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher. If you want the communications driver loaded into this area, you can configure the memory manager to make this area available. For more information on using the Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer, refer to page 615. Conventional Memory The first 640 KB of memory addresses. It is sometimes referred to as low memory (RAM) or base memory (RAM). For more information on using conventional memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer, refer to page 616. For more information on using video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer, refer to page 617. The userinstalled memory option that can be accessed with an expanded memory manager through a page frame area between the MSDOS 640 KB and 1024 KB addresses (e.g., GEXMEM). The communications driver may be loaded to the page frame area. This memory area is suitable for computers with Intel 80xx family processors. Some laptop personal computers with 8086/8088 microprocessor and 1 Megabyte of memory come with an expanded memory manager driver (for example, Toshiba 1200). The memory managers must comply to the Lotus/Intel/Microsoft LIM Expanded Memory Specification 3.2 or later. For more information on using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or higher computer, refer to page 616.

Expanded Memory

t QEMM386 is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems.

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

67

6
Communications Driver Load Order
To specify the area for the communications driver, you must enter Setup from the main menu. Refer to appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup," for instructions on how to change the memory allocation for this driver. The recommended setting for this driver memory allocation is Automatic," i.e., you let Logicmaster decide how best to set up the memory allocation. If the option selected from the PLC Communications Options screen is automatic, communications driver is loaded into the first available memory area found, according to the following sequence: 1. 2. If the High Memory Area is free and the computer supports the High Memory Area, the driver is installed in the High Memory Area. If the High Memory Area is not available, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software will look for the Upper Memory Block area. If there is enough space for the driver, the driver can be installed in the Upper Memory Block space. Then, if neither the High Memory Area nor the Upper Memory Block is available, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software will examine the MSDOS conventional memory. If the MSDOS conventional memory space is large enough for Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software and the communications driver to coexist, the driver will be installed in the MSDOS memory space as a TerminateandStayResident (TSR) program. Next, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software will examine the Expanded Memory. If the expanded memory manager is installed, the loader will try to allocate an expanded memory page frame area and install the driver in the page frame area.

3.

4.

Note
If the COMM driver has to load here in the EMS page frame, EMS memory will be disabled for storing the Variable Table. You will get a warning that Logicmaster needs 1024 KB of EMS memory even though EMS memory is present. 5. If all these steps fail, then the driver is not installed and a message will appear on your screen stating, PLC communications driver was not installed." In addition, the following prompt will be displayed: Do you wish to continue? (Y/N)" If you answer: Y, you may program offline without PLC communication capability. If you still wish to communicate with the PLC, you must ensure that one of the memory areas listed in steps 1 through 4 above is available. Instructions for memory management are listed on page 613 and following of this manual and are also included in your DOS manual. If you have an additional memory manager, such as QEMM, you may wish to refer to that manual as well.

6.

Note
The PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen in the setup function of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software will display where the communications driver was loaded. Refer to Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port" on page 610 for more information.
68 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

6
Running Logicmaster 90 Software
When entering the Standard Serial COM Port version of the software package, the software will attempt to install the correct communications driver in the available memory space. As mentioned previously, if the driver cannot be installed, the message, PLC communications driver was not installed," will appear on the Initializing screen. The software will prompt you to continue. If you enter N after the prompt, the Logicmaster 90 main menu is displayed. You may then exit back to MSDOS to correct the memory problem. If you enter Y, the software will proceed without PLC communication capability. (You may program offline.) The main menu screen is then displayed. For example, the programmer software would display this screen:

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

69

6
Setting Up the Computer's Serial Port
The computer's serial port (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4) may be set up from the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen in the setup function. Press COMSET (F4) (COMSET is the abbreviation for Communications Setup) from the Programmer Setup menu to display the PLC Communications Serial Port Setup screen shown below:

Note
The PLC CPU defaults to the parameters displayed on this screen (e.g., 19200 baud, odd parity, etc.). These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see Chapter 10, Section 3, Configuring the CPU Module").

The table on the next page (i.e., the facing page) provides detailed information about the fields in the screen shown above.

Note
This section of the manual discusses setting up the ports on your PC. For information about configuring the ports on the PLC, refer to Chapter 10, Section 3, Configuring the CPU Module." Of special significance, the 351 and 352 PLC CPUs have two configurable ports; for information on configuring those ports, refer to page 418.

610

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

6
Field
Port Selection Setup File Name

Description
Select the serial COM port (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4) to be used for communicating with the PLC. The default file name for saving the setup parameters is changed from %WSI030.PSU to %COM030.PSU, to avoid any confusion with the WSIbased version. The %COM030.PSU will contain additional information, such as the COM port selection, which is not present in the %WSI030.PSU file.

Press Default (F3) to set the parameters on this screen to their default values. The PLC CPU defaults to these parameters, as displayed on the screen shown above (e.g., 19200 baud, odd parity, 1 stop bit, etc.). These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see chapter 11, section 3, Configuring the CPU Module"). Baud Rate: The transmission rate, in bits per second, of data through the port. Parity: Specify whether the parity bit is odd or even; or, if no no parity bit is needed, select none. To toggle the selections, place the cursor on the field and press Tab to toggle forward (ShiftTab to toggle backwards.) Stop Bits: All serial communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower devices may use two stop bits. Modem Turnaround Time: The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. If no modem is used, specify zero. When the PLC is connected through a modem, the value must be one or greater. PLC Information on the communications driver, including: Communication Version. Driver Where the driver was installed: High Memory Area (HMA), Information Expanded Memory (EMS), Conventional MSDOS Memory (DOS), or Upper Memory Block (UMB) Area. MSDOS segment address at which the driver is loaded. MSDOS INT vector that it will use.

Parameters

Setting Up the Port


To set up the serial port, enter the appropriate values in the fields on the Serial Port Setup screen. Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor mover) keys to move from field to field. In each field, you can use the Tab key to cycle through the valid selections, ShiftTab to reverse the direction of the selection display. Once all the values have been entered, press Setup (F6).

Displaying Port Settings


Press Show Port (F1) to display the current settings for the Serial Port Setup screen. Pressing F1 while completing the screen will delete all the changes that have been made. The previous settings of the current driver will then be redisplayed on the screen.

Note
The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software requires either the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 as the communications port for communicating with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC. Do not use the same COM port for printing that you are using for communicating with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC. For additional information, see the Serial Printer Setup" section at the end of this chapter.

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

611

6
Saving the Port Setup
Press Save (F7) to save a copy of the current serial port settings to a disk file. The data will be saved to a separate file. If you do not specify a file name, a default name will be assigned. To create a file of settings which is not automatically invoked, enter a file name other than the default name. If no path is given, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. After you press Save (F7), the settings are stored to a file and also set up on the port.

Displaying File Settings


The settings currently stored in a file can be viewed by first entering the file name and then pressing Show File (F2). If no path is specified, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. If the File Name field is blank, the default setup file settings are displayed.

Port Usage Conflicts


The standard serial communications version will reserve one of the COM ports for PLC communications. To avoid any conflicts, you should follow these guidelines: Conflict
Setup Files

Description
The setup file looked for during system initialization is %COM030.PSU. This file is used to initialize the PLC communications port. If more than one setup file is found for the designated PLC communications port, the PLC communications file %PLC030L.PSU will take precedence. If the Printer Serial Port Setup screen is displayed and you attempt to perform a setup on the designated PLC communications port, a warning is displayed and the setup is not done. The Print utility provides several screens for selecting the print output device. Any attempt to select the designated PLC communications port as the output device is denied.

User Setup

Print Destinations

Note
Logicmaster only supports standard I/O ports (3F8, 2F8, 3E8 and 2E8) and interrupts (IRQ4 and IRQ3) for COM1 to COM4. The selected I/O port must also be defined in the standard BIOS data area at hex offset 40:0. The BIOS in some computers may not initialize the BIOS data area at power up, specially for COM3, COM4 or serial PCMCIA cards. In this case, Logicmaster will indicate that the COM port is not available. You can check if I/O ports are defined by starting DEBUG at the DOS prompt or in a DOS window under Windows or Windows 95. Enter the command, D 40:0 at the dash (-) prompt and look at the first 8 hex bytes on the first line. If you reverse the bytes (Intel style), you will see the I/O port addresses defined for COM1 to COM4.
612 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

6
Memory Manager Specifications
Any memory manager used to support the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software must comply with one of the following specifications: 1. 2. LIM/EMS (Lotus Intel Microsoft/Expanded Memory Specification) Version 3.02 or later. XMS (eXtended Memory Specification) Version 2.0 or later.

Compliant Memory Managers


The following are some drivers which comply with the memory manager specifications listed above: 3. QEMM386 (Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager for 386). This driver can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. It is available from: Quarterdeck Office Systems 150 Pico Boulevard Santa Monica, CA 90405 (213) 3929701 4. QEMM (Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager). This driver can be used on computers with 8086/8088 microprocessors. It can be ordered from same address listed above. HIMEM.SYS (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher) from Microsoft Corporation. This Microsoft memory manager complies with XMS specification. It can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. EMM386.SYS (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher) from Microsoft Corporation. This Microsoft memory manager simulates expanded memory while using extended memory. It can be used on computers with 80386/80486 microprocessors. BlueMAXt for PS/2 computers and 386MAXt for 80386 ATbased computers. Both are available from: Qualitas, Inc. 7101 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1386 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 9076700

5.

6.

7.

Restrictions
To avoid conflicts of memory usage between the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software and MSDOS programs, the following rules must be followed: 1. If the computer is set up to use the High Memory Area memory area, the VDISK program must not be used. Any program using VDISK must remove VDISK before running the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. Another application cannot use Expanded Memory if the communications driver is loaded into Expanded Memory.

2.

t BlueMAX and 386MAX are trademarks of Qualitas, Inc.

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

613

6
Using High Memory Area on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Physical Extended Memory for High Memory Area Operation
If not already present, you must add and configure physical memory on your computer to be accessed in memory addresses over 1 Megabyte (FFFFF).

386 Memory Manager


You must install a 386 high memory manager such as Microsoft HIMEM.SYS (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMM386 or 386MAX. The memory manager should be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later. You can install HIMEM to allow use of the High Memory Area. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. If you have MSDOS 5.0 (or higher) and wish to use the High Memory Area, do not load MSDOS into the High Memory Area. (The CONFIG.SYS file should not have a DOS=HIGH command.) Restart your computer by pressing CTRLALTDelete.

3.

614

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

6
Using Upper Memory Block on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Physical Extended Memory for Upper Memory Block Operation
If not already present, you must add and configure physical memory on your computer to be accessed in memory addresses over 1 Megabyte (FFFFF).

386 Memory Manager


You should install a 386 memory manager such as Microsoft EMM386 (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMM386 or 386MAX. The memory manager must be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later. With MSDOS 5.0 (or higher), you can install HIMEM and EMM386 to allow use of the Upper Memory Block. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. Add a device command for EMM386 to your CONFIG.SYS file. The device command for EMM386 must come after the device command for HIMEM and before any commands for device drivers that use expanded memory. For example: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram

Note
With MSDOS 6.0, more upper memory can be obtained from B000 B7FF that is reserved for monochrome VGA display memory; however, this address space is unused on most computers. To enable extra UMBs, include this address range using the following command line instead of the one above: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram i=b000b7ff 3. Add a DOS=HIGH command to the CONFIG.SYS file. For example: dos=high,umb 4. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLALTDelete.

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

615

6
Using Conventional Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer
Extended Memory and MSDOS 5.0 or Higher
If you have MSDOS 5.0 (or higher), you can load MSDOS into high memory. This will free more conventional memory for Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software and the communications driver. You must have at least 564 KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS conventional memory. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher) extended memory manager and the command to load MSDOS into high memory. For example:

device=c:\dos\himem.sys dos=high 2. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLALTDelete.

Using Expanded Memory on an 80386 (Workmaster II) Or Higher Computer


Extended Memory
You must install a 386 memory manager such as Microsoft EMM386 (MSDOS Version 5.0 or higher), Quarterdeck QEMM386 or 386MAX. These memory managers use extended memory to simulate expanded memory. The memory manager should be compliant with the Extended Memory Specification (XMS) Version 2.0 or later.

386 Memory Manager


To install EMM386 as an expandedmemory emulator: 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the HIMEM.SYS extended memory manager (or another memory manager that conforms to the XMS specification). For example: device=c:\dos\himem.sys 2. Add a device command for EMM386 to your CONFIG.SYS file. The device command for EMM386 must come after the device command for HIMEM and before any commands for device drivers that use expanded memory. For example: device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram 3. 4.
616

Disable or remove any other device commands for expanded memory managers. Restart your computer by pressing CTRLALTDelete.
GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

6
Using Video RAM on an 80386 (Workmaster II) or Higher Computer
As described above, the QEMM VIDRAM program from Quarterdeck Office Systems can use the EGA/VGA graphic display memory to gain additional MSDOS conventional memory for use by the communications driver. The graphic display memory (if your EGA/VGA has 64 KB to 96 KB graphic memory) can be turned into 64 KB to 96 KB contiguous memory following the 640 KB conventional memory. 1. Verify that your CONFIG.SYS file contains a device command for the QEMM memory manager. For example: device=c:\qemm\qemm386.sys 2. Verify that your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains a command for the VIDRAM program. For example: c:\qemm\vidram on

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

617

6
Tested Configurations
The configurations listed below have been tested using the Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. GE Fanuc offers this list as a guide to selecting compatible hardware for this version of software. These products have demonstrated compatibility with GE Fanuc via inhouse testing and/or customer reports; however, hardware manufacturers' modifications to their products may affect compatibility. This list is not exhaustive and is offered as a guide only. No endorsement of any particular product is intended. If you have any questions, please contact the GE Fanuc Hotline, 18008285747.
Computer
Zenith Data Systems ZNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in MSDOS) Zenith Data Systems ZNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in UMB) Zenith Data Systems ZNote 433 Lnc+ (Driver in EMS) Gateway 2000 4DX33 (Driver in MSDOS) Gateway 2000 4DX33 (Driver in UMB) Gateway 2000 4DX33 (Driver in EMS) Workmaster II (Driver in MSDOS) Workmaster II (Driver in UMB) Workmaster II (Driver in EMS) ZEOS 486 (Driver in MSDOS)

MSDOS / Memory Manager


MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 5.0 Microsoft HIMEM MSDOS 6.0 QEMM 6.0

CONFIG.SYS File *
device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys 1024 ram device=c:\dos\emm386.exe dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys 1024 ram device=c:\dos\emm386.exe dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram i=b000b7ff dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high,umb device=c:\dos\himem.sys device=c:\dos\emm386.exe 1024 ram dos=high device=c:\dos\qemm386.sys dos=high

ZEOS MSDOS 6.0 device=c:\dos\qemm386.sys ram=D000Dfff 486 QEMM 6.0 dos=high (Driver in UMB) * Each CONFIG.SYS file contains the lines: files=20 and buffers=48.

Note
If your computer has a WSI card, the switch x=ce00-cfff should be added to the device=c:\dos\emm386.exe lines above to reserve this area of memory for its use. For optimum performance, SMARTDRV should be used.

TCP/IP Communications
If you are using a TCP/IP Ethernet version of Logicmaster, refer to Chapter 3 of Logicmastert 9030 and Logicmaster 9070 TCP/IPEthernet User's Manual Supplement (GFK1029B or later).
618 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

Section 4: WSI Serial Port Setup


The serial port on the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board in the programmer provides serial communication between the programmer and the attached PLC. The WSI serial port setup functions are used to configure the WSI serial port, and to save or recall those configurations from disk files. If you do not have a WSI Board for serial communications, turn to the information on PLC communications serial port setup which preceded this information. To display the WSI Serial Port Setup screen, press COMSET (F4) from the Programmer Setup menu.

Note
The PLC CPU defaults to the parameters displayed on this screen (e.g., 19200 baud, odd parity, one stop bit, etc.). These parameters must match the CPU slot configuration that was last stored to the PLC before communications can be established (see chapter 10, section 3, Configuring the CPU Module").

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

619

6
The WSI serial port settings may be viewed, changed, saved to a disk file, or recalled from a disk file in all modes of operation by pressing the appropriate function key. Field
File Name

Description
The name of a disk file containing the WSI port setup parameters. If no file name is entered, the default name %WSI030.PSU is used. This field allows you to save the setup parameters to a file other than the default file name. You can then recall the setup from this saved file and perform the setup within that screen. The transmission rate, in bits per second, of data through the port. Specify whether the parity bit is odd or even; or, if no no parity bit is needed, select none. To toggle the selections, place the cursor on the field and press Tab to toggle forward (ShiftTab) to toggle backward. All communications use one stop bit. Slower devices may use two stop bits. The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. If no modem is used,specify zero. When the PLC is connected through modem, the value must be one or greater.

Baud Rate Parity

Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time

Setting Up a Port
To set up the serial port, enter the appropriate values in the fields on the WSI Serial Port Setup screen. Once all the values have been entered, press Setup (F6).

Displaying Port Settings


The current settings for the WSI Serial Port Setup screen can be displayed by pressing Show Port (F1). Pressing F1 while completing the screen will delete all the changes that have been made. The previous settings of the current driver will then be redisplayed on the screen.

Saving the Port Setup


A copy of the current serial port settings may be saved to a disk file by pressing Save (F7). The data is saved to a separate file. If no file name is specified, a default name is assigned. To create a file of settings which will not be automatically invoked, a file name other than the default name can be specified. If no path is given, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. When Save (F7) is pressed, the settings are stored to a file and also set up on the port.

Displaying File Settings


The settings currently stored in a file can be viewed by first entering the file name and then pressing Show File (F2). If no path is specified, the current default directory is used. If no file extension is provided, .PSU is used. If the File Name field is blank, the default setup file settings are displayed.

620

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Section 5: View Modes Setup (ALTN)

The view mode setup function enables you to specify which modes are displayed when you press ALT-N. These view modes range from showing only rung references to showing reference names and reference descriptions in an expanded rung form (display all mode). You can also view the maximum amount of program logic on a screen by selecting a compressed rung mode. The Home, End, Page Up and Page Down, Previous, Next, and cursor movement keys function the same, regardless of the view mode selected. Display modes are selected from the View Modes Setup screen. To display this screen, press View Mode (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu.

When the View Modes Setup screen is displayed, the mode selections which were last saved are shown. The default selections are Y (Yes) for the programmer view modes and N (No) for minimum rung size mode. Use the Up and Down cursor keys to move between selection fields. Then, use the Tab key to toggle each selection between Y (Yes) and N (No), or enter Y for the view modes you want to sequence through when you press ALTN. Enter N to disable the modes you do not want to sequence through. To validate and save the view mode selections in the home directory file %LM090.PSU, press ALTU or the Escape key. At least one selection must be Y (Yes) in order for the selections to be valid. If all view mode selections are N (No), an error message is displayed and the selections are not saved. To abort the selections and use the last saved setup, press ALT-A.
GFK0466L Chapter 6 Programmer Setup 621

6
Changing the View Mode
The ALTN key sequence also enables you to display table data either right to left (lowest reference address on the right) or left to right (lowest reference address on the left). The view mode can be changed in any table (fixed or mixed) and in any program mode (OFFLINE, ONLINE, or MONITOR).

Note
The print function does not distinguish between these two display modes and prints all tables right to left. The default view mode is the last view mode selected with ALTN. If the view mode has never been changed, the default set in the programmer setup is used. 1. The default reference table view mode is displayed on the View Modes Setup screen. To display this screen, press View Modes Setup (F5) from the Programmer Setup menu. The view mode in the following screen is right to left (the default display).

2.

To change the default view mode to display left to right, move the cursor to the Enabled field for the Reference Table View Modes entry. Then, use the Tab key to toggle the selection to N (No) or enter N. To validate and save the default view mode selection in the home directory file %LM090.PSU, press ALT-U or the Escape key.

3.

622

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Section 6: Serial Printer Setup


The COM1 and COM2 serial ports can be used for serial printers. Beginning with Logicmaster 9030/20 Release 4.50, the serial printer port must be configured with the MSDOS mode command to match the printer settings.

Note
This is a significant change from the previous versions. If you are printing to a serial printer, make sure you observe the following guidelines: D Either COM1 or COM2 can be used for serial printers; however, the serial printer port must be configured with the MSDOS mode command to match the printer settings. The following printer settings must be configured: baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits. An example mode command for a serial printer operating on COM2 at 1200 baud, with 8 bits per character, 1 stop bit per character, and no parity bits would be: mode com2:12,n,8,1 In the example mode command displayed above, COM2: is the port, 12 specifies 1200 baud, n specifies no parity, 8 specifies 8 bits per character, and 1 specifies 1 stop bit. D The mode command can be entered as an MSDOS command or placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The MSDOS mode command must be used to configure the serial printer port before entering the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software package. If persistent errors occur when printing listings to COM1 or COM2 from within the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software package, the buffer size on the printer may have to be increased and the serial baud rate configured for the port may have to be lowered. Read the user manuals provided with your printer and the MSDOS sections in the manual concerning serial ports, printing, and the mode command.

Note
The Standard Serial COM Port version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software requires either COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 as the communications port for communicating with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC. Do not use the same COM port for printing that you are using for communicating with the Series 9030/20/Micro PLC.

GFK0466L

Chapter 6 Programmer Setup

623

Chapter

7 Program Folders
section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

Series 90 programs and configuration data are stored in folders. A folder is an MS-DOS subdirectory which contains all information about one PLC program. To store more than one PLC program, you need to have one folder for each program. Folders must be created using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. An existing MS-DOS directory cannot be used as a folder. CPU Configuration I/O Configuration Program Logic Reference Tables Rung Comments Backup Teach Files

PROGRAM FOLDER

Drawer
A drawer is an MS-DOS directory path which contains one or more folders.

Note
Drawers must be created using MS-DOS before they can be used by Logicmaster90-30/20/Microprogrammingsoftware. When Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is entered, the current MS-DOS directory is the default drawer. The default drawer may be changed from the Select screen by pressing ALT-C to clear the Program Folder field and then entering the MS-DOS directory path (ending in\) of the subdirectory containing the folders you want, for example: C:\LM90\FOLDERS\. Refer to appendix G for an explanation of the files created with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software.

GFK-0466L

7-1

7
Program Folder Names
Every program will reside in its own program folder. The name of the program in the folder and the program folder will be the same (except for the TEMP folder, described below). The folder name is the program name in the PLC. The software will check these names to be sure they match. Programming functions, such as loading a program from the PLC to the computer, are not allowed if the names do not match.

TEMP Program Folder


The special program folder TEMP does not require the folder name and program name to match. The TEMP folder can be used if you need to view a user program and monitor its operation when you do not have the original folder on your machine. The TEMP folder can also be used to load a copy of a program and modify it, without overwriting the previous version. Temp folders created for the Series 90-30 and Series 90-70 are not compatible. If you have a 90-70 TEMP folder, you must exit to DOS and delete the TEMP directory before creating a 9030 TEMP folder. You can use the DOS DELTREE command (DELTREE \LM90\TEMP) or delete all files in TEMP and remove the directory with the RD command, (CD \LM90, DEL TEMP\*.*, then RD TEMP).

Note
Annotation files (nicknames, reference descriptions, and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. Therefore, when loading a program from the PLC to the TEMP folder, the annotation will be missing. Those files are still in the original folder where the program was developed. If another program was developed in the TEMP folder prior to the download operation, the annotation in the recently loaded program will actually belong to the previous program.

Using Program Folder Functions


Both the configuration software and programming software provide a group of program folder functions. These functions can be used to create, select, modify, or delete program folders.

Caution
Do not use MS-DOS to copy individual files from one folder to another or to delete files. Doing so may produce unexpected results. MS-DOS may only be safely used to copy an entire program folder to another program folder of the same name. If MS-DOS functions have been used to place program files into a program folder with a different name, you will not be able to select the program folder.

7-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

7
To use a program folder function, press Folder (F8) from the main menu.

Function Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F10

Function
Select Delete Auto Backup Restore Rename Clear Lock Copy

Description
Create a new program folder, or select a previously created folder. Remove a program folder that is no longer needed. Automatically select the correct program folder and attempt to verify equality with the PLC program. Make a backup copy of the current program folder. Restore a program folder with its backup copy. Rename a program folder to a new folder name. Clear the contents of the current program folder. Lock or unlock a program folder. Locking a program folder prevents its files from being changed or deleted. Copy a program folder into the current program folder. Use this function to make a copy of a program folder that can be modified while retaining the original.

Page
7-4 7-7 7-5 7-8 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14

Note
If a folder contains locked subroutines, these blocks remain locked when the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software copy, backup, and restore folder functions are used. For more information on locking and unlocking subroutines, refer to chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 7 Program Folders

7-3

7
Selecting/Creating Program Folders
To create a new program folder or use one that already exists, press Select (F1) from the Program Folder Functions menu.

Note
Once you edit a program folder using Release 3 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software, you cannot use that folder with an earlier release of software.

Selecting a Previously Created Folder with a New 351 or 352 (or Later) Configuration
If you are using a 351 or 352 CPU hardware configuration and select a folder created previously when you had a different CPU configuration, you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for 351 or 352 CPUs.

Note
As mentioned above, Logicmaster prompts you if you are using 351 or 352 or later hardware configuration and then select a folder created under a different CPU configuration. If you plan to use that folder again with lower model CPUs, Logicmaster does allow that; but make sure you stay within the memory limit and program size limits of the lower model CPU.

Caution
Do not use a pre-Release 7 version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro to store folders to a 352 CPU. There is the potential of having that folder translated to 331 CPU format.
7-4 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

7
The name of the last folder selected is shown in reverse video in the Program Folder field. Other program folders in the current drawer are also listed on the screen. If the attached PLC contains a user program, the name of this program appears in the PLC Program Name field. If the attached PLC does not contain a user program, this field is blank. If the programmer is offline or not connected to a PLC, this field contains asterisks. An entry in this field may not be edited. To select a folder in the current drawer, move the cursor to the desired folder name or type the name of the program folder in the Program Folder field, and press the Enter key. (This is also the name of the program.) The name can have up to seven characters. If a second floppy disk is inserted after a folder has already been selected or created on the first floppy disk, the list of folders is not updated. In order to have the folder list updated, you must reselect the drawer (e.g., enter A:\). To select a folder in a different drawer, first select the drawer by entering the drawer MS-DOS path, ending with a , and pressing the Enter key. For example, enter C:\LM90\FOLDERS\. When the Enter key is pressed, the names of the folders in the newly selected drawer are displayed. Position the cursor on the name of the program folder you wish to select or type the name of the program folder, and press the Enter key. If the program folder already exists, select whether or not to create a backup copy. If the program folder does not already exist, the software will prompt you for confirmation to create a new program folder. This prevents you from accidentally creating a program folder due to a typing mistake. To cancel any changes made to this screen, press ALT-A (abort). To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, use the Escape key.

Auto-Select Function
The Auto (F3) softkey is only active when the select screen is displayed. When F3 is pressed in OFFLINE mode or if the programmer is not communicating with the PLC, a message is displayed indicating that the auto-select function is not available in that mode. When F3 is pressed in MONITOR or ONLINE mode, the programming software checks to see if a folder exists under the current directory whose name matches the name of the program in the PLC. If the folder does exist, it is automatically selected. The software then attempts to verify the program or configuration in the folder with that in the PLC, and updates the equality field on the status line based on the result. After the select screen is exited, the main menu is displayed. In the programming software, if a matching folder does not exist, the following message is displayed: Folder matching PLC name not found; load program to TEMP folder? (Y/N). If N (No) is entered, no folder is selected and the select screen remains displayed on the screen. If Y (Yes) is entered, the TEMP folder is selected or created if one does not exist. Program logic and configuration are loaded from the PLC into the TEMP folder. If the TEMP folder already contains logic and/or configuration files, those files are backed up prior to the load. The status lines are updated to show that the folder program is equal to the version in the PLC. In the configuration software, the message displayed when a matching folder does not exist is load configuration to TEMP folder?. If an error is encountered verifying or loading data from the PLC, an error message is displayed and the select screen continues to be displayed.
GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-5

7
Automatic Folder Selection
The automatic folder selection feature allows Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software to automatically select the correct program folder and attempt to verify equality with the PLC program. During power-up initialization, when the initializing screen is displayed, Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software attempts to establish point-to-point communications with an attached PLC. If this attempt is not successful, the initial folder selection screen is displayed. The programmer mode will default to OFFLINE mode on computers without a programmer mode keyswitch. If a connection exists, computers without a keyswitch default to MONITOR mode. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software will then check to see if a folder whose name matches the PLC program name exists. If the folder does exist, that folder is automatically selected and an equality check is performed. The main menu screen is displayed after the equality check is completed. If a matching folder does not exist, the initial folder selection screen is displayed. You can select a folder or press Auto (F3) to load to the TEMP folder, or select a new drawer and press Auto (F3) to try again to select the matching folder and then to check to see if they are both the same.

Note
If the baud rate with the serial version of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software is set to 1200 or less, the programmer does not automatically go to MONITOR mode.

7-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

7
Deleting Program Folders
Use this function to remove a program folder that is no longer needed. If the program folder has a backup, that copy is also deleted automatically. If you have created any directories using MS-DOS beneath the program folder to be deleted, you must remove them before using the delete function. You may not be able to delete a program folder residing on a virtual drive. If a program folder is locked (lock status is shown in the lower right corner of your screen), you cannot delete it. Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter. Press Delete (F2) from the Program Folder Functions menu.

To delete a folder in the current drawer, type the name of the program folder in the Program Folder field or move the cursor to the desired folder name. Then, press the Enter key. The software will not allow the currently selected folder to be deleted. To delete a folder in a different drawer, enter the full path specification or specify the drawer in the Program Folder field. The window is changed to display the folders in this drawer. Respond to the confirmation prompt to continue with the deletion. Once started, the delete operation cannot be aborted. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, press the Escape key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 7 Program Folders

7-7

7
Backing Up Program Folders
To create a backup copy of the currently selected program folder, press Backup (F4) from the Program Folder Functions menu.

The backup folder is located in a subdirectory under the program folder. If no backup folder exists for the current program folder, one is created automatically. The BackupDestination field allows you to specify where you want to put the backup archive. The default destination is the backup directory of the current folder. To change the destination, move the cursor to this field and enter the new destination.

Note
When backing up to a floppy diskette, you must back up to a subdirectory. For example, A:\ cannot be used as the backup destination. If LESSON is the folder name, A:\LESSON should be used. If only A:\ is specified, you cannot restore from the floppy diskette. Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. To back up the entire contents of the current folder, enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field. To back up only selected options, enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program.

7-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

7
Then press the Enter key. If you back up the entire folder, the software will prompt you for confirmation and then automatically delete the previous backup. A new backup archive will be created to reflect the current contents of the program folder. If you back up only program logic or any other options besides the entire folder, the previous backup is left intact and the selected options are added to the backup. If the selected options were already stored to the backup, they will first be deleted. Once started, the backup operation cannot be aborted. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, press the Escape key.

Restoring Program Folders


To replace the contents of the current program folder with the backup copy, press Restore (F5) from the Program Folder Functions menu. To restore a program folder, a backup copy must exist. If the program folder is locked (locked status is shown in the lower right corner of your screen), you must change the status to unlocked before a restore can occur. Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter.

The RestorationSource field allows you to specify where you want to retrieve the backup archive from. The default source is the backup directory of the current folder. To change the source, move the cursor to this field and enter the new source.

Note
The backup archive must be restored to a folder with the same name as the folder from which the backup originally was made. If not, the message No backup found to restore is displayed.
GFK-0466L Chapter 7 Program Folders 7-9

7
Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. To restore the entire contents of the current folder, enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field. To restore only selected options, enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program.

Then press the Enter key. If any information exists in the current program folder that would be written over by the backup copy, the software will prompt you for confirmation. Once started, the restore operation cannot be aborted. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode, an auto-verification is performed to determine whether the restored program or configuration is equal to the PLC. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, press the Escape key.

Note
The Backup and Restore commands are meant to provide a quick snapshot of your folder to a hard disk. Up to 5 files are created in the BACKUP subdirectory under your current folder. The files are not compatible with PKUNZIP and may not be accessible with other versions of Logicmaster. It also does not automatically create the proper folder name when you do a Backup to a floppy, so it will be difficult to restore the folder. If you are moving a folder to or from a floppy for transfer to another computer, use the Copy command (page 7-15).

7-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

7
Renaming Program Folders
This feature of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software enables you to rename any folder in the current drawer to another folder name that is not being used. To rename a program folder, press Rename (F6) from the Program Folder Functions menu or from another Program Folder screen.

Enter the new folder name into the Rename Folder to field. If you press an alphanumeric key, it is automatically displayed in the Rename Folder to field. To clear this field, press ALT-C or use the Delete key to delete the contents of the field. Press the Enter key to start the renaming operation. The software will prompt you for confirmation to continue the operation with the message Current folder ( <file_name>) will be renamed to <file_name>. Continue? (Y/N). Once started, the rename operation cannot be aborted. Once the rename operation is complete, the message Folder renamed successfully is displayed and the Rename Folder to field is cleared. If the rename operation is aborted, the Rename Folder to field is not automatically cleared since the rename never completed. You must manually clear the field by pressing ALT-C or use the Delete key to delete the contents of the field.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 7 Program Folders

7-11

7
Clearing Program Folders
To delete the contents of the current program folder while keeping the folder itself for future use, press Clear (F7) from the Program Folder Functions menu. If a program folder is locked (look at the lower right corner of your screen), you cannot clear it. Please refer to the information on unlocking program folders provided later in this chapter.

Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. To clear the entire contents of the current folder, enter Y (Yes) in the Entire Folder field. To clear only selected options, enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Print Cross Reference Files

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program. The PRINT.XOV and all .XRF files for the program.

The Tab key may also be used to toggle the selection of each option. The default selection for the Entire Folder field is Y (Yes); all other fields default to N (No). Once the Entire Folder field is set to Y, the remaining fields are automatically set to N. Once any of the other fields is set to Y, the Entire Folder field is automatically set to N.

Note
Program annotation files only exist in the folder and not in the PLC. Clearing the folder and then loading the program from the PLC results in lost annotation.
7-12 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

7
Press the Enter key to begin the clear operation. If there is any information in the folder, the software will prompt you for confirmation to continue the clear operation. Once started, the clear operation cannot be aborted. If you answer the continuation prompt by pressing Y (Yes), you will have a chance to back up the current program folder. To create a backup copy, press Y (Yes) at the prompt. Press N (No) if you do not want to back up the information first. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode, the status is automatically set to NOT EQUAL. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, press the Escape key.

Locking/Unlocking Program Folders


Locking a program folder protects its files from being accidentally changed. To change the locked status of the current program folder, press Lock (F8) from the Program Folder Functions menu.

Use the Tab key to change the access description. Then press the Enter key. The new access description will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

Note
Program folders on write-protected floppy diskettes are automatically locked. Remove the write-protect tab and unlock the folder using this function.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 7 Program Folders

7-13

7
Copying Program Folders Copying to Another Folder on the Hard Disk
Use the copy function to copy from another program folder into the current folder. The source program folder is copied into the Current program folder. If there are any files in the current folder, they are destroyed by the copy process.

Note
The Copy feature functions somewhat differently than you might expect. Notice that you are copying another program folder into the current folder. That is, if you have been using a folder called LESSON, then LESSON is the name of your current folder (as displayed in the Status line toward the bottom of your screen). If you copy the folder called ACCTRL, then the folder called LESSON becomes an exact copy of ACCTRL.

Note
The copy function is only available in the programming software; it is not available in the configuration software. To make a copy of a program folder, press Copy (F10) from the Program Folder Functions menu.

Enter the name of the program folder whose contents you want to copy into the currently selected program folder. Then, use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. To copy the entire contents of the source folder, enter Y (Yes) in the
7-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

7
Entire Folder field. To copy only selected options, enter Y (Yes) in the corresponding fields: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program.

The Tab key may also be used to toggle the selection of each option. The default selection for the Entire Folder field is Y (Yes); all other fields default to N (No). Once the Entire Folder field is set to Y, the remaining fields are automatically set to N. Once any of the other fields is set to Y, the Entire Folder field is automatically set to N. Press the Enter key to begin the copy operation. If there is any information in the current folder, the software will prompt you for a confirmation to continue the copy operation since everything in the current folder will be overwritten. Once started, the copy operation cannot be aborted. If the programmer is in ONLINE or MONITOR mode, an auto-verification is performed to determine whether the programmer/configurator is equal to the PLC. To return to the Program Folder Functions menu, press the Escape key.

Copying to a Diskette
To copy to a diskette, you will need to follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Place a diskette in your disk drive (usually an A or B drive). There should be plenty of room on the diskette. Press F8 from the main menu to select the Folder functions. Press select (F1) Select/Create a Program Folder (see page 7-3 for screen sample if needed). In the Program Folder blank, type in the name you wish to use for the copy you are about to make. Make sure you specify the disk drive letter, e.g., a:\as shown below:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 7 Program Folders

7-15

7
5. Press Enter to select this new folder on your A or B drive.

The following prompt will appear at the top of your screen: Program folder does not exist; create new folder? (Y/N) 6. Type Y to confirm that you want to create a new folder on your diskette.

Note
Notice that you are only creating an empty folder. In the next steps you will copy the contents of your source folder into that empty folder. 7. After Logicmaster has finished creating a new folder, press the Copy softkey (F10).

8. 9.

Type in the entire path and folder name, e.g., c:\lm90\lesson as shown above. Be sure to include the DOS drive and directory which is usually c:\lm90. Press Enter to start the Copy function.

When the Copy is complete, the words Selected folder items have been copied to current folder will appear towards the top of your screen. 10. Press the Escape key to exit the Copy function which takes you to the Program Folder Functions. Press the Escape key again to return to the Program Folder Functions menu. Press the Escape key again if you wish to exit the Programming software. (An alternate way of exiting the software is to press Ctrl-Break once. A prompt will appear asking you if you wish to exit. Type Y (for Yes) to return to the Logicmaster main menu where you can press either F10 or the Escape key to exit. When exiting through Ctrl-Break, you do not need to press the Escape key multiple times.) You can now remove your diskette which has a copy of the source folder on it.
7-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

Chapter

8 Program Utilities
section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

The program utility functions are used to transfer programs, configuration data, and reference tables between the programmer and the PLC. They are also used to compare the program, configuration data, and reference tables in the programmer with the program, configuration data, and reference tables in the PLC, to clear PLC memory, and to read/write/verify EEPROM.

Note
In the configuration software, only the configuration may be loaded, stored, verified, or cleared. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. To access the program utility functions, press Utility (F9) from the main menu, or Shift-F9 from any main menu function screen.

GFK-0466L

8-1

Function Key
F1 F2 F3

Function
Load Store Verify

Description
Copy program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables from the PLC to the programmer. Copy program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables from the programmer to the PLC. Compare program logic, configuration data, and/or reference data in the programmer with the program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables in the PLC. Delete program, configuration data, and/or reference tables from PLC memory. Read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory, write the entire contents of PLC memory to EEPROM, or verify the EEPROM contents with the PLC memory.

Page
8-3 8-5 8-8

F5 F10

Clear EEPROM

8-10 8-12

8-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

8
Loading from PLC to Programmer
Use the load function to transfer program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables from a PLC to the programmer. The load function transfers the program, which remains unchanged in the PLC. This function may be password protected in the PLC. If so, you must know the password in order to use the function.

Caution
You cannot load a Release 4 or above Program with a release earlier than 3.50 of of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software.

Note
In the configuration software, only the configuration may be loaded. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. To use the load function, the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. Press Load (F1) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen. The Load Program screen appears:

Note
Annotation files (nicknames, reference descriptions, and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. Therefore, you must load from the PLC to the original folder containing the annotation in order to retain its annotation.
GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-3

8
Note
If comment text has been edited since the program was stored to the PLC, do not load the program to the folder to restore equality. The program with the updated text should be stored to the PLC instead. This also applies to identifier descriptions for subroutine blocks which have been edited off-line. The subroutine block containing the edited identifier descriptions should be stored to the PLC in order to restore equality. The Load Program screen shows the currently selected program folder and the program name in the PLC; these cannot be changed on this screen. A program must be loaded to a folder whose name matches the PLC program name or a TEMP folder (e.g., a folder whose name is TEMP). Three types of data can be loaded from the PLC to the programmer: program logic, configuration data, or reference tables. When this screen first appears, only the program logic is set to Y (Yes). To load all of the data, change the selections for reference tables and configuration to Y (Yes). To load only part of the data, select N (No) for any of the following: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program.

Also, select whether or not you want to create a backup copy of the current program folder before loading the data. Use the cursor keys to select items, and type in new selections as appropriate. To restore the original selections while editing this screen, press ALT-A. To begin loading the data, press the Enter key. The name of the program in the PLC is checked against the name of the current program folder. If the names are the same, the load continues. If the names are not the same, you cannot start the load unless the folder name is TEMP . After a successful transfer of data, the software displays the message Load Complete. If a communication error occurs during the load process (indicated by a message on the screen), the selected items are cleared from the current folder. Correct the error and repeat the load function. To stop a program transfer in progress, press ALT-A. To return to the Program Utility Functions menu, press the Escape key.

8-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

8
Loading Reference Tables from the PLC to Save in the Computer Folder
Reference Table data is not automatically uploaded from the PLC unless you select it. You may want to do this periodically to capture a snapshot of all PLC register values and override conditions to save in your folder. When you make Online changes to tables or overrides, the information is NOT saved in the folder. If you clear PLC memory or replace the CPU, the reference table information in the PLC is lost. Loading tables from the PLC into the folder allows you to store the same information in a replacement PLC.

Storing to PLC from Programmer


Use the store function to copy program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables from the programmer to the PLC. The store function copies the program, which remains unchanged in the programmer. If the PLC program name is not the same as the folder name, the store function clears both the program and configuration data from the PLC. The data is then stored from the new program folder. The store function may be password protected in the PLC. If so, you must know the password in order to use the function.

Note
In the configuration software, only the configuration may be stored. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. To use the store function, the programmer must be in ONLINE mode. The PLC can be in either STOP or RUN mode. (For more information, see Run Mode Store Function on page 8-6.) Logic Size (Bytes)
1K 2K 4K 8K 16K

2400 Baud
12 seconds 17 seconds 26 seconds 45 seconds 84 seconds

19.2K Baud
2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 8 seconds 13 seconds

GFK-0466L

Chapter 8 Program Utilities

8-5

8
Press Store (F2) from the Program Utility Functions menu. The Store Program screen appears:

The screen shows the currently selected program folder, which cannot be changed. Three types of data can be stored from the PLC to the programmer: program logic, configuration data, or reference tables. When this screen first appears, only the program logic is set to Y (Yes). To store all of the data, change the selection for reference tables and configuration to Y (Yes). To store only part of the data, select N (No) for any of the following: Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables

Description
The ladder logic program. The currentconfiguration. The reference tables for the program.

Note
Annotation files (nicknames, reference descriptions, and comment text) remain in the folder and are not stored to the PLC. A program containing subroutine blocks and/or subroutine CALL instructions cannot be stored to a Pre-Release 3 PLC. Use the cursor keys to select items, and type in new selections as appropriate. To restore the original selections while editing this screen, press ALT-A. The information to be transferred must fit within the configured boundaries of the PLC (for example, its register memory size). To begin storing the data, press the Enter key. The program must be complete, and must not contain errors in syntax or any instructions which are not supported by the attached PLC. If there are errors, the store operation is not attempted.
8-6 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

8
After a successful transfer of data, the software displays the message Store Complete. If a communication or disk error occurs during the store process (indicated by a message on the screen), the selected items are cleared from the current folder. Correct the error and repeat the store function. (Refer to the Caution note below for further information. To stop a program transfer in progress, press ALT-A if the PLC is in STOP mode. If the PLC is in RUN mode when the store begins, you cannot abort the transfer of program logic. To return to the Program Utility Functions menu, press the Escape key.

Note
If you store a program that was written using a CPU hardware configuration other than model 351 to a 351 CPU, you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for 351 CPUs when you start the storing process. Refer to page 7-4 for other considerations when using previously created folders with a 351 CPU.

Caution
A Store failure, such as a Program too large fault or any other failure during a Store function, clears (resets to the default value) everything that had been selected to be stored (program logic, configuration, or reference tables) regardless of whether or not they were successfully stored before the point at which the Store failed. The only exception to this clearing is that passwords are not re-enabled as part of the configuration in the failure. If one of the selected items is the configuration, remember that this includes SNP ID (especially important in a multidrop communications link) and has to be reset manually. Communications parameters such as Baud rate/parity would have to be reset as well. In addition, on a 351 or 352 CPU, all serial port configuration parameters would be lost. The connection to the PLC remains usable until you disconnect. The next attach, however, would be affected by this unless you correct the situation before disconnecting. To correct these problems caused a Store failure, correct the problem area in the program or configuration, then try again to store the program or configuration or reference tables to the PLC. If you had selected configuration when the Store failed, you will also have to set the SNP ID as a separate step.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 8 Program Utilities

8-7

8
Run Mode Store Function
The RUN MODE STORE function enables you to transfer program logic and reference table data to a running PLC system. To do this, the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software automatically switches the PLC into STOP/IOSCAN mode during the transfer and then switches it back to RUN mode after the transfer is complete. The logic sweep is stopped for approximately 1 to 10 seconds, depending on the size of the program and the baud rate. (A very large program combined with a very low baud rate could result in more than 10 seconds.)

Caution
With Release 3.50 or earlier of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software and a CPU Release 3.x or earlier, non-retentive outputs are maintained during the store operation, but they are not maintained after the store operation is complete, as when the system toggles from STOP/IOSCAN mode back to RUN mode. All non-retentive outputs are turned OFF, regardless of their prior state, during this STOP-TO-RUN transition. Retentive outputs are not affected by this operation. They are maintained at all times during and after the RUN MODE STORE. Beginning with Release 4.01 of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software and Release 4.02 CPUs, a PLC mode called Pause will prevent non-retentive outputs from being cleared. Pause mode will cause the CPU sweep to be suspended and all I/O states frozen until the entire program has been transferred. The PLC will then resume operation where it paused, without the STOP-TO-RUN transition that clears non-retentive outputs in CPUs prior to Release 4.02.

Note
You can store a changed block from Block Edit mode without stopping or pausing the PLC. For more information about this feature, refer to page 3-104 in this manual.

8-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

8
Verifying a Program with the PLC
Use the verify function to compare program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables in the programmer with the program logic, configuration data, and/or reference tables in the PLC. This function may be password protected. If so, you must know the password in order to use the function.

Note
You cannot verify a view locked block with an unlocked block. For more information on viewing locked blocks, refer to chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks. In the configuration software, only the configuration may be verified. No operations on program logic or tables may be performed. To use the verify function, the programmer must be in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. Press Verify (F3) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen.

The screen shows the currently selected program folder, which cannot be changed.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 8 Program Utilities

8-9

8
Four types of data can be compared: program logic, configuration data, reference tables, or all logic blocks. When this screen first appears, the selections for program logic and all logic blocks are set to Y (Yes). To compare all of the data, you must change the selection for configuration data and reference tables to Y (Yes). To compare only part of the data, select N (No) for any of the following: Field
Current Logic Block All Logic Blocks Reference Tables Configuration

Description
The block currently selected in the program display/edit function. The main program block and all of the subroutine blocks (all blocks in the program). The reference tables for the program. The currentconfiguration.

Press the Enter key to begin the verify function. While the verify is occurring, you can press ALT-A to abort.

Note
A running PLC with timers, counter and input data will have many changes in reference table data compared to the programmer folder. For that reason, including Reference Tables when verifying a running PLC will generate many miscompares that are meaningless. If the information being compared is the same, the screen prompts: Verify complete; no miscompares detected and the program logic equality state is set to EQUAL. If the program is not successfully verified, the logic equality state is set to NOT EQUAL. If miscompares are found, they are listed on the screen. For example:

Each miscompare displays the name of the logic block and the memory type where the miscompare occurs. Pressing the keyboard space bar will restore the screen to its original form or bring up the next page of miscompare information.
8-10 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

8
Clearing PLC Memory
The Clear PLC Memory function gives you the ability to selectively clear the program logic, configuration, reference tables, and/or reference override tables in the attached PLC.

Note
Only Model 331 and higher CPUs support reference overrides; therefore, this is nonapplicable to Models 211, 311, 313, 321, 323, and the Micro.

This function may be password protected in the PLC. If so, you must know the password to use the function. To use the clear function, the programmer must be in ONLINE mode. Press Clear (F5) from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen to reach the screen shown below:

Four types of data can be cleared: program logic, configuration data, reference tables, and reference override tables. When this screen first appears, the selection for each type is set to Y (Yes). To clear all of the data, do not change any of these selections. When all options are set to Y, the %S fault bits and overrides are cleared. When only the reference tables option is set to Y, %S bits and overrides are not cleared. Select N (No) for those you do not want to clear. Field
ProgramLogic Configuration Reference Tables Override Tables

Description
The ladder logic program The current configuration The reference tables for the program The reference override tables for the program

Press the Enter key to begin the clear function. Once the clear operation has begun, it cannot be aborted. When the clear operation is complete, the software displays the Clear Complete message.
GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-11

8
Clear Reference Override Tables
The Clear PLC Memory function gives you the ability to selectively clear the program logic, configuration, and/or reference tables in the attached PLC. Beginning with Release 4.5, you can clear Reference Override Tables as well.

Special Considerations for Clearing Reference Overrides


The override tables in PLC memory are as follows: Input (%I), Output (%Q), User Internal (%M), and Global (%G). When you select OVERRIDE TABLES on the CLEAR PLC MEMORY screen, all reference override tables will be cleared in PLC memory.

Note
Do not confuse this with clearing the reference tables. To clear reference tables, set the REFERENCE TABLES to Y (Yes) as discussed on the previous page.

Restrictions
To clear the reference override tables, the CPU must be in STOP mode and online with Logicmaster. If you are using passwords with associated privileges, you must have a privilege level of 3 or above to use this feature.

8-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

8
Read/Write/V erify EEPROM/Flash
The Series 90-30 PLC supports an EEPROM (Electronic Erasable PROM) for storing PLC logic, configuration data, register data, passwords, and the OEM key. This EEPROM is located on the Series 90-30 PLC.

Note
CPUs for the Micro as well as Model 340 and higher 90-30 CPUs have Flash memory instead of EEPROM; however, the Read/Write/V erify process is the same for Flash as for EEPROM. That is, all of the instructions listed below apply to all models having Flash memory, as well as all models having EEPROM. The read/write/verify EEPROM function of Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software enables you to selectively read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory, write the entire contents of PLC memory to the EEPROM, and selectively verify the EEPROM contents with the PLC memory.

Note
The read/write EEPROM operations require the programmer to be online and the PLC to be stopped. The verify EEPROM operation can be performed while the programmer is in either ONLINE or MONITOR mode. In addition, these operations cannot be performed if the PLC is in OEM protection mode. To use this function, press the EEPROM (F10) softkey from the Program Utility Functions menu or from another Program Utilities screen.

When the Read/Write/V erify EEPROM screen is first displayed, the Operation field defaults to VERIFY. Use the Tab key to toggle through the valid operations, or enter the desired operation directly into the field. Then, select the information to be processed or just press the Enter key to start execution.
GFK-0466L Chapter 8 Program Utilities 8-13

Operation
Read EEPROM

Description
Selectively read the EEPROM contents into PLC memory. Once the read operation is selected, you may choose the information to be read or use the default options provided: Program Logic: The ladder logic program. Configuration : Data: The current configuration %R (%R only) data for 3.52 and earlier CPU versions %R, %M, %Q, %AI, %AQ, and %I for version 4.21 CPUs %R, %M, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %I, and %G for versions 4.40 and later (see Note below).

When this screen first appears, all three types of data default to Y (Yes). Enter N (No) for those types of data you do not wish to read. After all the options are selected, press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped). The software will prompt you to confirm this operation. Once the read operation has begun, it cannot be aborted. When the read operation is complete, the software displays the message Read from EEPROM completed to indicate that the read was successful. Write EEPROM Write the entire contents of PLC memory into EEPROM. Once the write operation is selected, all of the selective option fields default to Y (Yes); these fields can be changed for the write operation. Press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped) to begin the write operation. Once the write operation has begun, it cannot be aborted. When the write operation is complete, the software displays the message Write to EEPROM completed to indicate that the write was successful. Selectively verify the EEPROM contents with PLC memory. Once the verify operation is selected, you may choose the information to be read or use the default options provided: Program Logic: Configuration : Data: The ladder logic program. The current configuration %R (%R only) data for 3.52 and earlier CPU versions %R, %M, %Q, %AI, %AQ, and %I for version 4.21 CPUs %R, %M, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %I, and %G for versions 4.40 and later (see Note below).

Verify EEPROM

When this screen first appears, all three types of data default to Y (Yes). Enter N (No) for those types of data you do not wish to read. After all the options are selected, press the Enter key (with the PLC connected and stopped). If no miscompares are found, the message Verify EEPROM complete; no miscompares found is displayed on the message line. If miscompares are found, a corresponding error message is displayed to indicate which option(s)miscompared.

Note
Prior to version 3.52 of the 90-30, only Register memory (%R) could be read and verified though this utility. Beginning with version 4.40, you can read, and verify %R, %M, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %I, and %G (version 4.21 could handle all but %G memory).
8-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

Caution
A read EEPROM/Flash failure clears (resets to the default value) everything that had been selected to be read (program logic, configuration, or register data) regardless of whether or not they were successfully read before the point at which the read failed. This includes SNP ID which has to be set manually. The only exception to this clearing is that passwords are not re-enabled as part of the configuration in the failure. If one of the selected items is the configuration, remember that this includes SNP ID (especially important in a multidrop communications link) and has to be reset manually. Communications parameters such as Baud rate/parity would have to be reset as well. In addition, on a 351 or 352 CPU, all serial port configuration parameters would be lost. The connection to the PLC remains usable until you disconnect. The next attach, however, would be affected by this unless you correct the situation before disconnecting. To correct this problem, try again to store the program or configuration or register data to the PLC. If you had selected configuration when the Store failed, you will also have to set the SNP ID as a separate step.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 8 Program Utilities

8-15

Chapter

9 Print Functions
section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

9
D D D

The print function is used to: Determine a printing device or file destination for Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro screen print text. Enter printer parameters. Print copies of programs, configurations, and reference tables to files or a printer.

Note
Print may be used to print the values in the program folder only. To print the values from the PLC, the reference values must first be loaded to the folder by using the load utility function (see chapter 8). Chapter 9 contains the following sections: Section
1 2 3

Title
Printer Parameters Selecting a Screen Print Device Print Program

Description
Explains how to check or to change the currently selected printer parameters. Explains how to designate a printer or file to receive screen prints. Explains how to print program logic, cross references, variables, and program annotation to a printer or to a file. Explains how to print reference tables to a printer or to a file. Explains how to print coil references to a printer or to a file. Explains how to print software configuration data to a printer or a file. Illustrates various hard copy listings which can be produced using the print function.

Page
9-3 9-5 9-7

4 5 6 7

Print Reference Tables Print Coil References PrintConfiguration Print FunctionExamples

9-14 9-16 9-18 9-21

GFK-0466L

9-1

9
Print Functions Menu
To display the Print Functions menu in the programming software, press Print (F10) from the main menu, or Shift-F10 from any main menu function screen.

Caution
Do not use the same file extensions for printing as are used for the program folder files. Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software does not prevent the printing of a listing to a file with the same name as one of the program folder files. If this is done, part of the folder may be lost. Refer to appendix G for a list of file extensions used by the software.

9-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 1: Printer Parameters

The printer setup parameters used by the programmer must match those of your printer. Default values are supplied. These can be changed and stored in a file for continued use. To change your printer setup or check its contents, press Setup (F1) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen.

The setup screen shows the value and possible selections for each parameter.

Changing Setup Printer Parameters


To change entries on the Printer Parameters screen: 1. 2. 3. Move the cursor to the item you want to change. Type (or use the Tab key) to enter new values as needed. When you are finished, decide whether your entries or the default values shown above should be used when the system is started. A. To save the printer parameters only until the next power-up (and then return to the default parameters), do not press Save (F10). B. To save the printer parameters, press Save (F10). This causes the printer parameters to be written to the PRINT.SET file. This file is written to the home directory. When the programmer is powered up, these entries will replace the standard default values.
GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-3

9
Printer Parameters
Refer to the following descriptions when changing the entries on the Printer Parameters screen.

Table 9-1. Printer Parameters


Parameter
Paper Width

Description
The number of characters printed on a line. If the printer is set up for standard 8-1/2 inch wide paper, select 80 characters for the paper width. If the printer uses 11-inch (or wider) paper, you may select either 80 or 132 characters. In 80-character mode, rung numbers and cross references are printed above the rungs. In 132-character mode, the format of the ladder logic is the same. However , rung numbers and cross references are printed to the right of the rungs. The number of lines (from 50 to 120) that can be printed on a page (default= 60). If an associated group of lines will not fit on one page, the system will command the printer to advance to the next page after the number of lines specified by this entry. Note: Some printers automatically insert a formfeed after printing a certain number of lines (typically, 66). If the printer has this feature, specify a shorter page length to prevent an automatic page eject.

Number of Lines per Page

Line Feed with a Carriage Return

The line feed character advances the paper to the next line for printing. This item determines whether the system automatically inserts a line feed (<CR><LF>) each time the printer head should return to the left page margin. Note: Some printers can be set up to automatically advance to the next line by entering only <CR>. Refer to the instructions for your printer to determine how it works. If you do not want the programmer to insert a line feed character after each carriage return character, enter N (No). To have the programmer insert the <LF> character after each <CR> character, enter Y (Yes).

Printer Setup Sequences

If the printer uses leading or trailing control characters, enter the characters here. If you move the cursor to either of these entries, a field will appear where you can enter the appropriate characters. Printer control sequences are issued immediately before and after a listing. This feature can be used to put the printer into a particular mode (for example, compressed output), returning to the original mode after the listing is finished. From 0 to 60 characters can be specified. To enter non-printing characters, use one backslash followed by the three-digit decimal equivalent of the ASCII representative. For example, to identify the Escape character <ESC>, you would enter \027. A leading zero is required. If you need to enter the backslash character itself, enter two backslashes: \\.

9-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 2: Selecting a Screen Print Device


The print screen function can be used to print a copy of any screen in the programmer. To execute a screen print, go to the screen you wish to print and press ALT-P . The printing of the screen is sent to the selected device or file. To abort the printing before it completes, press any key. Screen prints can be sent to an output port or directed to a file. To specify a screen print destination, press Screen (F2) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen.

Sending Screen Prints to a Printer


If screen prints should be sent to a printer, the selection for the port should match the current printer port. If the port is a serial port (COM1 or COM2), be sure to set the baud rate using the program setup function. To use COM2, the PC must have two serial ports physically present. (This is an MS-DOS restriction.) To save the port designation, press Save (F10). When you exit the screen, the programmer will create a file named SCRPRINT.SET, located in the home directory. This file is read by the programmer at startup. To use the port designation temporarily, exit the screen without pressing Save. The port selected is used until the programmer is powered down or until changed on this screen.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-5

9
Sending Screens to a File
If screen prints should be sent to a file, then the port entry should be file. You can enter any valid file name for the screen print file. This file is used to store all future screen prints, which are added to the end of the file. When specifying the screen print device destination to disk, use the full path name. If only a file name is specified, the screen print file is written to the folder that was active when the screen print device was specified; this may or may not be the current folder. Refer to appendix G for a listing of reserved file extensions. If printing is paused while printing to a floppy disk, the disk swapped for a second disk, and then printing is resumed, neither disk will end up with a usable listing file. In addition, the second disk must be formatted before further use.

9-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 3: Print Program


The print program function is used to print program logic, cross references, variables, and program annotation. To use the print program function, press Logic (F4) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen.

Specify the content for the printout on this screen as instructed on the following pages. If you do not change a selection, its default is used. If the printout should also include program cross references (which show other program uses of selected references), press F5 to select the cross references to be included. To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS.SET, press Save (F10). This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. If you do not save the content of this screen, the default values will be used the next time you print program logic, cross references, variables, or program annotation. After completing the selections, press the Enter key to start printing. Printing will continue unless paused or aborted. When the printing is complete, the software displays the message Listing complete. To temporarily suspend printing after it begins, press Pause (F9). To restart printing, press F9 again. An attempt to print to a printer that is out of paper results in the message, Printing device is offline; press pause to resume, being displayed. To abort printing while in progress, press ALT-A and respond to the prompt. Printing will also abort if you press CTRL-Break, which will exit the programming software. When a listing is being printed to a file and the listing is aborted, the file containing the listing up to that point is closed and is not deleted. It contains valid data up to the point where it was stopped.
GFK-0466L Chapter 9 Print Functions 9-7

9
Print Program Parameters
Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Print Program page. Examples are provided in section 6 of this chapter.

Table 9-2. Print Program Parameters


Parameter
Title Subtitle Header Page

Description
An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. The title may change if specified in a rung comment. An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. The subtitle may change if specified in a rung comment. The header page for a program shows the program name, CPU reference sizes, highest references used in the program, and the size of the program,in bytes. To print header pages, enter Y (Yes). To print tables of variables and identifiers, enter Y (Yes). To print all blocks (except those that have been view locked) in the selected program, enter Y (Yes). During listing or printing, the name of the block being printed appears on the status line at the bottom of the screen. Logic for blocks which have been view locked cannot be printed, even if Y (Yes) is selected for AllBlocks. A list of the view locked blocks that could not be printed will be included at the end of the printout. For more information on locked blocks, refer to chapter 3, section 8, Subroutine Blocks. If All Blocks is set to N (No), only the current block is printed. The name of the block is displayed on the status line. Whether one block or all blocks are printed, the printout will include the IL Logic and Logic items specified below.

Variable Table AllBlocks

IL Logic

To print Instruction List logic, enter Y (Yes). IL Logic adds Hand Held Programmer key strokes under each rung which is very useful for maintaining the program with the HHP . To print ladder diagram logic, enter Y (Yes). Then, specify the content of the logic printout: Reference List: Enter Y (Yes) to print a table at the bottom of a page listing all the program references on that page. For each reference, the table lists the machine address, nickname, and reference description. Nickname and Reference: Enter Y (Yes) to print both machine addresses and their nicknames with the ladder logic. If N (No) is entered, only nicknames are printed in the logic. Machine addresses are printed for any references that do not have nicknames assigned. ReferenceDescription: Enter Y (Yes) to print reference descriptions above the reference addresses at the next print logic request. When the print reference description feature is selected, the first 28 characters of the reference description for each reference address in the logic are printed above the reference address. The reference description is divided into four lines of seven characters each. If the nickname and reference option is also selected, the reference description is printed above the nickname, for a total of six lines above the instruction. If the nickname and reference option is not selected, the reference description is printed directly above the reference address or nickname, for a total of five lines above the instruction. Refer to chapter 3, section 7, Changing the Display Mode, and chapter 6, Programmer Setup, for more information on selecting the view modes. RungComments: Enter N (No) to print comments in instruction form only. If Y (Yes) is entered, rung explanation text is printed in place of the comment instruction. Additional text for rung comments may be created as separate files, as described in chapter 3, section 4, Program Annotation. If this has been done, be sure the files are present on the specified drive when printing begins.

Logic

9-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
Table 9-2. Print Program Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
From/T o Rung

Description
To print a range of logic rungs within the program, enter the first and last rung number of the group to be printed. If the AllBlocks option is set to Y (Yes), these fields will be ignored. To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1, enter the number here. Specify the destination of the listing. To send the printout to a file instead of to a printer, enter a name for the file here. A printout file cannot be written to a locked folder. If a file already exists with the selected name, the new file will overwrite it. Refer to appendix G for a listing of the extensions used by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. You do not want to overwrite one of these files with print text.

Starting Page Number Port File Name

Shortcuts for Printing Program Logic


The following suggestions can help you shorten a program logic printout: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not select both the reference list and reference description options. If the program contains many reference descriptions, use the reference list option instead of the reference description option. If the program contains few reference descriptions, use the reference description option instead of the reference list option. Use the 132-column page width instead of the 80-column page width. This is very helpful when printing in-ladder cross references with logic.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-9

9
Cross References
Cross references in a printout show the use of references in the program. Cross references can be included as part of the ladder logic text and/or listed as separate tables. If the All Blocks parameter on the Print Program Logic screen is set to Y (Yes), the cross reference tables for each block are printed following the logic for that block. To include cross references, press F5 from the Print Program screen or from another Print Functions screen.

Specify the content and format of the cross reference printing on this screen. If you do not change a selection, its default is used. To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS.SET, press Save (F10). This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. If you do not save the content of this screen, the default values will be used the next time you print program logic, cross references, variables, or program annotation. Press Logic (F4) from this screen to return to the Print Program Logic screen. The following key can be used for interpreting cross reference instruction symbols: Symbol
### (###) FBIO JMP LABEL MCR EMCR CALL

Description
Explicitreference. Implicitreference. Function block direct reference. Jump control. Label. Master control relay. End master control relay. Block CALL instruction.

9-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Cross Reference screen.

Table 9-3. Cross Reference Parameters


Parameter
In Ladder

Description
To include cross references as part of the ladder logic, enter Y (Yes). Cross references for each reference address used on the coils in a rung are printed with that rung. In addition, each time the reference address is used on a contact, the most recent rung on which the reference address was used on a coil (referred to as the controlling rung) is listed under the contact. Specify whether to print separate tables of cross references for each block and/or a single set of cross reference tables for the program. The printout contains a table for each reference type which has at least one address reference used anywhere in a program. Within each table, cross reference information is printed in ascending order of reference address offset. For each reference address offset, the cross reference data is grouped by block and, then within each block, by the instructions on which the reference is used. For each instruction, rung numbers are printed in ascending order. For references used more than once on a given rung in the same instruction, the rung number is listed only once. Per Block: If Y (Yes) is selected for PerBlock, sets of unique cross reference tables for each block are printed. A per block cross reference table contains only the cross reference information for references used within the scope of a single block. The default for this option is N (No). Global: If Y (Yes) is selected for Global, one set of cross reference tables for the program is printed. A global cross reference table for a reference type will contain all the cross reference information for references of that type used anywhere within the scope of the program. The information for a reference address will consist of each block, rung number, and instruction on which the address was used. The information will also include the unique nickname and reference description assigned to the reference address within each block. The default for this option is N (No). The nickname and reference description defined for a reference address within the scope of a block is printed when the global cross reference data for that reference address and that block is printed. Implicit cross reference data may be included or excluded from either type of cross reference table listing by entering Y or N in the Implicit Xref field. If included, the implicit usage of a reference address by an instruction is printed with parentheses around the rung number of the rung containing that instruction. An identifier name global cross reference table will be printed when the Xref TablesGlobal option is selected. Since the only identifier table names known and used globally in a program are the block names, the global identifier name cross reference table will consist only of the usage information for block names. For each block name, the global cross reference identifier table will list the blocks in which it is called, and the rung numbers within each block of the rungs containing the CALL instruction. Global cross reference tables will be printed after all other logic listing text that you selected has been printed and before the global use tables.

Cross Reference Table

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-11

9
Table 9-3. Cross Reference Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Use Tables

Description
Specify whether to print separate reference use tables for each block and/or a single set of reference use tables for the program. The symbol means a reference is not used. The symbol * means used explicitly on an instruction operand. The symbol + means used implicitly by an instruction. When both * and + apply, the symbol # is used. (Refer to the entry for implicit cross references in this table for more information.) Per Block: If Y (Yes) is selected for PerBlock, sets of unique reference use tables for each block are printed. A per block reference use table contains only the reference use information for references used within the scope of a single block. The default for this option is N (No). Global: If Y (Yes) is selected for Global, one set of reference use tables for the program is printed. A global reference use table for a reference type will contain reference use information for the entire program. The default for this option is N (No). Implicit reference usage data may be included or excluded from either type of reference use table listing by entering Y or N in the Implicit Xref field.

ImplicitCross Reference

Implicit references are references that are used, but which do not appear directly in the program. For example, if the MOVE_INT instruction has an input %AI001, an output %AQ001, and a length of 5, %AI001 and %AQ001 are explicitly used. Due to the length, there are really 5 words of input/output. The next 4 words are implicitly used. To include both implicit and explicit references in cross reference tables, enter Y (Yes). If N (No) is entered, only explicit references are printed. Enter Y to select the reference types for which cross reference tables and/or reference use tables will be printed. The tables will begin at reference address offset 1 and end with the highest used reference address offset of each reference address type in the program or block. Enter N for those references whose cross reference tables and/or reference use tables will not be printed. To include cross references of block names, and MCR, ENDMCR, JUMP , and LABEL names in a cross reference table printout, enter Y (Yes) in the Identifiers field.

Memory Types

9-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
Table 9-3. Cross Reference Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Directory

Description
Specify a directory to store cross reference data files. The specified location for the .XRF, PRINT.XOV , and GLOBAL.PTX cross reference data files must be either a hard disk, an expanded memory device, or a RAM Disk. The cross reference files cannot be sent to a floppy disk or a locked folder. In either case, an error message is displayed. If no entry is made here, the files are stored in the current folder. Refer to appendix G for extensions used by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Do not overwrite one of the Logicmaster 90 files with print text. Note: Cross reference data files are not automatically deleted when exiting the print function. The .XRF and PRINT.XOV files remain in the designated directory unless you enter Y (Yes) in the Delete Files After Use field. This prevents having to cross reference the same blocks each time a listing is started. When subsequent listings from the same folder are generated, only the cross reference data files for the blocks which have changed since the previous listing are deleted and recreated. The default selection for the DeleteFiles After Use field is N (No). In addition to the .XRF and PRINT.XOV files, a temporary file named GLOBAL.PTX is created. The file will exist during a listing that includes global cross reference text; it will be deleted when the global cross reference listing terminatessuccessfully, terminates with an error, or aborts. To delete the cross reference files after the listing completes, enter Y (Yes). If you want the cross reference files to remain on disk, enter the default N (No). To delete cross reference files from a folder without printing a listing, use the selected clear folder function.

Delete Files After Use

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-13

Section 4: Print Reference Tables

To print reference table values (excluding coil references) for the program, press Values (F6) from the Print Functions menu or from another Print Functions screen. (See the next section for printing coil references.)

Note
Print may be used to print the values in the program folder only. To print the values from the PLC, the reference values must first be loaded to the folder by using the load utility function (see chapter 8).

The listing can be directed to a printer or to a file. These tables correspond to the tables that can be displayed and formatted using the reference tables function. For example:
***** I N P U T V A L U E T A B L E *****

REF. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS + + + + + + + ++ %I0064 01101001 00001000 00010101 01011011 00010000 11100100 11010100 01001110 %I0128 00001101 11101111 01100100 01111011 01000011 11001010 00010110 00011000 %I0192 01011111 11110010 00111000 11100011 00010001 10101011 00000000 00000000 %I0256 00000000 00000101 00010010 00011100 00000000 00101101 01011011 10011100

Specify the content of the printout on the Print Values screen.


9-14 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

9
Table 9-4. Value Table Parameters
Field
Title Subtitle Header Page

Description
An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. The title may change if specified in a rung comment. An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. The subtitle may change if specified in a rung comment. The header page for a program shows the program name, CPU reference sizes, highest references used in the program, and the size of the program, in bytes. To print header pages, enter Y (Yes). To print value tables (input, output, etc.), enter Y (Yes). Value tables are printed in groups of three lines at a time. To print the override value tables associated with selected %I, %Q, and %M references, enter Y (Yes). To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1, enter the number here. Specify the range of values to be printed. Enter values only for types of references to be printed. If any references should not be printed, enter zeros in both the FROM and TO fields. If the configured limits change (i.e., by changing folders, clearing a folder, or downloading from the PLC), the address ranges will be re-initialized. Specify the destination of the listing. To send the printout to a file instead of to a printer, enter a name for the file here. A printout file cannot be written to a locked folder. If a file already exists with the selected name, the new file will overwrite it. Refer to appendix G for a listing of the extensionsusedbyLogicmaster90-30/20/Microsoftware. You do not want to overwrite one of these files with print text.

Value Tables Overrides Starting Page Address Range

Port File Name

To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS.SET, press Save (F10). This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. If you do not save the content of this screen, the default values will be used the next time you print program logic, cross references, variables, or program annotation. After completing the selections, press the Enter key to start printing. Printing will continue unless paused or aborted. When the printing is complete, the software displays the message Listing is complete. To temporarily suspend printing after it begins, press Pause (F9). To restart printing, press F9 again. During printing, press ALT-A to abort the printout. Printing will also abort if you press CTRL-Break and confirm your action. This will exit the programming software.

Note
When a listing is being printed to a file and the listing is aborted, the file containing the listing up to that point is closed and is not deleted. It contains valid data up to the point where it was stopped.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-15

Section 5: Print Coil References


You can print reference descriptions for coils through the new parameter COIL REF DESCRIPTION as shown below:

The default for this print parameter is No. The REFERENCE DESCRIPTION option controls the printing of reference descriptions for all other references. The sample section from a 132-column print (shown below) resulted from the settings shown above. See Note below for information about the differences between 80- and 132-column print.
|AUTOPB LISUP %Q0038 %Q0012 %I0013 EMERGST %Q0006 %Q0075 %Q0005 << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> +] [] [] [] [+]/[]/[] [] [( ) | | |%Q0005 | +]/[+ | |EMSTOP %I0100 CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST << RUNG 5 STEP #0011 >> +] [+] [+] [+] [( ) (* Emergency Return | | | | | |EMERGST|UNISUP | | +]/[+]/[+ | |%Q0005 %Q0012 %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 << RUNG 6 STEP #0020 >> +]/[]/[] [] [( )

*)

Note
For 132-column listings, the coil reference descriptions print in a single line to the right of each coils reference address as shown above. When set for an 80-column listing, the coil reference descriptions print in the standard LM90 reference description form of four lines above each reference address. See the table on the next page for additional considerations.
9-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

9
The following table is provided to explain the options you now have for printing references. If you set the REFERENCE DESCRIPTION print option to:
Y

And the COIL REF DESCRIPTION print option to:


N

The results are:

Prints reference descriptions above contacts and instruction operands, but it does not print coil reference descriptions. Prints reference descriptions for coils only. Prints reference descriptions for all references.

N Y

Y Y

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-17

Section 6: Print Configuration


In the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro configuration software package, the print function enables you to obtain a listing of all I/O and CPU configuration data. The listing can be directed to a port for immediate printout, or to a file for later printing. The following functions are provided:

D D D D D

View/change printer parameters. Select the screen print destination. Generate a rack hardware configuration listing. Generate a configured reference address listing (Ref View). Generate a CPU configuration listing.

To display the Print Functions menu in the configuration software, press Print (F10) from the main menu, or Shift-F10 from any main menu function screen.

The Setup (F1) and Screen (F2) keys perform the same functions as their corresponding keys in the programming software. Refer to section 1 of this chapter for information on setting up the printer parameters, and to section 2 for information on selecting the screen print output destination.

9-18

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
Accessing the Print Configuration Screen
To use this function, press Print Configuration (F4) from the Print Configuration menu. The following screen will be displayed:

The Print Configuration menu defines which parts of the rack configuration should be printed out and the destination of the listing. To save the content of this screen to a file called PSCREENS.SET, press Save (F10). This file is located in the directory of the active program folder and is read when the print function is entered. If you do not save the content of this screen, the default values will be used the next time you print program logic, cross references, variables, or program annotation.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-19

9
Refer to the following definitions when changing the entries on the Print Configuration screen.

Table 9-5. Print Configuration Parameters


Field
Title Subtitle I/ORack Detail Reference View CPU Configuration Starting Page Number FromI/ORack To I/O Rack

Description
An optional title of up to 62 characters centered at the top of each page. An optional line of up to 62 characters printed below the title on each page. To print rack information, enter Y (Yes). To print the detailed configuration screens, enter Y (Yes). This field is only available when the selection for the I/O Rack field is Y. To print the reference view tables, enter Y (Yes). To print CPU configuration data, enter Y (Yes). To begin numbering the printout with a page number other than 1, enter the number here. The value may range from 1 to +32,767. Enter the number of the first rack whose configuration data is to be printed. The value of this field may not exceed the value of the To I/O Rack field. Enter the number of the last rack whose configuration data is to be printed. The value of this field may not be less than the value of the From I/O Rack field. In order to print a single rack of information, both the From I/O Rack and To I/O Rack fields must contain the same value. Specify the destination of the listing. If file is selected for the destination in the Port field, enter the name of the file to which the printout is to be directed. Any valid file specification may be entered in this field. A new file is always created, overwriting any existing file of the same name.

Port File Name

Pagination Guidelines
Only one type of screen can be printed on a given page, but multiple detail screens may be printed on a single page if they will fit on that page following these guidelines:

Table 9-6. Pagination Guidelines


Field
Rack Detail

Description
The printing of a given rack cannot be broken across pages. Only one rack per page is permitted. The printing of a given detail screen cannot be broken across pages. Because the length of a listing page may be changed and there are a variable number of detail screens for a given module, all the screens of a particular module may not be displayed on the same page.

9-20

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Section 7: Print Function Examples


The following examples illustrate various hard copy listings which can be produced with the print function. Certain information is presented on every page, regardless of what specific item is currently being printed. The first line of each page of the listing will contain the date, time, software version number, and page number. The user-supplied title and subtitle are centered on the second and third lines of the page, respectively. The program name appears in the bottom left corner of the page. The current program folder specification appears in the bottom center of the page.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-21

9
The header page is printed when Y (Yes) is selected for the header page option on the Print Program Logic screen. The header page for the program includes the program name, the configured reference sizes supported by the host PLC, the highest reference address used in the program, and the size of the program in bytes. This is an example program header page:

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE

FFFFF F FFF F F

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

U U U U

U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

U U U U

U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO

M M MM MM M M M M M M M

AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

(******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: NEW *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0100 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0061 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0006 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0003 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 208 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************)

Program: NEW

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW

9-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
This example printout was generated by selecting only Y (Yes) for the IL Logic option.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

<< START OF BLOCK _MAIN >> << RUNG 4 #0001 << RUNG 5 #0002 #0003 #0004 #0005 #0006 #0007 #0008 #0009 #0010 #0011 << RUNG 6 #0012 #0013 #0014 #0015 #0016 #0017 #0018 #0019 #0020 << RUNG 7 #0021 #0022 #0023 #0024 #0025 #0026 #0027 #0028 << RUNG 8 #0029 #0030 #0031 STEP #0001 >> 01 NOOP

STEP #0002 >> LD AND AND AND OR AND AND AND AND OUT %I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %Q0005 %I0003 %Q0025 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005

NOT NOT NOT NOT

STEP #0012 >> LD LD OR AND LD OR AND AND OUT %I0002 %I0100 %Q0025 %Q0020 %Q0004 %I0073 %Q0025

NOT BLK NOT BLK

STEP #0021 >> LD AND LD AND OR AND AND OUT NOT NOT NOT BLK %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 %Q0005 %Q0012 %M0005 %M0006

STEP #0029 >> LD NOT AND FUNC 60 P1: P2: P3: OUT %Q0044 %M0002 ADD %R0001 %R0002 %R0003 %Q0006

#0032 #0033

END OF PROGRAM

Program: NEW

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-23

9
In this example printout, Logic is set to Y (Yes), and all Logic options (Reference List, Nickname and Reference, Reference Description, and Rung Comments) are set to N (No).

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP %T0086 +] [+] [+] [+(S) | | | | | |B152_00| | B152_00 | +] [+ +(S) | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 ++ SMP_PMP +] |+] [++ONDTR+( ) | | | |0.10s| | |B152_00| | | | +] [+ ++R | | | | | |I140_01 | | | +] [+ CONST +PV | | +00100 | | | ++ | %R0004 | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0016 >> | |I141_01 B152_00 +]/[(R) | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0018 >> | |PB_SUM %T0075 +] [+( ) | | |BAD_RAM| %T0107 +] [+( ) | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] |

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

Block: _MAIN

9-24

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
In this example printout, the Nickname and Reference option is set to Y (Yes) and the Reference Description option is set to N (No). Both a nickname, if defined, and a reference address are printed on an instruction operand.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP |%I0501 %I0505 %M0997 %T0086 +] [+] [+] [+(S) | | | | | |B152_00| | B152_00 | |%M0627 | | %M0627 | +] [+ +(S) | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP |%I0501 %I0505 ++ %M0997 +] [+] [++ONDTR+( ) | | | |0.10s| | |B152_00| | | | |%M0627 | | | | +] [+ ++R | | | | | | 140_01 | | | |%I0502 | | | +] [+ CONST +PV | | +00100 | | | ++ | | %R0004 | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0016 >> | |I141_01 B152_00 |%I0504 %M0627 +]/[(R) | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0018 >> | |PB_SUM |%SA001 %T0075 +] [+( ) | | |BAD_RAM| |%SB010 | %T0107 +] |+( ) |

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-25

9
In this example printout, the Nickname and Reference option is set to N (No) and the Reference Description option is set to Y (Yes). With the Reference Description option enabled, a four-line reference description, if defined, is printed above each instruction operand. Since the Nickname and Reference option is not selected, only a single line of either a nickname or a reference address is printed on an instruction operand.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM SAMPLE ] (* This is a sample program *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >> | | Intake Sump | Valve Pump 1 | Control Density Conveyr | Switch meter Check |I140_00 I141_07 SMP_PMP %T0086 +] [+] [+] [+(S) | | | | | |Bulb | | Bulb | |B152 | | B152 | |Circ 00| | Circ 00 | |Switch | | Switch | |B152_00| | B152_00 | +] [+ +(S) | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0008 >> | | Intake Sump | Valve Pump 1 | Control Density | Switch meter |I140_00 I141_07 ++ SMP_PMP +] [+] [++ONDTR+( ) | | | |0.10s| | |Bulb | | | | |B152 | | | | |Circ 00| | | | |Switch | | | | |B152_00| | | | +] [+ ++R | | | | | |Air | | | |Intake | | | |Valve | | | |Switch | | | |I140_01 | | | +] [+ CONST +PV | | +00100 | | | ++ | Seconds | to chk | complet | ion | %R0004

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

Block: _MAIN

9-26

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Cross Reference Table and Implicit Cross Reference options, and for %M on the Select Cross Reference Options screen.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

***** I N T E R N A L ***** ***** C R O S S R E F E R E N C E T A B L E ***** REFERENCE %M0247 NICKNAME : MSTP_14 REFERENCE DESCRIPTION / CROSS REFERENCES ::STEP 14 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 287 FBIO (296) ::STEP 15 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 287, 294, 295, 512 FBIO (296) ::STEP 16 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 287, 293, 480, 481, 482, 483, 508, 513, 514, 516, 519, 520, 521, 523, 526, 527, 528, 530, 533, 534, 535, 537, 540, 553 FBIO (296) ::STEP 17 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 227, 228, 229, 288, 293, 591, 592 FBIO (296) ::STEP 18 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 262, 263, 288, 291 FBIO (296) ::STEP 19 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 232, 265, 288, 487, 641 FBIO (296) ::STEP 20 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 275, 289, 487 FBIO (296) ::STEP 21 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 289, 588 FBIO (296) ::STEP 22 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 267, 269, 271, 273, 289, 590 ]/[ 268, 270, 272, 274 FBIO (296) ::STEP 23 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 156, 289 FBIO (296) ::STEP 24 MAIN BIT SEQ ] [ 154, 289 FBIO (296)

%M0248

: MSTP_15

%M0249

: MSTP_16

%M0250

: MSTP_17

%M0251

: MSTP_18

%M0252

: MSTP_19

%M0253

: MSTP_20

%M0254

: MSTP_21

%M0255

: MSTP_22

%M0256

: MSTP_23

%M0257

: MSTP_24

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-27

9
This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Use Tables and Implicit Cross Reference options, and for %M on the Select Cross Reference Options screen.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

*****

I N T E R N A L

U S E

T A B L E

*****

REF. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS + + + + + + + ++ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 %M0832 %M0896 %M0960 %M1024 no use ******** ******** ******** ######## ******** **** ++#####* ***** ***** ***** ######## ******** ******** ++++++++ ******** ******** ** #######* +++####* ******** ******** ++++#### ******** ******** ******** ******** +++++### ++++#### ******** ######## ++++++++ ******** ****** ******** ******* #######* #######* ******** #######* ++++++## ******** * ****** ******** +++++### ++++++++ ***** *** ######## ******** ****** ****** ******** #######* ++#####* ******** ******** #######* ******** **** ******** **** ++++#### ******* ******** ******** ++++++++

** * explicit use

+ implicit use

# explicit and implicit use

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

Block: _MAIN

9-28

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Value Tables option and setting the %M reference address range to 1 to 1024 on the Print Values screen.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

*****

I N T E R N A L

V A L U E

T A B L E

*****

REF. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS + + + + + + + ++ %M0064 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 ***** I N T E R N A L V A L U E T A B L E *****

REF. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS + + + + + + + ++ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 00000000 00000011 10010100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001100 00000000 00000000 00000100 00000110 00000000 00000000 0008 00000000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100101 01110011 00001111 +00724 00000001 10000000 01000111 01010000 01000000 10000000 00000000 00000100 00000000 01000000 00000001 00010000 01000001 10010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 6179 00000001 11011100 10000100 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000001 01010010 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 00001111 00000000 00000000 00000010 00010001 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 +09232 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000100 10101100 10011000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

There are no nonzero values in the range from %M0769 to %M1024.

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-29

9
This example printout was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Overrides option and setting the %M reference address range to 1 to 1024 on the Print Values screen.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

*****

I N T E R N A L

O V E R R I D E

T A B L E

*****

REF. |64 |56 |48 |40 |32 |24 |16 |8 |1 ADDRESS + + + + + + + ++ %M0064 %M0128 %M0192 %M0256 %M0320 %M0384 %M0448 %M0512 %M0576 %M0640 %M0704 %M0768 %M0832 %M0896 %M0960 %M1024 0 01 01 0 1 00 0 0 1 0 00000000 0000 0 100 0 0 00 0 = overridden in OFF state 1 = overridden in ON state

= not overridden

Program: SAMPLE

D:\30FOLDERS\SAMPLE

9-30

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
This example printout of an 80-column listing of a short program was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the IL Logic, Logic, and In Ladder Cross Reference options. IL Logic adds Hand Held Programmer instructions under each rung, required to maintain the program with an HHP .

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEW ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> Cross reference for %Q0005 | ]/[ 5, 7 | |%I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %I0003 %Q0025 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005 +] [] [] [] [+]/[]/[]/[] [( ) | | 0006 0008 |%Q0005 | +]/[+ | 0005 | | #0002 LD %I0004 | #0003 AND %Q0002 | #0004 AND %Q0044 | #0005 AND %Q0012 | #0006 OR NOT %Q0005 | #0007 AND NOT %I0003 | #0008 AND NOT %Q0025 | #0009 AND NOT %Q0006 | #0010 AND %Q0061 | #0011 OUT %Q0005 | | << RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for %Q0025 | ]/[ 5, 6 | |%I0002 %I0100 %Q0020 %I0073 %Q0025 +] [+] [+] [+] [( ) | | | | | |%Q0025 |%Q0004 | | +]/[+]/[+ | 0006 | | #0012 LD %I0002 | #0013 LD %I0100 | #0014 OR NOT %Q0025 | #0015 AND BLK | #0016 LD %Q0020 | #0017 OR NOT %Q0004 | #0018 AND BLK | #0019 AND %I0073 | #0020 OUT %Q0025 |

Program: NEW

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-31

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

| << RUNG 7 STEP #0021 >> Cross reference for %M0001 | NONE | |%Q0005 %Q0012 %I0021 %I0022 %M0001 +]/[]/[+] [] [( ) | 0005 | |%M0005 %M0006 | +]/[] [+ | | #0021 LD NOT %Q0005 | #0022 AND NOT %Q0012 | #0023 LD NOT %M0005 | #0024 AND %M0006 | #0025 OR BLK | #0026 AND %I0021 | #0027 AND %I0022 | #0028 OUT %M0001 | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0029 >> Cross reference for %Q0006 | ]/[ 5 | |%Q0044 %M0002 ++ %Q0006 +]/[] [+ ADD_+( ) | | INT | | | | | %R0001 +I1 Q+%R0003 | | | | %R0002 +I2 | | ++ | | #0029 LD NOT %Q0044 | #0030 AND %M0002 | #0031 FUNC 60 ADD | P1: %R0001 | P2: %R0002 | P3: %R0003 | #0032 OUT %Q0006 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0033 END OF PROGRAM |

Program: NEW

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEW

Block: _MAIN

9-32

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

9
This example printout of an 80-column listing was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the IL Logic, Logic, Reference List, Rung Comments, and In Ladder Cross Reference options.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEWPROG ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | (*****************************************************************************) | (* The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling condi *) | (* tions are met. See operators manual, page 612, for more information. *) | (*****************************************************************************) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> Cross reference for AUTO | ]/[ 5, 7 | |AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO +] [] [] [] [+]/[]/[]/[] [( ) | | 0006 0008 | AUTO | +]/[+ | 0005 | | #0002 LD %I0004 | #0003 AND %Q0002 | #0004 AND %Q0044 | #0005 AND %Q0012 | #0006 OR NOT %Q0005 | #0007 AND NOT %I0003 | #0008 AND NOT %Q0025 | #0009 AND NOT %Q0006 | #0010 AND %Q0061 | #0011 OUT %Q0005 |

REFERENCE %Q0006 %Q0012 %Q0005 %I0004 %Q0061 %Q0025 %Q0002 %I0003 %Q0044

NICKNAME AUTO AUTOPB COOLANT EMERGST LISUP RSTAHPB UNISUP

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Table is out Auto Light Auto Push Button Coolant Valve Emergency Return Loader is up Reset Auto / Hand PB Unloader is up D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN

Program: NEWPROG

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-33

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v3.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

| << RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for EMERGST | ]/[ 5, 6 | |EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +] [+] [+][+] [( ) | | | | | |EMERGST|SPN_MTR| | +]/[+]/[+ | 0006 | | #0012 LD %I0002 | #0013 LD %I0100 | #0014 OR NOT %Q0025 | #0015 AND BLK | #0016 LD %Q0020 | #0017 OR NOT %Q0004 | #0018 AND BLK | #0019 AND %I0073 | #0020 OUT %Q0025 | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0021 >> Cross reference for %M0001 | NONE | | AUTO %Q0012 %M0001 +]/[]/[( ) | 0005 | | #0021 LD NOT %Q0005 | #0022 AND NOT %Q0012 | #0023 OUT %M0001 |

REFERENCE %I0073 %Q0012 %M0001 %Q0005 %Q0020 %Q0025 %I0002 %Q0004 %I0100

NICKNAME

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Table is out

AUTO CLAMPED EMERGST EMSTOP SPN_MTR START

Auto Light Emergency Return Emergency Stop PB Start Spindle Motor D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN

Program: NEWPROG

9-34

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v3.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

| << RUNG 8 STEP #0024 >> Cross reference for %Q0006 | ]/[ 5 | |UNISUP %M0002 ++ %Q0006 +]/[] [+ ADD_+( ) | | INT | | | | | %I0097 +I1 Q+%Q0097 | | | | %I0113 +I2 | | ++ | | #0024 LD NOT %Q0044 | #0025 AND %M0002 | #0026 FUNC 60 ADD | P1: %I0097 | P2: %I0113 | P3: %Q0097 | #0027 OUT %Q0006 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0028 END OF PROGRAM |

REFERENCE NICKNAME %I0097 %I0113 %Q0006 %Q0097 %M0002 %Q0044 UNISUP Program: NEWPROG

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Unloader is up D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-35

9
This example printout of a 132-column listing was generated by selecting Y (Yes) for the Logic, Rung Comments, Nicknames and References, Reference List, and In Ladder Cross Reference options.

011593

15:38

GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

page 1

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM NEWPROG ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |******************************************************************************) | (* The following logic rung enables automatic mode when all enabling condi *) | (* tions are met. See operators manual, page 612, for more information. *) |******************************************************************************) |AUTOPB LISUP UNISUP %Q0012 RSTAHPB EMERGST %Q0006 COOLANT AUTO |%I0004 %Q0002 %Q0044 %Q0012 %I0003 %Q002 %Q0006 %Q0061 %Q0005 +] [] [] [] [+]/[]/[]/[] [( ) | | 0006 0008 | AUTO | +]/[+ | 0005 | |EMSTOP START CLAMPED %I0073 EMERGST +] [+] [+] [+] [( ) | | | | | |EMERGST|SPN_MTR| | +--]/[+]/[+ | 0006 | | AUTO | I%Q0005 %Q0012 TM0001 +]/[]/[( )-|0005 | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >>

Cross reference for AUTO ]/[ 5, 7

<< RUNG 6 STEP #0012 >> Cross reference for AUTO ]/[ 5, 7

<< RUNG 7

STEP #0021 >>

Cross reference for %M0001 NONE

REFERENCE %I0073 %Q0006 %Q0012 %M0001 %Q0005 %I0004 %Q0020 %Q0061

NICKNAME

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light Table is out

AUTO AUTOPB CLAMPED COOLANT

Auto Light Auto Push Coolant Valve

REFERENCE NICKNAME %Q0025 EMERGST %I0002 EMSTOP %Q0002 LISUP %I0003 RSTAHPB %Q0004 SPN_MTR %I0100 START %Q0044 UNISUP

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Emergency Return Emergency Stop PB Loader is up Reset Auto / Hand PB Start Spindle Motor Unloader is up

Program: NEWPROG

C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG

9-36

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

011592

15:38

GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

page 2

| UNISUP | %Q0044 %M0002 ++ %Q0006 |]/[] [+ ADD_+( ) | | INT | | | | | %I0097 +I1 Q+%Q0097 | | | | %I0113 +I2 | | ++ | | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] |

REFERENCE NICKNAME %I0097 %I0113 %Q0006 Program: NEWPROG

REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Hand Light

REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION %Q0097 %M0002 %Q0044 UNISUP Unloader is up

C:\ACME\CONVEYOR\NEWPROG

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-37

9
The print function must be able to print large rungs which have been truncated by the editor. Truncated rungs will be shown in the listing as they appear on the editor screen. If the number of allowed columns is exceeded, the special truncation character (+) is printed in the rightmost column. If the number of allowed rows is exceeded, the special truncation character (+) is printed below the seventh rung line (bottom displayable row). The following examples show truncated rungs which exceed both the displayable width and height.

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

|[ START OF LD PROGRAM TEMP ] (* *) | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | (*****************************************************************************) | (* This is a sample program to help illustrate the print feature. *) | (* The following rung is truncated on the right and on the bottom. *) | (*****************************************************************************) | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> | |%I0001 %M0001 %M0002 %M0003 %M0004 %M0005 %M0006 %M0007 %M0008 +] [+] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [+ | | |%I0002 | +] [+ + | | |%I0003 | +] [+ + | | |%I0004 | +] [+ + | | |%I0005 | +] [+ + | | |%I0006 | +] [+ + | | |%I0007 | +] [+ + | | |+ |+ + + + + + + + + |

Program: TEMP

A:\TEMP

9-38

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

011593

12:02 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00) TITLE APPEARS HERE SUBTITLE APPEARS HERE

Page

| (****************************************************************************) | (* The following rung is truncated on the right only. *) | (****************************************************************************) | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0023 >> | |%T0001 ++ ++ ++ +] [+ ADD_++ DIV_++MOVE_++ | | INT | | INT | | INT | | | | | | | | |%R0001 +I1 Q+%R0003 %R0004 +I1 Q+%R0006 %R0007 +IN Q+%R0008 + | | | | | | LEN | | | | | | |00001| |%R0002 +I2 | %R0005 +I2 | ++ + | ++ ++ | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] |

Program: TEMP

A:\TEMP

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-39

9
The following pages are sample pages from a program named DEMO30, which calls several subroutines. One of these subroutines, named LIGHTS, is also included in this sample printout.

011593

16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE

FFFFF F FFF F F

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

U U U U

U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

U U U U

U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO

M M MM MM M M M M M M M

AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

(******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: DEMO30 *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 848 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************)

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

9-40

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

011593

16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

(******************************************************************************) (* *) (* BLOCK: _MAIN *) (* *) (* *) (* BLOCK SIZE (BYTES): 170 *) (* DECLARATIONS (ENTRIES): 9 *) (* *) (* *) (* HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): %I0002 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): %Q0001 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): NONE *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): NONE *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): NONE *) (* *) (******************************************************************************)

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-41

011593

16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

|[ | |[ | |[

START OF LD

PROGRAM DEMO30

] ] ]

(*

*)

VARIABLE DECLARATIONS BLOCK DECLARATIONS SUBR ++ 1 |LIGHTS | ++ ++ 2 |DISPLAY| ++ ++ 3 | LOG | ++ ++ 4 |MANUAL | ++ ++ 5 |GENIUS | ++ SUBR SUBR SUBR SUBR SUBR 01 02 03 04 05

LANG: LD

(* Shift lights controlled by timer *)

SUBR

LANG: LD

(* Move data from %R2 to lamps

*)

SUBR

LANG: LD

(* Count shifts of the lights

*)

SUBR

LANG: LD

(* Manual setup and control

*)

SUBR #0001 #0002 #0003 #0004 #0005

LANG: LD

(* Control genius demo case

*)

|[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | #0001 01 NOOP | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0002 >> | | LS1 AUTO +] [(S) | #0002 LD %I0001 | #0003 SET %Q0001 |

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

Block: _MAIN

9-42

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

011593

16:23 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

| << RUNG 6 STEP #0004 >> | | METAL AUTO +] [+(R) | | |FST_SCN| +] [+ | | #0004 LD %I0002 | #0005 OR %S0001 | #0006 RST %Q0001 | | << RUNG 7 STEP #0007 >> | | AUTO ++ ++ +] [+ CALL LIGHTS ++ CALL LOG + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | (SUBROUTINE)| | ++ ++ | | #0007 LD %Q0001 | #0008 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00001 | #0009 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00003 | | << RUNG 8 STEP #0010 >> | | AUTO ++ +]/[+ CALL MANUAL + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | ++ | | #0010 LD NOT %Q0001 | #0011 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00004 | | << RUNG 9 STEP #0012 >> | | AUTO ++ +] [+ CALL GENIUS + | | (SUBROUTINE)| | ++ | | #0012 LD %Q0001 | #0013 FUNC 90 CALLSUB | P1: 00005 | |[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] | | #0014 END OF PROGRAM |

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

Block: _MAIN

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-43

011593

16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

GGGG EEEEE G E G GGG EEEE G G E GGG EEEEE

FFFFF F FFF F F

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

U U U U

U CCCC U C U C U C UUU CCCC

AAA A A AAAAA A A A A

U U U U

U TTTTT OOO U T O O U T O O U T O O UUU T OOO

M M MM MM M M M M M M M

AAA TTTTT IIIII OOO A A T I O O AAAAA T I O O A A T I O O A A T IIIII OOO

N N NN N N N N N NN N N

(******************************************************************************) (* *) (* Program: DEMO30 *) (* *) (* PLC PROGRAM ENVIRONMENT HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): 512 INPUT: %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): 512 OUTPUT: %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): 1024 INTERNAL: %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): 1280 GLOBAL DATA: NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): 256 TEMPORARY: NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): 2048 REGISTER: %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): 128 ANALOG INPUT: NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): 64 ANALOG OUTPUT: NONE *) (* *) (* PROGRAM SIZE (BYTES): 848 *) (* *) (* *) (******************************************************************************)

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

9-44

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

011593

16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

(******************************************************************************) (* *) (* BLOCK: LIGHTS *) (* *) (* *) (* BLOCK SIZE (BYTES): 151 *) (* DECLARATIONS (ENTRIES): 2 *) (* *) (* *) (* HIGHEST REFERENCE USED *) (* *) (* *) (* INPUT (%I): %I0200 *) (* OUTPUT (%Q): %Q0010 *) (* INTERNAL (%M): %M0001 *) (* GLOBAL DATA (%G): NONE *) (* TEMPORARY (%T): NONE *) (* REGISTER (%R): %R0002 *) (* ANALOG INPUT (%AI): NONE *) (* ANALOG OUTPUT (%AQ): NONE *) (* *) (******************************************************************************)

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

Block: LIGHTS

(SUBR 01)

GFK-0466L

Chapter 9 Print Functions

9-45

011593

16:24 GE FANUC SERIES 9030/9020 DOCUMENTATION (v4.00)

Page

|[ START LD SUBROUTINE LIGHTS ] | |[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ] | |[ START OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC ] | |(* COMMENT *) | | << RUNG 4 STEP #0002 >> | |%M0001 SFT_RT ++ +] []/[+ SHL_| | | WORD| | | | | %R0001 +IN B2+ | | LEN | | |00001| | CONST +N Q+%R0002 | 00001 | | |ALW_ON | | +]/[+B1 | | ++ | | << RUNG 5 STEP #0006 >> | | LASTBIT SFT_RT +] [(SM) | |[ END OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC ] |

Program: DEMO30

D:\ACME\CONVEYOR\DEMO30

Block: LIGHTS

(SUBR 01)

9-46

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10
Section
1 2

section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

The I/ O configuration function is used to specify the mapping of logical references used by the user program to the physical I/ O modules. This chapter contains the following sections: Title
DefaultConfiguration Displaying the I/O ConfigurationRack Screen Configuring the CPU Selecting the Base Rack Configuring the Model 211 CPU Configuring a Micro PLC Configuring90-30I/O Modules Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC Configuring a PCM Module

Description
Explains how to use the default I/O configuration provided by the PLC. Explains how to display the rack screen, copy a configuration from one slot to another, change or delete the configuration of a slot, move a configuration to another slot, and save the configuration to disk. Explains how to configure the CPU module. Explains how to select the base rack and expansion racks. Explains I/O configuration for the Model 211 CPU are added to the Series 90-20 base. Explains how to configure a Micro PLC. Explains how to configure 90-30 I/O modules. Explains how to configure the HSC module to function as four 16-bit counters, two 32-bit counters, or as one 32-bit differential counter. Explains how to configure the PCM as one CCM port, two independent CCM ports, one CCM port and one BASIC application having one port, or one BASIC application using one or both serial ports. Explains how to configure a TCP/IP Ethernet Module. Explains how to configure a Communications Module in RTU ONLY, RTU/CCM, or CCM/RTU mode. Explains how to configure both a one-axis and two-axisAPM. Explains how to configure the ADC module. Explains how to configure the module to transfer global data to and from the PLC. Explains how to configure the Genius Bus Controller. Explains how to configure the High Density Analog Output module. Explains how to configure the Analog Combo module. Explains how to configure third-party modules. Explains how to use the Reference View table to display a list of configured modules with the same user reference (%I, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %R, or %G).

Page
10-2 10-4

3 4 5 6 7 8

10-9 10-26 10-31 10-36 10-45 10-50

10-57

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19

ConfiguringaTCP/IP Ethernet Module Configuring a CMM Module Configuring an APM Module Configuring an ADC Module Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM Configuring a GBC Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module Configuring an Analog Combo Module Configuring a ThirdParty Module Configuration Reference View

10-63 10-67 10-73 10-82 10-83 10-88 10-90

10-94 10-99 10-101

GFK-0466L

10-1

10

Section 1: Default Configuration


When the PLC is first powered up or configuration is cleared, a default I/O configuration is created. The default I/O configuration is based on the I/O modules installed in the system. If you are satisfied with the default configuration, no further configuration is required. The PCM, CMM, and ADC modules are included in the default configuration. All other smart modules (HSC, APM, etc.) are not included and must be manually configured using the Logicmaster 90 I/O configuration function. For those users who want their system configured differently from the default (additional I/O modules, different I/O references, etc.), system configuration can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 I/O configuration function, described in the following sections of this chapter. If you edit the default I/O configuration or create a new one and store it to the PLC, it will replace the default configuration; and the PLC will not automatically configure itself again until the configuration is cleared. The PLC will automatically configure the system based on the I/O modules installed according to the following table. This table shows how I/O references are assigned to each slot in the PLC. The 5-slot Model 311 or 313 PLC will have I/O addresses assigned to every slot. The 10-slot Model 311 or 313 PLC will have discrete I/O addresses assigned to each slot, but slots 9 and 10 will not be assigned analog I/O addresses. The Model 331 and higher PLCs will have analog and discrete addresses assigned to 15 of its slots (rack 0, slot 2 to rack 1, slot 6).

Table 10-1. Default I/O Configuration


Rack Slot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Discrete Input
%I001-032 %I033-064 %I065-096 %I097-128 %I129-160 %I161-192 %I193-224 %I225-256 %I257-288 %I289-320 %I321-352 %I353-384 %I385-416 %I417-448 %I449-480 %I481-512

Discrete Output
%Q001-032 %Q033-064 %Q065-096 %Q097-128 %Q129-160 %Q161-192 %Q193-224 %Q225-256 %Q257-288 %Q289-320 %Q321-352 %Q353-384 %Q385-416 %Q417-448 %Q449-480 %Q481-512

Analog Input
%AI001-008 %AI009-016 %AI017-024 %AI025-032 %AI033-040 %AI041-048 %AI049-056 %AI057-064 %AI065-072 %AI073-080 %AI081-088 %AI089-096 %AI097-104 %AI105-112 %AI113-120 %AI121-128

Analog Output
%AQ001-004 %AQ005-008 %AQ009-012 %AQ013-016 %AQ017-020 %AQ021-024 %AQ025-028 %AQ029-032 %AQ033-036 %AQ037-040 %AQ041-044 %AQ045-048 %AQ049-052 %AQ053-056 %AQ057-060 %AQ061-064

Notes
This slot not configured in Model 331 or 341.

Last slot in 5-slot Model 311 or 313.

Last slot to receive analog configuration in the 10-slot Model 323. Last slot in 10-slot Model 323.

Last slot in Model 331 or higher.

10-2

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
You may view the current configuration by loading the configuration from the PLC to the programmer. (Refer to Chapter 8, Program Utilities, for more information about loading configuration from the PLC to the programmer.) The configuration can then be viewed from the I/O configuration function and can be printed using the configuration print function. The PLC remains in default configuration mode until a configuration that is entered or modified by the Logicmaster 90-30/ 20/ Micro configuration software is stored to the PLC. Only the CPU parameters (baud rate, parity, etc.) may be changed without taking the PLC out of default configuration mode. To put the PLC back into default configuration mode so that it will automatically configure the system, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Clear (F5) from the Program Utility Functions menu to clear the configuration. Verify that the selection for configuration is set to Y (Yes). If you do not want to clear the ladder logic program or reference tables for that program, enter N (No) for program logic or reference tables. Press the Enter key to begin the clear function. Once the clear operation has begun, it cannot be aborted. When the operation is complete, the software displays the message Clear complete.

The PLC will now automatically configure the system using the default I/O configuration shown in table 10-1. 5. Press the Load function key (F1) to load the configuration.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-3

10

Section 2: Displaying the I/O Configuration Rack Screen


When I/O (F1) is selected from the Configuration Software main menu, the I/O Configuration Rack screen, similar to the one shown below, is displayed. The following example represents a sample Series 90-30 PLC Model 331 system.

The rack shown above is divided into 11 slots. The first slot on the left is labeled PS at the top and always contains the power supply. The remaining slots are numbered 1 through 10. The CPU module always occupies slot 1 of rack 0. The remaining slots may contain any Series 90-30 I/O module, Genius Communications Module, Axis Positioning Module, or Programmable Coprocessor Module. Model 331 and higher CPUs can have expansion racks. Up to four subsystem racks are allowed (up to seven subsystem racks in a 351 CPU). The main CPU rack is rack 0, and expansion racks are numbered 1 through 7. (All five racks default to be 10-slot racks.) The size of each rack can be changed on an individual rack basis by pressing Rack Selection (F5) and selecting the desired rack. This allows a mixture of 5-slot and 10-slot racks in a Series 90-30 PLC configuration. The Up/Down cursor movement keys and Page Up/Down keys are used to move between racks in ascending or descending order, respectively.

10-4

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Both the 5-slot and 10-slot racks of the Model 311 PLC and the Model 313 PLC are one-rack systems. Moving from rack to rack is not allowed. The following example represents a sample 10-slot rack of the Model 311 PLC. Notice that on Models 311, 321, 323, and 313, Slot 1 can be used for I/O.

The following example represents a sample 5-slot rack of the Model 311 PLC.

The cursor position on the I/O Configuration Rack screen is indicated by having the slot highlighted in reverse video. Upon entering the Rack screen, the Power Supply slot is shown in reverse video. Use the Left or Right cursor keys to move the cursor from one slot to the next. To display another rack, use the Next and Previous page keys or the Up and Down cursor keys.
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-5

10
The rack screen presents an overview perspective of the Series 90-30 PLC system. Function Key
F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F8 F10

Function
M30I/O Genius Power Supply Rack Selection Communications Other Zoom

Description
Add Model 30 I/O modules. Add a Genius Communications Module. Add the power supply. If the power supply already exists, press Zoom (F10) to configure it. Change the rack selection. Add a Communications Module. Add other modules (e.g., PCM, ADC). Display the current configuration of a slot.

Configuration Validation
CONFIG VALID is displayed in the lower right corner of each display screen after the configuration is successfully validated. When CONFIG INVALID is indicated, the file may not be stored to the PLC. The most common cause of the CONFIG INVALID status is fatal overlaps among %I or %AI references. A warning occurs when non-fatal overlaps occur; however, the configuration is still valid. Non-fatal overlaps are most likely to occur between references other than those described for fatal overlaps.

Copying Configuration from Slot to Slot


To copy configuration from slot to slot: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Position the cursor on the first module and press Zoom (F10) to display the slot configuration screen. Configure the module. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack screen shown above. With the cursor on that slot, press Copy (Shift-F2). Move the cursor to another slot and press the Enter key. You can repeat this as many times as needed. As each module is entered, its reference address is set to the next highest available address. If the limit for the reference address has been reached, the copy function will adjust the modules reference address to the maximum allowed. Each copy after the maximum reference address has been reached will result in an address overlap. 6. 7. When finished copying, exit copy mode by pressing the Escape key. The software displays the message Copy Mode Ended. For each copy, press Zoom (F10) to display the detail screen. Edit the reference address (if required) and other characteristics as needed.
GFK-0466L

10-6

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

10
Changing the Configuration of a Slot
Replacing the Module with Another of the Same Type
To change the configuration of a slot by replacing the module with another of the same type: 1. 2. 3. Place the cursor at the slot to be changed. Press Zoom (F10) to display the modules detail screen. Use one of the function keys to select a new module type for the slot. With the list of available modules displayed, move the cursor to the correct module and press the Enter key. Then, enter Y (Yes) after the prompt REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N). Complete the configuration; then press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display.

4.

Replacing the Module with One of a Different Type


To change the configuration of a slot by replacing the module with one of a different type: 1. 2. 3. 4. Place the cursor at the slot to be changed. Press the function key that represents the type of module you want to place in the slot. After confirming the deletion of the existing module, the module selection screen is displayed. Complete the configuration; then, press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display.

Deleting the Configuration of a Module


To delete the configuration of a module: 1. Place the cursor on the module and press Delete (Shift-F4). Enter Y (Yes) after prompt DELETE displayed module from slot ? (Y/N). The configuration of the slot will be deleted. To return the configuration to the slot, press Undelete (Shift-F5).

2.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-7

10
Moving a Module to Another Slot
To move the configuration of a module to another slot: 1. With the cursor at the configuration to be moved, press Delete (Shift-F4). Enter Y (Yes) after prompt DELETE displayed module from slot ? (Y/N). The configuration of the slot will be deleted. Move the cursor to the new location; it may be in another rack. Press Undelete (Shift-F5). The deleted configuration will appear in the new location. The reference address will not be affected.

2. 3.

Saving the Configuration to Disk


The configuration is automatically saved to a file on disk during the configuration process:

D D D

When module data has been changed within a rack, and that new data is moved from that rack to another rack or when you cursor to a new rack. When module data has been changed within a rack, and then the Escape key is pressed to return to the Configuration Software main menu. When module data has been changed and Reference View (Shift-F3) is pressed.

The configuration may also be written to disk at any time by pressing ALT-U to update the disk.

10-8

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 3: Configuring the CPU


To configure the CPU module: 1. Model 331 or higher CPUs must be located in slot 1 of rack 0. Move the cursor to this slot by pressing the cursor movement keys. (Note that the Model 331 CPU is used in the following screens.)

2.

Press Zoom (F10) to display the CPU detail screen:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-9

10
Parameter
I/OScan-Stop Power-Up Mode

Description
Indicates whether the I/O is to be scanned while the PLC is in STOP mode. Choices are YES or NO*. Indicates which state the PLC is to be powered up in. Choices are RUN, STOP , or LAST*. LAST indicates that the PLC will power up in the same mode it powered down in. Generally, RUN is more suitable for a production system. Indicates whether the program logic is stored in RAM*, or in an additional, optional PROM (select PROM for an EEPROM you have installed). Indicates whether the source of registers is RAM* or PROM. Indicates whether passwords are ENABLED* or DISABLED. Transmission rate in bits per second. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of parity bits added to each word. Choices are ODD*, EVEN, or NONE. Generally , use ODD for direct or multi-drop or None for modem connection. Communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower communication uses two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Modem turnaround delay time counts. 1 count = 1/100 second. Choices are 0 to 255 (default = 0). Use zero (0) for direct connection, or 2 to 10 for modems (larger for radio modem). Maximum communication idle time from 1 to 60 seconds (default = 10 seconds). The number of words of user program to be applied to the checksum function per sweep. Choices are 0 through 32, inclusive. Sweep mode can be either NORMAL SWEEP mode (NORMAL*) or CONSTANT SWEEP mode (CNST SWP). To change the settings, tap the Down Arrow key till the cursor rests in the Sweep Mode: parameter. Then press the Tab key to change the selection from NORMAL to CNST SWP (if necessaryif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep, it may already say CNST SWP). Then tap the Down Arrow key once to move the cursor to the Sweep Tmr parameter and enter the number of milliseconds (from 5 to 2005 to 500 for 351 CPUs) that you want. To store the changes to the folder, press the Escape key twice. Then store the configuration to the PLC and switch the PLC into RUN mode for this change to take effect. This Sweep Mode adjustment is different from the Active Constant Sweep which can be edited only in RUN mode. Refer to the Standard Sweep Mode Variations section of chapter 2 in the Series90-30/20/MicroReferenceManual (GFK-0467) and page 5-19 and following of this manual for a discussion of these two types of Constant Sweep Mode. In NORMAL SWEEP mode, the PLC sweep executes as fast as possible. The overall PLC sweep time depends on the logic program plus the time required to compute the checksum. In CONSTANT SWEEP mode, the overall PLC sweep time is fixed. A byte value which can be configured, in 1 millisecond increments, to be any value from 5 to 200 ms. 5 to 500 for 351 CPUs. Default = 100. Note: The sweep timer is not configurable when the sweep mode is NORMAL. In this mode, the timer is set to N/A (Not Applicable), and you cannot cursor to the Sweep Timer field. (For use with SFC programming) Timer faults indicate whether or not a fault will be logged in the PLC Fault Table when a steps time is either outside its maximum or minimum limit. Default = Disabled.

Logic From Registers Passwords Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time Checksum Words Sweep Mode

Sweep Timer

Tmr Faults

* Default selection. For configuration of the Run/Stop switch on 351 and 352 CPUs, refer to the Run/StopSwitchConfiguration (351 and 352 CPS) section on page 10-17. For configuration of Port 1 and Port 2 on 351/2 CPUs, refer to the Port Configuration for 351 and 352 CPUs section on page 10-18.

10-10

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Caution
In order to re-enable passwords once they have been disabled, PLC memory may be cleared with an HHP , or for certain models (see below) there are MEM CLR pads on the board. The HHP needs to be connected. Then power off the PLC. Then hold both the <CLR> and < M/T> keys down while powering the PLC back up. If you do not have an HHP , call the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline (1-800-828-5747) for assistance. MEM CLR pad exist on the following models: CPU331Z and CPU331-AA and later All 350 AND 352 CPUs CPU351-EH and later All 360 and higher CPUs If your CPU has MEM CLR pads, follow these steps: REMOVE THE CPU FROM THE BACKPLANE. REMOVE ANY AUXILARY BATTERIES. Place a small metal screwdriver across the pads for at least 15 seconds to clear all PLC memory. NOTE: To prevent physical damage to the PLC, you MUST remove the CPU from the backplane and remove any attached batteries.

Note
The MEM CLR pads are located on the back of 331, 351 and 352 CPUs. Once you remove the CPU from the backplane, you will be able to see the pads (labeled MEM CLR). For 350 CPUs and all 360 series CPUs, the MEM CLR pads are located on the front, about one inch below the key switch. To remove the front shroud, insert a small screwdriver into one of the two slots on either side of the unit above the key switch and gently push in. This will release the top, and you can use the same technique to release the bottom of the shroud. 3. Use the Tab key and Back Tab key (Shift-Tab) to scroll through the selections for each parameter displayed on this screen. For help selecting the parameters, press ALT-H.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-11

10
4. When a value has been selected for each parameter, press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules.

5. 6.

Position the cursor on the catalog number for the Model 331 CPU (IC693CPU331), and press the Enter key. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display.

10-12

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Selecting a Different CPU Module Note
If you configure a newly-released CPU using Release 4 or later of Logicmaster 90-30/20 software, you cannot use this configuration with an earlier release of the programming software. That is to say, if you configure a CPU with a recent release of the software, use the same release (or later) for programming. In addition, a port configuration error can occur if try to configure the ports of a pre-Release 7 351 CPU with a Release 7 or later version of Logicmaster (see page 10-18). 1. To select a different CPU module, move the cursor to the catalog number for the desired CPU type and press the Enter key. Then, enter Y (Yes) after the prompt REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N). For example, to configure a 10-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU, move the cursor to the entry for that module (IC693CPU321) and press the Enter key. 2. If any modules (e.g., intelligent modules) that are not supported by the 10-slot rack have been configured, the following error message is displayed:
Selected CPU does not support all currently configured modules

3. 4. 5.

Press the Escape key twice, once to zoom out of the list of catalog numbers and a second time to zoom out of the CPU detail screen back to rack 0. Use the delete function to delete modules which are not supported. Then, press Zoom (F10) to return to the list of catalog numbers. Position the cursor once more on the catalog number for the 10-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU (IC693CPU321), and press the Enter key. Then, press the Escape key twice to return to the Rack Configuration screen shown below.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-13

10
6. Press Zoom (F10) to display the Power Supply/CPU screen.

7.

Then, press Zoom (F10) again to display the CPU detail screen.

8. 9.

Press the Escape key once to return to the detail screen. Press the Escape key again to save the module configuration and return to the rack display. Or, to configure the 5-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU, press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules.
GFK-0466L

10-14

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

10
10. Move the cursor to the entry for the 5-slot rack (IC693CPU311), and press the Enter key. Then, enter Y (Yes) after the prompt REPLACE displayed module ? (Y/N).

Since no boards had been configured in slots 6 through 10, the change from a 10-slot rack to a 5-slot rack is allowed. However, if boards had been configured in any of slots 6 through 10, the following error message would be displayed:
Slots greater than 5 will be lost, Continue REPLACE? (Y/N)

If Y (Yes) is entered, the system will automatically delete slots 6 through 10 before changing the CPU module.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-15

10
11. Press Zoom (F10) and then CPU (F1) to display the CPU detail screen for the 5-slot rack for the Model 311 CPU.

Use the Tab key and Back Tab key (Shift-Tab) to select a value for each parameter displayed on this screen. 12. Then, press the Escape key twice to display the Rack Configuration screen. 13. Press Zoom (F10) twice and then press CPU (F1) to display the list of catalog numbers and modules.

14. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the Model 311 CPU (IC693CPU311), and press the Enter key. 15. Press the Escape key to return to the rack display.
10-16 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
Note
If you install and configure a 350 and higher CPU and use folders you created previously, you will be prompted to convert the folder to one that uses the code written for the higher CPUs.

Run/Stop Switch Configuration (350 and higher CPUs)


The configuration screens for CPU models 350 and higher have two extra parameters, one of them being R/S Switch, on the first page of their configuration screens as shown below:

The R/S Switch parameter enables or disables the RUN/STOP Key Switch functionality available in 351 and 352 CPUs. With this field enabled, you can switch the PLC into Stop mode or from Stop mode into Run mode (Release 7 or later), and clear faults (Release 7 or later). Whether or not the R/S Switch parameter is enabled, the Key Switch always functions as a Flash memory protection switch. For more information about the operation of the Key Switch, refer to the Key Switch on 350 and 360 CPUs: Change Mode and Flash Protect section of Chapter 2, System Operation, in the Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK-0467).

The Key Switch can also be used to protect configuration and user program memory and overrides in Release 8 and later CPUs. Refer to the next page for information about this feature.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-17

10
Memor y Protection Configuration for 350 and Higher CPUs
The configuration screens for 350 and higher CPUs have two extra parameters, one of them being Mem Protect, on the first page of their configuration screens as on the previous page. If you change the Mem Protect field from its default state to ENABLED, then the Key Switch can provide memory protection as well. Once ENABLED, when the Key Switch is ON (i.e., in vertical position), two types of memory protection occur:

D D

User program and configuration cannot be modified. Force and override of point data is not allowed.

To change the Mem Protect field to ENABLED, move the cursor down to the Mem Protect field and press Tab.

Note
This enhanced memory protection feature is available only on Release 8 or later 350 and higher CPUs. Also, please note that you can change the Time-of-Day clock while protection is on using Logicmaster (refer to page 11-3), but not with the Hand-Held Programmer.

Port Configuration for 351, 352, and 363 CPUs


The Release 7 and later 351, 352, and 363 CPUs have configurable communication ports. After you have configured the standard information and the Run/StopKey Switch discussed previously, press the PgDn key to display the following configuration screen:

Within each field except SNP ID, you can press the Tab key to toggle through the valid choices.
10-18 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
Note
The port configuration requires a Release 7 or later 351 or 352 CPU, or a Release 9 or later 363 CPU. You will receive an error if you attempt to store this configuration to a pre-Release 7 CPU. This screen did not exist in earlier Logicmaster releases; therefore, you have to have Release 7 or later of Logicmaster to fully utilize this functionality.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-19

10

Parameter
Port 1 Mode

Field Definitions and Values


The mode of communication being used for Port 1: SNP , CCM, RTU, CUSTOM, DISABLED NOTE: The CUSTOM setting provides a way of configuring communications for a generic text output to facilitate communications to third-party modules. Refer to the Series 90 -30Programmable ControllerInstallationManual (GFK-0356) for additional information.

Default
SNP

Port 2 Mode

The mode of communication being used for Port 1: SNP , CCM, RTU, CUSTOM, DISABLED See NOTE for Port 1 Mode. Displays the type of access for SNP access: SLAVE, MASTER Defines the data rate for serial communication: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 Type of flow control to be used on the port: HARDW ARE, NONE Specifies the parity used in serial communication. The default parity is Odd. Parity selection can be changed to Even or None if required for communication over modems or with a different SNP master device. Valid choices are NONE, ODD, EVEN. Most serial communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower devices use two stop bits. Valid choices are 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits Length of timeouts used on the port: LONG, MEDIUM, SHORT, NONE Turnaround delay time to be used on the port: 0 to 250 ms This is an identifier that distinguishes this device from others on the same network. Note that for devices that use an SNP ID of 1, enter 49 decimal (31 hexadecimal).

SNP

SNP Mode Data Rate Flow Control Parity

SLA VE 19200 NONE ODD

Stop Bits

1 stop bit

Timeout TurnA (Turnaround) Delay SNP ID (Device Identifier) (7 bytes in length) *

LONG NONE NULL

* For Release 6.5 and 6.6, only the first six bytes are used. For Release 7 and later, the first seven bytes are used.

Note
For additional information about configuration of 351, 352, and 363 CPUs, refer to the Series 90 -30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual, GFK-0356.

10-20

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs
The configuration screens for the 364 CPU have two extra pages used for configuring the TCP/IP Ethernet communications for this CPU. After you select the 364 CPU, the first page you see is the same as that for the 350 and higher CPUs as shown in the discussion of configuration of the Run-Stop switch on page 10-17. When you press the PgDn key for the additional configurations, you will see a screen that looks like this:

Ethernet Parameters for the 364 CPU


Configuration Mode: This is currently fixed as TCP/IP. Status Address: The Status Reference Type is the location of the LAN Interface Status
(LIS) bits (16 bits) and the Channel Status bits (64 bits). The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Status bits. The Status address can be assigned to %I, %Q, %R, %AI or %AQ memory. The default value is the next available %I address.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP Address, and Name Server IP Address: These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network (the network administrator). TCP/IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters. It is important that these parameters are correct; otherwise, the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and/or network operation may be corrupted. It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address.
However, if you have no network administrator and are using a simple isolated network with no gateways, you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses: 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3 10.0.0.255
GFK-0466L

First PLC Second PLC Third PLC PLC Programmer TCP or host
10-21

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10
Also, in this case, set the subnet mask, gateway IP address, and name server IP address to 0.0.0.0.

Note
If the isolated network is ever connected to another network, the IP addresses 10.0.0.1 through 10.0.0.255 must not be used and the subnet mask, gateway IP address, and name server IP address must be assigned by the networkadministrator. The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network. Refer to Chapter 5, Network Administration Support, for more information on addressing. See also the section Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used in Procedure 4.

Note
Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten.

Status Length: This is the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits. This value is
automatically set to either 80 bits (for %I and %Q Status address locations) or 5 words (for %R, %AI, and %AQ Status address locations).

Network Time Sync SNTP: Selection of the method used to synchronize the Ethernet
clocks over the network. Press the Tab key to choose from possible choices. Currently the choices are DISABLED (for no network time synchronization) and ENABLED (for synchronization to broadcast/multicast mode (mode 5) SNTP servers on the network).

10-22

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

After you have configured the IP address, press PgDn to configure the parameters on the following screen:

Refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for Series 90 PLCs manual (GFK-1541) for information about the parameters shown on this screen. All TCP/IP Ethernet configuration information for this CPU is discussed in that manual.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-23

10
User-Configurable Memory Limits for 351 and Higher CPUs
After you have done the standard configuration on a 351 and higher CPU, you can change the default memory limit for %AI, %AQ, and %R references. To change these defaults, from the CPU part of I/O configuration, press the Escape key (usually twice) till you see CPU as the F2 selection. Then press F2. Your screen should look similar to this:

Then press F4 (memlim) to go to the PLC Memory Configuration screen:

NOTE: Asterisks (*****) only apear when the programmer is offline. For CPU models that support this feature, the three Size fields under %AI, %AQ, and %R can be edited. Just type the value in each field. By default, the cursor will be on the
10-24 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
%AI field. Press the arrow keys to go to the %AQ and %R fields and type the value you want in each, then press the Escape key to save your changes. The following guidelines and restrictions apply: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The user-configurable memory is supported only for the 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364 CPUs . Only the %AI, %AQ, and %R references are user-configurable. Adjustments must be in increments of 128 words except for the default of %R (9999 words). The default settings are %AI (2048 words) ; %AQ (512 words) ; %R (9999 words). The following maximum and minimum limitations apply: Maximum of 8192 for %AI and %AQ for Release 9.02 Logicmaster Maximum of 16384 for %R for Release 9.02 Logicmaster Minimum of 128 for each editable reference type (%AI, %AQ, and %R)

D D D

Note
If you are installing a version of Logicmaster later than Release 9.02, check the IPI for increased maximum limits.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-25

10

Section 4: Selecting the Base Rack


The Model 331 and higher CPUs are the non-backplane-mounted CPUs for the Series 90-30 PLC. These model CPUs are plug-in modules, which can be removed from the baseplate. These model CPUs can have expansion racks. Up to five subsystem racks are allowed. The main CPU rack is rack 0, and expansion racks are numbered 1 through 4 (8 in a 351 system). (All racks default to be 10-slot racks.) The size of each rack can be changed on an individual rack basis, allowing a mixture of 5-slot and 10-slot racks in a Series 90-30 PLC configuration. The Up/Down cursor keys and Page Up/Down keys are used to move between racks in ascending or descending order, respectively. 1. Initially, a 10-slot rack is displayed, as shown below for the Model 331 PLC.

10-26

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
2. When Rack Selection (F5) is pressed from any slot of rack 0 of a 5-slot 10-slot Model 331 CPU, a list of catalog numbers and racks is displayed:

If the Escape key or ALT-A (Abort) is pressed while this list is displayed, the rack screen is redisplayed. 3. Position the cursor on the catalog number of the desired rack, and press the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-27

10
4. When switching from a 10-slot rack to a 5-slot rack, a validation check is performed to see if there are any configured modules in slots 6 through 10. If there are, the following message is displayed:
Slots greater than 5 will be lost, continue REPLACE ? (Y/N)

If N (No) is entered, the current rack will remain displayed. If Y (Yes) is entered, the system will automatically delete slots 6 through 10 before changing the rack size. The 5-slot rack appears as shown below:

When changing the rack selection, note these rules:

D D D D D D

The rack cursor will always be displayed on the Power Supply module after a successful rack change. Selecting the catalog number of the same size rack currently configured does not change the display. When a rack switch is made, the modules will have the same slot location they had in the previous rack. Rack 0, as well as any expansion rack, can be configured to be a 5-slot rack. When switching from a 5-slot rack to a 10-slot rack, no validation check is performed. When a previously configured 10-slot rack is changed to a 5-slot rack and then back to a 10-slot rack, the modules initially configured for the 10-slot rack are not restored.

10-28

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Base Rack Power Supply
The base rack power supply is automatically configured when the Model 331 or 341 CPU is selected. The Power Supply (F4) function cannot be used to change the base rack (rack 0) power supply. You must first press Zoom (F10) to zoom into the power supply, and then press Power Supply (F1) to change the base rack (rack 0) power supply.

Selecting an Expansion Rack


Expansion rack catalog numbers are different from the base rack catalog numbers for a Model 331 or higher CPU subsystem. When Rack Selection (F5) is pressed from any slot of rack 1 of a subsystem rack, a list of catalog numbers and expansion racks is displayed.

Note
The I/O bus of the base rack is extended to the I/O bus of expansion racks via an I/O bus expansion cable.

To select an expansion rack (for example, the 5-slot expansion rack), position the cursor on the catalog number for that rack (for this example, IC693CHS398), and press the Enter key.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-29

10
The following rack is displayed if a 10-slot expansion rack with no modules is switched to a 5-slot expansion rack.

Note
No power supply is configured until an I/O module is configured or the Power Supply (F4) key is used to select one.

10-30

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 5: Configuring the Model 211 CPU


The I/O configuration of the CPU 211 is similar to the configuration of a 5-slot CPU 311, which has been configured with a power supply, CPU, generic discrete input, generic discrete output, and High Speed Counter modules. The reference address assignments for the CPU 211 I/O are fixed. No rack screen is displayed for the 211 PLC. 1. Press CPU (F1) to display a list of catalog numbers and modules. Cursor to the desired CPU catalog number, and press the Enter key to select a new CPU. If a Series 90-30 CPU rack is currently displayed, cursor to the CPU slot and press Zoom (F10).

When the CPU 211 detail screen is first entered, the active field is the I/OCatalog Number field. This field is used for the catalog number of the I/O base. (Refer to the information below for configuring the I/O base.) A. If a different CPU is selected, the screen will display the detail for that CPU. If the new CPU is a CPU 211, the detail screen will be displayed and the active field will be the I/O Catalog Number field. B. If the active field is the CPU Catalog Number field, you may enter a new catalog number or edit the current catalog number. You cannot, however, leave this field unless it has a valid entry.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-31

10
2. The CPU Parameter fields may be edited, as described in the following tables. Parameter
I/OScan-Stop Power-Up Mode

Description
Indicates whether the I/O is to be scanned while the PLC is in STOP mode. Choices are YES or NO*. Indicates which state the PLC is to be powered up in. Choices are RUN, STOP , or LAST*. LAST indicates that the PLC will power up in the same mode it powered down in. Indicates whether the program logic is stored in RAM*, or in an additional, optional EEPROM . Indicates whether the source of registers is RAM* or EEPROM. Indicates whether passwords are ENABLED* or DISABLED. Transmission rate in bits per second. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of parity bits added to each word. Choices are ODD*, EVEN, or NONE. Communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower communication uses two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Modem turnaround delay time counts. 1 count = 1/100 second. Choices are 0 to 255 (default = 0). Maximum communication idle time from 1 to 60 seconds. (Default = 10 seconds) The number of words of user program to be checksummed per sweep. Choices are 0 through 32, inclusive. Sweep mode can be either NORMAL SWEEP mode (NORMAL*) or CONSTANT SWEEP mode (CNST SWP). To change the settings, tap the Down Cursor Movement key (or Down Arrow key) till the cursor rests in the Sweep Mode: parameter. Then press the Tab key to change the selection from NORMAL to CNST SWP (if necessaryif you are just changing the time of the Constant Sweep, it may already say CNST SWP). Then tap the Down Arrow key once to move the cursor to the Sweep Tmr parameter and enter the number of milliseconds (from 5 to 200) that you want. To store the changes to the folder, press the Escape key twice. Then store the configuration to the PLC and switch the PLC into RUN mode for this change to take effect. In NORMAL SWEEP mode, the PLC sweep executes as fast as possible. The overall PLC sweep time depends on the logic program plus the time required to compute the checksum. In CONSTANT SWEEP mode, the overall PLC sweep time is fixed. A byte value which can be configured (in 1 millisecond increments) to be any value from 5 to 200 ms. (Default = 100) Note: The sweep timer is not configurable when the sweep mode is NORMAL. In this mode, the timer is set to N/A (Not Applicable), and you cannot cursor to the Sweep Timer field.

Logic From Registers Passwords Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time Checksum Words Sweep Mode

Sweep Timer

* Default selection.

10-32

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
I/O Base Selection for the CPU 211
1. The I/O Base (F2) softkey is used to select a new I/O base for the CPU 211. This key is only displayed after the CPU 211 has been selected.

2.

Currently, there are three base modules available (IC692MAA541, IC692MDR541, and IC692MDR741). With the list of catalog numbers and modules displayed, cursor to the desired base and press the Enter key to select a new I/O base. The I/O base must be selected before a configuration can be saved or the I/O Catalog # field can be left.

Note
View Only Parameters are not editable; therefore, you cannot cursor to them.
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-33

10
3. When a program is loaded from the PLC, if the module ID for each base configured in the system is within the range of 0 to 31 but does not match one of the three I/O bases displayed in the previous screen, the GENERICBASE shown below is displayed. The module ID for GENERICBASE (GENERIC 16 IN/12 OUT POWER SUPPLY) is 31.

Refer to section 8, Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC, on page 10-50 for an explanation of the parameters and values displayed on this screen.

10-34

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
4. The module ID for UNKNOWNBASE (UNKNOWN/UNSUPPORTED I/O BASE) is 32. If the module ID received from the PLC for the I/O base module is greater than 31, the UNKNOWNBASE base is displayed.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-35

10

Section 6: Configuring a Micro PLC


A Micro PLC has the CPU, power supply, a high speed counter (except for the AC IN / AC OUT models), inputs and outputs all built into one small device. You can configure the Micro with Logicmaster by following the steps shown below, but also refer to the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065) and the Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller Self-Teach Manual (GFK-1104A or later) for additional information.

To configure a Micro PLC, follow these steps: 1. Press the Micro softkey (Shift-F1) from the Logicmaster 90-30 Main Menu (i.e., the first screen you see after entering Logicmaster). This highlights the word Micro at the top of the Logicmaster display showing you that it is selected. Press the Config softkey (F2). After a short pause (during which the Logicmaster copyright screen appears), your screen display will change to one similar to the one shown below.

2.

3.

Type the name you want to call your new folder. (In the example shown above, micro was used.) Then press Enter. Logicmaster will then ask you if you want to create new folder? Type Y for Yes. Your screen will look like the one shown below.

10-36

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

4.

Press the I/O softkey (F1). The following screen will appear.

5.

If the Micro you are installing has the same Catalog # as the default selection, then skip to step 7 discussed on the next page. If the Micro you are installing does not have the same Catalog # as the default selection, then press the CPU softkey (F1). The following screen will appear.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-37

10

Note
Step 6 is only necessary if the Micro you are installing does not have the same Catalog # as the default selection. 6. Move the cursor up or down using the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys to the correct selection. (When scrolling through the list, you may notice that other options include switching to a 90-20 or a 90-30.) When you have your cursor on the correct Catalog #, press Enter which will take you back to the screen shown on the top of this page.

Note

Refer to Chapter 4, Configuration, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065) for parameter descriptions for each of the following screen. 7. On the screen shown above, you can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the
GFK-0466L

10-38

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

10
available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). From this screen, press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.

Notes:

A. %AQ reference addresses will display for DC OUT models only. B. The High Speed Counter screens will not appear for AC IN / AC OUT models (since they do not
have High Speed Counters).

Note
If you are configuring the HSC (high speed counter) mode B1 3, A4, move the cursor to the Ctr Types field, then press the Tab key once to toggle the default selection to B1 3, A4. Counters B1 3 are then configured on one screen, A4 on another, pressing the Page Down key to advance screens. 8. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). From this screen, press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-39

10
Note
Additional fields, PWM Out %Q1 and Pul Out %Q2, will display on DC OUT models. This applies to all of the following screens. 9. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). From this screen, press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.

Note
For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter, refer to Chapter 6, High Speed Counters, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065)for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later.

10-40

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
10. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). From this screen, press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.

Note
For detailed parameter descriptions, refer to Chapter 4, Configuration, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065)for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter, refer to Chapter 6, High Speed Counters, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065)for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-41

10
11. Use the same techniques to set up this screen as the previous ones; i.e., you can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). From this screen, press the Page Down key to take you to the screen shown below.

12. After you have set up the final counter, press the Escape key to save your configuration. This will also return you to the main menu of the Configurator package.

Expansion Units for the Micro PLC


For 28-point Micro PLCs, you can configure expansion units (up to 4 expansion units per Micro PLC). Refer to Chapter 4, Configuration, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065)for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later. For parameter and other detailed configuration information about the High Speed Counter, refer to Chapter 6, High Speed Counters, in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Controller Users Manual (GFK-1065)for newer models refer to GFK-1065D or later.

10-42

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Micro PLC Memory Configuration Limits
Memory Type
%R %AI %AQ %I %Q %G %M %T %S

Memory Limit
256 words 128 words 128 words 512 bits 512 bits 1280 bits 1024 bits 256 bits 128 bits

Note
These limits are specific to Micro PLCs.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-43

10
Configuration Rules and Miscellaneous Information
1. When replacing the CPU (not a CPU211) of a non-default configuration with a SERIES 90 Micro, the additional prompt, Existing I/O Configuration will be lost, Continue REPLACE ? (Y/N) will be displayed. Confirming the prompt will cause the replacement to occur; otherwise, the replacement will not occur. 2. When replacing a CPU211 with a SERIES 90 Micro, no additional prompts will be displayed. 3. When replacing a SERIES 90 Micro with another CPU (not a CPU211), the resulting configuration will consist of the following: (1) a PS in rack 0, slot 0; (2) the new CPU in rack 0, slot 1; (3) an 8-pt. Discrete Input module in rack 0, slot 2; (4) an 8-pt Discrete Output module in rack 0, slot 3, (5) a 9030 HSC in rack 0, slot 4, and (6) all other racks unconfigured. 4. If you select the MICRO softkey from the Logicmaster 90 main menu and then select an existing folder that contained either a 9030 or the 9020 configuration, then that existing configuration will be displayed when the I/O softkey is pressed from the Configurator main menu. 5. If you select either the 90-20 or 90-30 softkey from the Logicmaster 90 main menu and then select an existing folder that contained a SERIES 90 Micro configuration, then that existing configuration will be displayed when the I/O softkey is pressed from the Configurator main menu.

10-44

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 7: Configuring 90-30 I/O Modules


To configure a 90-30 I/O module: 1. Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located and press Module 30 I/O(F1).

2.

Select the module type by pressing the corresponding function key listed below. Function Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7

Module Type
d in d out d mix a in a out a mix other

Description
Discrete input module. Discrete output module. Discrete mixed module. Analog input module. Analog output module. Analogmixed module Other modules if available (see Note below)

Note
Other module types are currently unavailable. This key is reserved for possible future use. Press ALT-H to display help information for further explanations.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-45

10
3. The next screen lists the catalog numbers and available modules of the type you selected. For example, when F1 is pressed, the following screen is displayed.

4. 5.

Select a module by moving the cursor down to any entry. Additional entries may be displayed by pressing the Page Down key. Then, press the Enter key. Move the cursor to the modules reference address. The next highest available reference address is automatically configured. If you want to use a different reference address, enter it here. For a discrete module, the reference address must begin on a byte boundary. (A byte boundary is a reference address which is a multiple of 8 + 1; e.g., 1, 9, 17, or 25.) The software will automatically adjust an incorrect entry to begin on a byte boundary. A message is displayed when the highest available address has been assigned.

6.

Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display.

Note
12-point modules do not use consecutive address bits in PLC memory, but they use bits 1 through 6 and 9 through 14. For example, if %Q0001 is assigned to a 12-point output module, %Q0001 through %Q0006 and %Q0009 through %Q0014 will be associated with the output point.

10-46

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Configuring Generic I/O Modules
If a specific catalog number does not exist for a particular module, the configuration can assign a generic reference address to that module. The following table lists the catalog numbers to be used to configure modules generically and the function key that would be pressed in order to select a particular generic module.

Table 10-2. Generic I/O Module Configuration


Generic Catalog Number
INPUT8 INPUT16 INPUT32 INPUT64 OUTPUT5/8 OUTPUT12/26 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT64 ALGIN4 ALGOUT2 ALGOUT4 INOUT8 INOUT16 INOUT32 INOUT64

Generic Description
Generic Input 8 PT Generic Input 16 PT Generic Input 32 PT Generic Input 64 PT Generic Output 5/8 PT Generic Output 12/16 PT Generic Output 32 PT Generic Output 64 PT Generic Input Analog 4 CH Generic Output Analog 2 CH Generic Output Analog 4 CH Generic Input/Output 8 PT Generic Input/Output 16 PT Generic Input/Output 32 PT Generic Input/Output 64 PT

Function Key
F1 (d in)

F2 (d out)

F4 (a in) F5 (a out) F3 (d mix)

Note
Do not configure Horner Electric analog or special modules as Generic. Configure them as Foreign (third party) module so that the required soft switch configuration data can be entered. For information about configuring a third party module, refer to page 10-99.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-47

10
Configuring an I/O Link Interface Module
The Fanuc I/O link modules are grouped under the discrete mixed modules. To configure a Fanuc I/O link module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Press Module 30 I/O (F1) and then Discrete Mixed (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and discrete mixed modules.

3.

Position the cursor on the catalog number, IC693BEM320, and press the Enter key. The following detail screen is displayed.

On this screen, the choices for the I/O address size are 32 and 64. The default value is 64.
10-48 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
4. If you select 32 as the reference size, the module will occupy 32 discrete inputs and 32 discrete output points. This is the same as if you select the catalog number INOUT32 for the Generic Input/Output 32-Point Module.

5.

If you select 64 as the reference size, the module will occupy 64 discrete inputs and 64 discrete output points. This is the same as if you select the catalog number INOUT64 for the Generic Input/Output 64-Point Module.

Configuring an I/O Link Master Module


Complete configuration instructions along with parameter descriptions for this module are in Chapter 3, Configuration, of the Series 90-30 I/O Link Master Module manual (GFK-0823A or later).
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-49

10

Section 8: Configuring an HSC or Embedded HSC


The Series 90-30 High Speed Counter module may be configured to count either up or down, to count both up and down, or to count the difference between two changing values. The module is configured for the application to function in one of three ways:

D D D

As four 16-bit counters. Each of the four counters may independently count either up or down. This module configuration is referred to as Type A. Each Type A counter has 3 inputs and 1 output. As two 32-bit counters. Each may independently operate in UP/DOWN, PULSE/DIRECTION, or A QUAD B mode. This configuration is referred to as T ype B. Each Type B counter has 6 inputs and 2 outputs. As one 32-bit differential counter, which can operate in UP/DOWN, PULSE/DIRECTION, or A QUAD B mode. This configuration is suitable for applications requiring motion control, differential counting, or homing capability. This counter uses all 12 of the modules inputs and all 4 outputs.

For more information on the High Speed Counter module, refer to GFK-0293. The High Speed Counter module accepts 12 configurable input signals, and provides 4 output signals for counter operations. Many additional features can be changed in the configuration software for the application program. To configure the High Speed Counter module: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located. Press Other (F8) and then High Speed Counter (F2) to locate a High Speed Counter Module in the slot.

10-50

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
3. Press the Enter key to enter the catalog number shown in reverse video. After pressing the Enter key, the following screen is displayed. This screen displays the module configuration parameters for a Type A counter.

Parameter
Counter Type Control/Status

Description
Select the desired counter type by entering A*, B, or C; or,press the Tab key. Select the %QI reference location for discrete input data that the High Speed Counter Module sends to the PLC, and discrete output data that the PLC sends to the HSC Module. The length of the discrete data is fixed at 16 bits (2 bytes). Discrete input data consists of status information, such as output status, strobe input status, preload input status, home input status (for type C), and module ready status. Discrete output data consists of control information, such as output enable/ disable,strobeenable/disable,counterenable/disable,preloadenable/disable, clear error, and home command (for type C).

HSC Data

Failure Mode Oscillator Input

Select the %AI reference location for data sent to the PLC by the HSC module. The length of the data is fixed at 15 words. HSC Data consists of accumulated counts, strobe register contents, and the counter per timebase value. Enter a value to select an output failure mode. Choices are NORMAL*, FORCEOFF , and HOLDLAST . This field allows the use of an internal oscillator reference in place of one count input. The base value is 660 Khz. The reference is divisible by a 16-bit value (refer to the Oscillator Divider explained below). Choices are ON or OFF*. ON selects the input to be used as an oscillator reference; OFF selects the input to be used as a counter input. Select the 16-bit value that is divided into 660 Khz in order to achieve the final reference frequency. This value is only used if the Oscillator Input field above is set to ON. This field identifies the Counter Input Filter. This field identifies the Counter Preload Filter.

Oscillator Divider Count Filter Preload Filter


* Default selection.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-51

10
4. Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for Type A Counter 1. Repeatedly press the Page Down key to scroll through the detail screen for each counter and then return to the main detail screen for a Type A counter. Press the Page Up key to display the detail screen for Type A Counter 4 and then scroll through the counters in reverse order.

Parameter
Count Mode Count Direction Time Base Strobe Edge High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset
* Default selection.

Description
Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting. Select the count direction for the type A counter. Choices are UP* or DOWN. Select the counts per time base (0 to +65,535). (Default = 1000) Specify the positive (POS*) or negative (NEG) edge active for the strobe input. Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 32,767) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-32,768 to +32,767*). Select the output off accumulator value (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0)

10-52

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
5. To change from a Type A to Type B counter, press the Tab key with the cursor positioned on the Counter Type field on the main detail screen for the Type A counter. When B is displayed in this field, press the Enter key. This example screen lists the module configuration parameters for a Type B counter.

6.

Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for Type B Counter 1. Repeatedly press the Page Down or Page Up key to scroll through the detail screen for each counter and then return to the main detail screen for the Type B counter.

Note
Because there are two 32-bit counters, there will be two screens similar to these example screens.
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-53

10

Parameter
Count Mode Count Signal Time Base Strobe Edge High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset
* Default selection.

Description
Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting. For Type B or C counter, select how each counter s signals will be used. Choices are UP/DN, PULS/DIR*, or AQUADB. Select the counts per time base (0 to +65,535). (Default = 1000) Specify the positive or negative edge active for the strobe input. Choices are POS* or NEG. Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). (Default = +8,388,607) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). (Default = +8,388,607) Select the output off accumulator value (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). (Default = 0)

Note
The Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be validated so that low limit is less than or equal to the high limit. 7. To change from a Type B to Type C counter, press the Tab key with the cursor positioned on the Counter Type field on the main detail screen for the Type B counter. When C is displayed in this field, press the Enter key. This example screen lists the module configuration parameters for a Type C counter.

10-54

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
8. Press the Page Down key to display the detail screen for a Type C counter. Press the Page Down key to return to the main detail screen for the module.

The configurable parameters on this screen are as described previously for the Type B counter. Use these detail screens to configure the features of the High Speed Counter module.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-55

10
Configuring the Embedded HSC for a CPU 211
The High Speed Counter module for a CPU 211 can only be a Type A counter.

The HSC module may be configured after paging down from the CPU 211 detail screen. Additional HSC parameters may be configured, as described in the following table. Parameter
Count Enable Count Direction Count Mode Preload/Strobe Preload Filter Count Filter Failure Mode Time Base High Limit Low Limit Preload Value On Preset Off Preset
* Default selection.

Description
Enable or disable the counter. Choices are ENABLE or DISABLE*. Select the count direction for the module. Choices are UP* or DOWN. Select continuous (CONTINU*) or single-shot (SINGSHOT) counting. Select PRELOAD* or STROBE SELECT. Select HIFREQ or LOFREQ*. Select HIFREQ or LOFREQ*. Choices are HOLDLAST , NORMAL*, or FORCEOFF . Select the counts per time base (0 to +65,535). (Default = 1000) Select the highest value for the count accumulator (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = +32,767) Select the lowest value for the count accumulator (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0) Select the accumulator preload value (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0) Select the output on accumulator value (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = +32,767) Select the output off accumulator value (-32,768 to +32,767). (Default = 0)

10-56

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 9: Configuring a PCM Module


The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) combines the function of a Communications Module and the ASCII/BASIC Module into a single module. It may be configured to behave as one CCM port, two independent CCM ports, one CCM port and one BASIC application having one port, or one BASIC application using one or both serial ports. The following modes of configuration are available: Mode
PCM CFG PROG PRT CCM ONLY PROG/CCM CCM/PROG BASIC BAS/CCM

Description
All configuration data for the PCM is located in the User Configuration Data File (UCDF), created and loaded to the PCM using PCOP . Select Programmer Port mode. Select CCM on both ports 1 and 2. Select port 1 for programmer connection and port 2 for CCM. Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for the programmer. Select both ports 1 and 2 for BASIC. Select port 1 for BASIC configuration and port 2 for CCM.

Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the following modules:

D PCM with 160 KB memory module. D PCM (multiple mode) with 192 KB memory module. D PCM (multiple mode) with 640 KB memory module.
Available modes for each module are listed below: Module Type Mode
PCM CFG PROG PRT CCM ONLY PROG/CCM CCM/PROG BASIC BAS/CCM

160K PCM
Yes Yes Yes * Yes * Yes * Yes Yes

192K PCM
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

640K PCM
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

* The interface for port 2 is fixed at RS-485 for the 160K modules.

For more information on the PCM, refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software Users Manual, GFK-0255.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-57

10
Configuring a PCM
To configure a PCM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured.

2.

Press Other (F8) and then PCM (F1) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and modules.

3.

Position the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select, and press the Enter key. The module detail screen for the module you selected will be displayed.
GFK-0466L

10-58

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

10
Selecting the Configuration Mode
The configuration mode is selected in the Configuration Mode field on the module detail screen. (The module detail screen is displayed by positioning the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select and pressing the Enter key.) 1. To select a different configuration mode, move the cursor to the Configuration Mode field and repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired mode is displayed on the screen. Then, press the Enter key. Complete the detail screen for the desired configuration mode, and press the Enter key. For help selecting parameters, press ALT-H.

2.

PCM CFG Mode


When PCM CFG mode is selected, the following PCM detail screen is displayed.

In this screen, the configuration mode is set to PCM CFG for the PCM Configuration Data File mode. This mode uses the User Configuration Data (UCDF) that was loaded into a user module named UCDF in the PCMs battery-backed RAM memory. (The UCDF is created using PCOP software.) The configuration data is used for building the configuration of the PCM during the power-up sequence, initializing available hardware on the PCM and specifying the user or system tasks to be started. For more information, refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software Users Manual, GFK-0255.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-59

10
PROG PRT Mode
When PROG PRT (Programmer Port) mode is selected, the following PCM detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to PROG PRT. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE*, SOFTWARE, or NONE. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE*, EVEN, or ODD. Number of stop bits for the port. Choices are 1* or 2. Number of bits per character for data transfer on the port. Choices are 7 or 8*.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Stop Bits Bits per Character
* Default selection.

10-60

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
CCM ONLY Mode
When CCM ONLY mode is selected, the following PCM detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode Battery Required CCM Enable CCM Mode Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. Specify whether a battery is required. Choices are YES* or NO. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as a CCM port. Choices are YES* or NO. This parameter displays the availability of ports for CCM access. Choices are SLAVE*, PEER, or MASTER. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, EVEN, or ODD*. Retry counts for CCM mode. Choices are NORMAL* or SHORT . Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Address of the port on a multi-drop network. This value is used to calculate the backoff delay upon an inquiry collision in PEER mode. The range of values allowed in this field is 1* to 254.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Retry Count Timeout Turnaround Delay CPU ID

* Default selection.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-61

10
PROG/CCM Mode
PROG/CCM mode selects port 1 as the programmer port and port 2 for CCM. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for PROG PRT mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.

CCM/PROG Mode
CCM/PROG mode selects port 1 for CCM and port 2 as the programmer port. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for PROG PRT mode.

BASIC Mode
BASIC mode selects BASIC configuration for both ports 1 and 2. The parameters for ports 1 and 2 are the same as for PROG PRT mode.

BAS/CCM Mode
BAS/CCM mode selects BASIC configuration for port 1 and CCM for port 2. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for PROG PRT mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.

10-62

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 10: Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module


Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the TCP/IP Ethernet Module. For details about the TCP/IP Ethernet Module, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084).

Use the information in this section in conjunction with the Procedure 2: Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90-30 Configuration Software section of chapter 2 of the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084).

Configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet Module


To configure a TCP/IP Ethernet Module on the I/O Configuration rack screen, do the following: 1. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured.

2.

Press the Communications softkey, i.e., Comm (F6). Your screen display will change to the one shown on the following page.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-63

10

3.

Press ethnet (F2). Your screen display will change to the one shown below.

4.

Press Enter to select the Ethernet Controller. You will then see the screen shown on the following page.

10-64

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

For detailed information about this screen, refer to the first two pages of the Procedure 2: Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90-30 Configuration Software section of chapter 2 of the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC manual (GFK-1084).

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-65

10
5. After you have assigned the IP address, etc., press Page Down to display the following screen.

Parameter
Data Rate Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Turnaround Delay Timeout
* Default selection.

Description
Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, EVEN, or ODD*. Enter the number of stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE.

6.

Press the Escape key to return to the rack display. Press Escape again to save the configuration.

10-66

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 11: Configuring a CMM Module

Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software provides configuration support of the CMM Communications Module (multiple mode) with 32 KB. The following modes of configuration are available: Mode
CCM ONLY CCM/R TU RTU/CCM RTU ONLY SNP ONLY SNP/CCM CCM/SNP SNP/R TU RTU/SNP

Description
Select CCM on both ports 1 and 2. Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for RTU. Select port 1 for RTU and port 2 for CCM. Select RTU on both ports 1 and 2. Select SNP on both ports 1 and 2. Select port 1 for SNP and port 2 for CCM. Select port 1 for CCM and port 2 for SNP . Select port 1 for SNP and port 2 for RTU. Select port 1 for RTU and port 2 for SNP .

For more information on the CMM, refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software Users Manual (GFK-0255) and the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Users Manual (GFK-0582).

Configuring a CMM
To configure a CMM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-67

10
2. Press Communications (F6) and then Serial (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number of the CCM/RTU module.

3.

Position the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select, and press the Enter key. The module detail screen for the module you selected will be displayed.

Selecting the Configuration Mode


The configuration mode is selected in the Configuration Mode field on the module detail screen. (The module detail screen is displayed by positioning the cursor on the catalog number for the module you wish to select and pressing the Enter key.) 1. To select a different configuration mode, move the cursor to the Configuration Mode field and repeatedly press the Tab key until the desired mode is displayed on the screen. Then, press the Enter key. Complete the detail screen for the desired configuration mode, and press the Enter key. For help selecting parameters, press ALT-H.

2.

10-68

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
CCM ONLY Mode
When CCM ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode Battery Required CCM Enable CCM Mode Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. Specify whether a battery is required. Choices are YES* or NO. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as a CCM port. Choices are YES* or NO. This parameter displays the availability of ports for CCM access. Choices are SLAVE*, PEER, or MASTER. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, EVEN, or ODD*. Retry counts for CCM mode. Choices are NORMAL* or SHORT . Length of timeouts used for CCM on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Address of the port on a multi-drop network. This value is used to calculate the backoff delay upon an inquiry collision in PEER mode. The range of values allowed in this field is 1* to 254.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Retry Count Timeout Turnaround Delay CPU ID

* Default selection.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-69

10
RTU ONLY Mode
When RTU ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode RTU Enable Interface

Description
The configuration mode is set to CCM ONLY. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as an RTU port. Choices are YES* or NO. The interface parameter for port 1 can only be RS-232; port 2 of the 192K and 640K modules may have an interface value of either RS-232* or RS-485. The interface parameter is not used or displayed for the 160K module. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are HARDWARE or NONE*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, ODD*, or EVEN. Enter a value from 1* to 247.

Data Rate Flow Control Parity Station Address


* Default selection.

CCM/RTU Mode
CCM/RTU mode selects port 1 for CCM and port for RTU. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for RTU ONLY mode.

RTU/CCM Mode
RTU/CCM mode selects port 1 for RTU and port 2 for CCM. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for RTU ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.
10-70 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
SNP ONLY Mode
When SNP ONLY mode is selected, the following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
ConfigurationMode SNP Enable SNP Mode Interface Data Rate Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Turnaround Delay Timeout
* Default selection.

Description
The configuration mode is set to SNP ONLY. Specify whether the port is to be configured for use as an SNP port. Choices are YES* or NO. This parameter displays the availability of ports for SNP access. Choices are SLAVE* or MASTER. The interface parameter can be RS-232* or RS-485. Data rate (bits per second or bps) for the port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Type of parity to be used on the port. Choices are NONE, ODD*, or EVEN. Most serial communication uses at least one stop bit. Slower devices use two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Type of flow control to be used on the port. Choices are NONE* or HARDWARE. Turnaround delay time to be used for CCM on the port. Choices are NONE*, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. Length of timeouts used for SNP on the port. Choices are LONG*, MEDIUM, SHORT , or NONE.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-71

10
SNP/CCM Mode
SNP/CCM mode selects port 1 for SNP and port 2 for CCM. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for SNP ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for CCM ONLY mode.

CCM/SNP Mode
CCM/SNP mode selects port 1 for CCM and port 2 for SNP . The parameters for port 1 are the same as for CCM ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for SNP ONLY mode.

SNP/RTU Mode
SNP/RTU mode selects port 1 for SNP and port 2 for RTU. The parameters for port 1 are the same as for SNP ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for RTU ONLY mode.

RTU/SNP Mode
RTU/SNP mode selects port 1 for RTU and port 2 for SNP . The parameters for port 1 are the same as for RTU ONLY mode; and for port 2, the parameters are the same as for SNP ONLY mode.

10-72

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 12: Configuring a Motion Product (Formerly Configuring an APM)

The motion control products are intelligent, fully-programmable, one or two-axis positioning controller integrated into the Series 90-30 PLC system. The Motion Mate APM is an intelligent, fully-programmable, one or two-axis positioning controller. You must have a Release 3.52 or later CPU module in order to configure a slot in the I/O rack for a Motion Mate APM300. The Digital Servo Interface module also requires a 3.52 or later CPU. The Motion Mate DSM302 requires a 6.50 or later CPU. For more information on this family of products, refer to GFK-0707 and GFK-0664. To configure a single axis Motion Mate APM on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either configured or previously unconfigured. Press Other (F8) and then motion (F5) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number of the APM.

Note
The instructions on the following pages describe how to configure a slot in the I/O rack for a single axis Motion Mate APM. These instructions also apply to the two-axis Motion Mate APM as well. The only difference is in the catalog number you select (IC693APU302 for the two-axis Motion Mate APM instead of IC693APU301 for the single axis Motion Mate APM).
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-73

10
Configuring a Single Axis Motion Mate APM
To configure a single axis Motion Mate APM: 1. Position the cursor on the catalog number for the single axis Motion Mate APM (IC693APU301), and press the Enter key. The following detail screen is displayed.

Parameter
Reference Address Reference Address Reference Address

Description
The starting address for the %I user reference. Default= %I0001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 32 bits. The starting address for the %Q user reference. Default= %Q0001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 32 bits. The starting address for the %AI user reference. Default = %AI001 or the next highest available address. For the single axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 15 words. For the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 28 words. The starting address for the %AQ user reference. Default = %AQ001 or the next highest available address. For both the single axis Motion Mate APM, and the two-axis Motion Mate APM, the reference length is fixed at 6 words. If DISABLED*, the command position is displayed in the %AI table. If ENABLED, the position error is displayed in the %AI table.

Reference Address %AI Position Error

10-74

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Parameter
Feedback Type

Description
ENCODER* selects A quad B (x4) incremental encoder input mode. LINEAR selects Temposonics linear transducer (absolute feedback) input mode. RESOLVER selects single or multiple resolver (absolute feedback) input mode. CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 configure the Motion Mate APM inputs for special applications. STANDARD* selects the normal Motion Mate APM motion control loop. The STANDARD loop provides a velocity command output proportional to position error, with optional velocity feed forward and integrator gain terms. CUSTOM loops are individually designed for special applications. For the two-axis Motion Mate APM, FOLLOWER selects a control loop which allows ratio tracking of a master input with zero following error. Transmission rate (in bits per second or bps) of data through the SNP port. Choices are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200*. Parity is indicated by an ODD* or EVEN number of bits, or whether no parity bit (NONE) is added to the word. Number of stop bits. Most serial communications use one stop bit. Slower devices may use two stop bits. Choices are 1* or 2. Number of data bits. Specify whether the CPU recognizes 7 or 8* bit words. The time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request. Values are 0* to 2550, in multiples of 10 milliseconds. Maximum link idle time. The time the module should wait for the next message to be received from the communicating device before it believes that the program device has failed and proceeds to its base state. Values are 1 to 60 seconds. (Default = 10 seconds) The identification number of the SNP port. Messages for the module are sent to this address. (Default = A00001) Defines the Servo Interface Type (Analog or Digital), i.e., the type of command outputrefer to GFK-0781 or GFK-0840 for details. GE Fanuc Motor Typerefer to GFK-0781 or GFK-0840 for details.

Control Loop

Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Modem Turnaround Time Idle Time

SNP ID Servo Cmd Motor Type


* Default selection.

2.

Press the Page Down key to display the following detail screen:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-75

10

Parameter
User Units

Description
Scale factor which allows the APM to be programmed in units appropriate for the application. The ratio of user units to counts must be in the range 32:1 to 1:32. Values are 1* to +65,535. Scale factor which allows the APM to be programmed in units appropriate for the application. The ratio of user units to counts must be in the range 32:1 to 1:32. Values are 1* to +65,535. Specify whether the APM uses the hardware overtravel limit switch inputs (CTL05 and CTL06 for axis 1; CTL07 and CTL08 for axis 2). If ENABLED, then 10 - 30 VDC must be applied to the inputs in order for the APM to operate. Values are ENABLED* or DISABLED. If the APM is commanded to go to a position greater than the positive EOT, an error will result and the APM will not allow axis motion. Values are -8,388,608 to +8,388,607* user units. If the APM is commanded to go to a position less than the negative EOT, an error will result and the APM will not allow axis motion. Values are 0 to -8,388,608* user units. The maximum position error (Commanded Position Actual Position)allowed when the APM is controlling a servo. This parameter should normally be set to a value 10 to 20 percent higher than the highest position error encountered under normal servo operations. Range = 256* (user units / counts) <= POS ERR LIM <= 60,000* (user units / counts). (Default = 4096) When the servo position error is within this value and no motion is commanded, the IN ZONE status bit is set. This parameter also determines the position error at which PMOVEs are considered to be complete. Range = 0 to 2000. (Default = 10) The desired servo position loop time constant (in milliseconds). The lower the value, the faster the systems response. Values which are too low will cause system instability and oscillation. For accurate tracking of the commanded velocity profile, the position loop time constant should be 1/4 to 1/2 of the minimum system deceleration time. The time will not be accurate unless the velocity at 10V value is set correctly. Values are 20 to +32,767 ms. (Default = 1000) Actual servo velocity (in user units per second) for an APM velocity command output of 10V. This value must be configured correctly in order for the position loop time constant and the velocity feedforward gain percent factor to be accurate. The APMs FORCE D/A OUTPUT %AQ immediate command and the ACTUAL VELOCITY %AI return data can be used to determine the proper configuration value. Values are 100 to +8,388,607. (Default = 4000) The percentage of commanded velocity that is added to the APM velocity command output. Increasing this parameter causes the servo to operate with faster response and reduced position error. Values are 0* to 100 percent; optimum values are 80 to 90 percent. The velocity at 10V value must be set correctly for proper operation of the velocity feedforward gain factor. Values should be 5 to 10 times the position loop time constant setting. Servo instability will result if the integrator time constant is set too low. When the integrator mode is set to CONTINUOUS, deceleration times must be 5 to 10 times longer than the integrator time constant setting or servo overshoot will occur. Setting the time constant to zero turns off the integrator. (Default = 0) Operating mode for the position error integrator. OFF* means that the integrator is not used. CONTINU means the integrator runs continuously, even during servo motion. IN ZONE means the integrator only runs when the servo is at rest.

Counts

Overtravel Limit Switch

Positive Software End of Travel Limit Negative Software End of Travel Limit Position Error Limit

In Position Zone

Position Loop Time Constant

Velocity at 10V

Velocity Feedforward Gain

Integrator Time Constant (inmilliseconds)

Integrator Mode

10-76

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
Parameter
Reversal Compensation Servo Drive Disable Delay

Description
A compensation factor which allows the servo to reverse direction and still provide accurate positioning in systems containing backlash. Values are 0* to +255. The time delay (in milliseconds) from zero velocity command to the drive enable output switching off. Disable delay is effective when the ENABLE DRIVE %I bit is turned off or certain error conditions occur. This time delay should be longer than the deceleration time of the servo from maximum speed. Values are 0 to +32,767 ms. (Default = 100)

* Default selection.

3.

Press the Page Down key again to display this detail screen:

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-77

10

Parameter
Jog Velocity Jog Acceleration Rate Jog Acceleration Mode

Description
The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo moves during a jog operation. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 1000) The acceleration rate (in user units per second) used during jog, find home, move at velocity, and abort operations. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 10000) The acceleration mode for jog, find home, move at velocity, and abort operations. LINEAR* causes commanded velocity to change linearly with time. SCURVE causes commanded velocity to change more slowly than the linear mode at the beginning and end of acceleration intervals. This field is reserved for future use. This field is reserved for future use. When the axis is moving in the positive direction and this value is reached, actual position will roll over to the low count limit. (Default = 8,388,607) When the axis is moving in the negative direction and this value is reached, actual position will roll over to the high count limit. (Default = -8,388,607) The value (in user units) assigned to actual position at the end of a find home cycle. Values are -8,388,608 to +8,388,607. (Default = 0) The offset (in user units) of the servo final stopping point at the completion of a find home cycle. Home offset adjusts the final servo stopping point relative to the encoder marker. Values are -32,768 to +32,767. (Default = 0) The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo seeks the final home switch transition and encoder marker pulse at the end of a find home cycle. Final home velocity must be slow enough to allow a 5 millisecond delay between the final home switch transition and the encoder marker pulse. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 500) The velocity (in user units per second) at which the servo seeks the initial home switch transitions during the find home cycle. If desired, find home velocity can be set to a high value to allow the servo to quickly locate the home switch. Values are 0 to +8,388,607. (Default = 2000) Select HOMESW if a home switch input is used as part of the find home cycle. Select MOVE+ or MOVE- for a unidirectional home cycle which does not use the home switch input.

DataInit1 DataInit2 High Count Limit

Low Count Limit

Home Position Home Position Offset

Final Home Velocity

Find Home Velocity

Home Mode

* Default selection.

10-78

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
4. If you press the Page Down key again, the following screen is displayed.

This screen, and subsequent screens like this, enable you to specify a small set of instructions to be downloaded to the APM upon initialization. (Note the change of function softkey assignments on these screens.) The following table defines these instructions; subsequent tables provide more detailed information about each instruction. Command
NULL CMOVE PMOVE VELOC ACCEL WAIT LOAD-P DWELL BLOCK

Description
The Null command causes no action. The Continuous Move (data = user units) command causes servo motion without requiring the servo to stop in order for the next command to execute. The Positioning Move (data = user units) command causes the servo t come to rest and be in zone before executing the next command. The velocity (in user units per second) for subsequent CMOVE and PMOVE commands. The acceleration rate (in user units per second) for subsequent CMOVE and PMOVEcommands. The Wait for Discrete Input command causes the APM to wait for a bit number (1 12) to be set before executing the next command. The Load Parameter command loads the specified parameter data into one of the 20 parameter registers. The Dwell command causes a delay equal to the dwell time (in milliseconds) before execution of the next command. The Block Number command assigns the specified block number to subsequent commands. The block number is reported in the APM %AI input data. The Jump command causes program execution to transfer to the specified block number. The Jump can be unconditional (always occurs) or conditional (occurs when the specified CTL bit is set). For a conditional Jump, the CTL bit is tested when the Jump command is first encountered. If the CTL bit is not set, testing of the bit will occur every 2 milliseconds during subsequent PMOVE, CMOVE, or Dwell commands. Testing continues until the CTL bit is set or a subsequent Block number command is encountered in the motion program.

JUMP

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-79

10

Field
Data Command

Description
This field contains either a 24-bit signed integer or the number of an APM register if the command has a -P extension. A legal APM command. For configuration, the legal commands are listed below. (NULL): Do nothing. BLOCK: Define block number. Values are 1 to +65,635. (Default = 1) LOC : D D The following commands have a value range from -8,388,608 to +8,388,607. When the -P suffix is used on the command, however, the maximum data value is 255. (Default = 1) (A -1 placed at the end of the command indicates that the command is for axis 1; a -2 indicates axis 2.) CMOVE-AL: Regular move, absolute, linear. CMOVE-AS: C O E AS: Regular move, absolute, s-curve. C O E AS P: Regular move, absolute, s-curve, use data in APM register. CMOVE-AS-P: CMOVE-IL: Regular move, incremental, linear. CMOVE-IL-P: Regular move, incremental, linear, use data in APM register. CMOVE-IS: Regular move, incremental, s-curve. CMOVE-IS-P: Regular move, incremental, s-curve, use data in APM register. P O E AL: PMOVE-AL: Positioning move, absolute, linear. PMOVE-AL-P: Positioning move, absolute, linear, use data in APM register. PMOVE-AS: Positioning move, absolute, s-curve. P O E AS P: Positioning move, absolute, s-curve, PMOVE-AS-P: use data in APM register. PMOVE-IL: Positioning move, incremental, linear. P O E IL P: Positioning move, incremental, linear, use data in APM register. PMOVE-IL-P: PMOVE-IS: Positioning move, incremental, s-curve PMOVE-IS-P: Positioning move, incremental s-curve, use data in APM register. The following commands have a value range of 1 to 98,388,607. When the -P suffix is used on the command, however, the maximum data value is 255. (Axis 1 = -1 1; Axis 2 = -2 2) VELOC: VELOC-P: Set velocity. (Default = 2000) Set velocity to data in APM register. (Default = 1)

The following commands have a value range of 1 to 134,217,727. When the -P suffix is used on the command, however, the maximum data value is 255. (Axis 1 = -1 1; Axis 2 = -2 2) ACCEL: ACCEL-P: WAIT: Set acceleration. (Default = 5000) Set acceleration to data in APM register. (Default = 1)

Wait for some bit to go high before moving. Values are 1, 2, 4, 16, etc. (Default = 1) The following Th w commands have h a value range from -8,388,608 to +8,388,607 8 388 607. (Default D = 0) LOAD-P01: LOAD P : LOAD P : LOAD-P02: LOAD-P20: Load APM p parameter register number 1. Load APM p parameter register number 2. 2

Load APM parameter register number 20.

The following commands have a value range from 0 to +65,535. When the -P suffix is used on the command, however, the maximum data value is 255. (Axis 1 = -1; Axis 2 = -2) DWELL: DWELL P: DWELL-P Wait X milliseconds. Default = 0) Wait X milliseconds, where wh X is the h value of the h APM register. (Default = 1)

Axis Number

If an entry other than one of the legal commands listed above is made, Logicmaster 90-30/90-20 software will display the error message, Incorrect data entry. The axis number may be 1, 2, or N/A (Not Applicable).

10-80

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
5. Using the list of commands above, enter the command in the Command field, or use the function softkeys to select a command. To use the softkeys, move the cursor to the appropriate command field and press the softkey for the desired command. In the following example, CMOVE (F2) was pressed.

6.

If there is more than one type of command for a particular command (e.g., CMOVE), use the Tab key to move through the various selections. In the example, CMOVE-AL is the default for the CMOVE (F2) softkey. When F2 is initially pressed, CMOVE-AL is displayed. To select another CMOVE command in this field, press the Tab key to display CMOVE-AL-P , CMOVE-AS, CMOVE-AS-P , CMOVE-IL, CMOVE-IL-P , CMOVE-IS, and CMOVE-IS-P , in order. When you press Load (F7) for the LOAD command, LOAD-P01 is initially displayed. To change the APM register number, press the Tab key. The display will change from LOAD-P01 to LOAD-P02 ..... LOAD-Pn (where n is the parameter register number). This eliminates having to make an entry in the Data field for the LOAD command. If a value is entered into the data register for the LOAD command, it is simply ignored. The other commands do not support the Tab key. If the Tab key is pressed, an Inactive Key error message is displayed and the key is ignored. In addition, the Tab key will also generate an Inactive Key error message if it is pressed in the Data field.

7.

8.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-81

10

Section 13: Configuring an ADC Module


The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) Module is used with the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS software for developing user screens and graphic displays. The CIMPLICITY 90-ADS system is a character-based operator interface generator system for use with the Series 90-30 PLC. For more information on this module, refer to the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Users Manual, GFK-0499. To configure this module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Press Other (F8) and then Operator Interface (F4) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the catalog number for the module.

3.

With the cursor positioned on IC693ADC311, press the Enter key.

10-82

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 14: Configuring a GCM or Enhanced GCM


The Genius Communications Module provides the means for configuring global data to and from the Series 90-30 programmable controller. To configure the Genius Communications Module: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the correct slot. Press Genius (F2) and then GCM (F2) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display a list of catalog numbers and modules.

3.

Then press F2 (genius). The following screen will appear.

4.

Press F2 (gcm) and then press the Enter key to select it. The following screen will appear.
10-83

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10
5. With the cursor positioned on IC693CMM301, press the Enter key to display the detail screen for the Genius Communications Module.

6.

Complete the detail screen, using the definitions provided in the following table, and press the Enter key again. Field Description
Specifies the serial bus address from where the outgoing global data is sent. The valid range for this field is 16 to 23, inclusive. By specifying one bus address as output, the other seven serial bus addresses, by default, receive incoming global data. Selections for the baud rate include 153K STD, 76.8K, 38.4K, and 153K EXT . The global references are fixed fields, referring to the address associated with each of the eight serial bus addresses 16 through 23. Each Length field represents the amount of data transferred to or from the corresponding serial bus address, in units of bits. The length value, when added to the fixed starting address, must not exceed %G256, the maximum allowable global data reference.

From Address

Baud Rate Length

The table below states the allowable values for each length, validated at the time of entry. Bus Address
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Starting Address
%G001 %G033 %G065 %G097 %G129 %G161 %G193 %G225

Valid Lengths
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 256 224 192 160 128 96 64 32

10-84

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
If one field is increased beyond the default of 32 bits, the next field(s) must be decreased to avoid overlapping addresses. For example, if 64 bits is specified for serial bus address 16, the data transmitted from this node maps to %G001 to %G064. Therefore, a length of 0 must be assigned to serial bus address 17. The Length fields will be automatically adjusted so that overlapping %G addresses are not possible.

Enhanced Genius Communications Module Note


Beginning with Release 4.5, the I/O configuration is no longer limited to two Enhanced Genius Communications Modules. The number of Enhanced GCM modules that can be configured is now limited only by the following:

D D

The presence of a Genius Communications Module. If a GCM module is already configured, an Enhanced GCM module cannot be configured. The maximum configuration size of the PLC. If the references assigned to the Enhanced GCM Modules causes the I/O configuration size to exceed the maximum allowed, then the configuration cannot be stored to the PLC.

1.

To configure an Enhanced Genius Communications Module, position the cursor on IC693CMM302 in the catalog list of modules, and press the Enter key. The following detail screen will be displayed.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-85

10
2. Complete the detail screen, using the definitions provided in the following table. Then, press the Enter key again. Parameter
Serial Bus Address (SBA) of this Module Baud Rate Data Default

Description
Indicates the Serial Bus Address of this module. This is the address from which global data will be sent. Values are 0 to 31. (Default = 16) Selections for the baud rate include 153K STD, 76.8K, 38.4K, and 153K EXT. (Default = 153K STD) If set to OFF, the Enhanced GCM module will either zero out data being supplied to the host PLC whenever the corresponding Genius device supplying the data ceases to communicate on the bus or zero out data being transmitted onto the bus when its host PLC ceases to scan its own I/O . If set to HOLD, the Enhanced GCM module will continue to pass on the last valid state sent to it in either of these situations. (Default = OFF) Specifies the register location in a Series Six or Series Five CPU that should be reserved for the global data that will be transmitted to it by the Enhanced GCM module. A value of zero indicates that no register location should be reserved. Values are 0 16,383, inclusive. (Default = 0) Specifies the location in PLC memory used to hold the status specified by the Enhanced GCM module. The memory type for this field is restricted to %I. (Default = the next highest available %I value) If set to YES, the Enhanced GCM module will accept fault mail from its host Series 90-30 PLC and transmit it onto the bus as a Genius datagram which can be interpreted by a Series 90-70 Genius Bus Controller. If NO is selected, the Enhanced GCM module will not pass on any fault information. (Default = NO) This parameter is used by a Series 90-70 PLC to identify the location of a fault that has been reported by a Series 90-30 PLC via an Enhanced GCM module. The Report Faults option of the Enhanced GCM module must also be enabled. When locating two Enhanced GCM modules in one Series 90-30 PLC, it is recommended that you assign a unique Drop ID to each module in order to avoid conflicting identification information if both modules are set up to report faults. Valid range is 16 through 254. (Default = 33)

Series Six Reference

Status

Report Faults

Drop ID

10-86

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
The following parameters apply for each configurable Serial Bus Address (SBAs 0 through 31): Parameter
Start Reference Reference Length

Description
The starting reference address from or to which global data is being transferred. The reference type can be %G, %R, %AI, %AQ, %I, or %Q. The total length of the reference data, starting at the address specified by START REF . Values are 0 to 128 bytes; however, the units for this field will be bits if the configured reference type is %I, %Q, or %G, and words if the configured reference type is %AI, %AQ, or %R. The offset, measured in bytes, from the start of an incoming message at which the Enhanced GCM module will start to extract data from the incoming message. The first byte extracted is placed in PLC memory at the start reference given in the configuration of the Serial Bus Address of the device transmitting the message. A value of zero indicates that the first byte of the incoming message is placed at the starting references defined for each Serial Bus Address. The offset for the Serial Bus Address of the Enhanced GCM module itself is always zero; it cannot be changed. (Default = 0) For each Serial Bus Address, the sum of the reference length and the message buffer byte offset cannot exceed 128 bytes. Since the Serial Bus Address of this module is used to transmit global data, its reference address may overlap with other configured reference addresses.

Message Buffer Byte Offset

3.

The Default (F9) can be used to set the reference addresses and reference lengths to a combined Scheme 1 and Scheme 2 Genius global data. Serial Bus Addresses 16 through 23 may be configured to use Genius Scheme 1, and Serial Bus Addresses 24 through 31 may be configured to use Genius Scheme 2. All other Serial Bus Addresses are set to their default value. In addition, all message buffer byte offsets are set to zero.

For additional information on the configuration of devices and remote drops, see:
Genius Discrete and Analog Blocks Users Manual (GEK-90486-2) includes instructions for configuring most I/O blocks. Genius I/O System Users Manual (GEK-90486-1) details the data that can be transferred using Read Configuration and Write Configuration COMREQs.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-87

10

Section 15: Configuring a Genius Bus Controller


The Genius Bus Controller (GBC) must be configured as part of the Series 90-30 PLC system using the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (release 5 or later) or a Hand-held Programmer (HHP). This includes configuring parameters for the GBC module itself, and parameters specific to the devices on the GBCs bus. The LM90 configurator software program (release 5 or later) can be used to configure the module in the offline mode. Once the complete set of configuration data has been entered, it must then be downloaded to the PLC (in the online mode) to become effective in the Genius Bus Controller. 1. The GBC is configured by completing setup screens in the Logicmaster 90-30 configuration software. The setup screens that are used for this module are shown and described below. In the I/O configuration screen, place the cursor at the slot representation corresponding to the GBCs installed location in the PLC rack.

2.

Then press F2 (genius). The following screen will appear.

10-88

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
3. Press F1 (gbc) and then press the Enter key to select the GBC. The following screen will appear. (Note that the defalt softkey, F9, is inactive.)

4.

Press the Enter key to select the GBC. Complete the GBC configuration entries in the following screen:

Note that the configuration screen consists of two parts: module-specific data (BUS CONTROLLER MODULE DATA) and device-specific data (DEVICE DATA). The default entries can be used as is, or changed. Until a valid configuration is stored to the PLC CPU, the GBC will not operate on the bus, and its Channel OK LED will not light.

For additional information on the configuration of devices and remote drops, see:
Genius Discrete and Analog Blocks Users Manual (GEK-90486-2) includes instructions for configuring most I/O blocks. Genius I/O System Users Manual (GEK-90486-1) details the data that can be transferred using Read Configuration and Write Configuration COMREQs. Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller Users Manual (GFK-1034) includes configuration and additional details on relevant several topics including configuring for global data, as well as details on assigned configuration parameters.
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-89

10

Section 16: Configuring a High Density Analog Output Module


To configure a High Density Analog Output module, follow these steps: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Press the lm30 io key (F1). You will then see a screen similar to the following:

3.

Press the a out key (F5). Your screen will now look like the one displayed below:

4.

Move the cursor to the IC69ALG392 selection as shown above. Then press Enter.

10-90

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
The next screen that appears will look like the one displayed below:

5.

Enter the remaining configuration parameters on this screen. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling). The default number of Active Channels (Active Chan:) is 1. You will not be able to configure additional channels until you change this field (by typing in the correct number (1 through 8) or by pressing the Tab key to increment the number). The screen displayed below shows the default selections after changing the Active Chan: field.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-91

10
Note
The entry in the Stop Mode field (HOLD or DEFLOWwhich stands for default low) determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode. When this value is set to HOLD (the default), the outputs will retain their last state. When you change this value to DEFLOW, the output will go to zero.

Other Configuration Considerations


Channels are scanned in sequential, contiguous order with channel 1 being the first to be scanned. The entry in %I Size will only accept 8 or 16. This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user. The only allowable entries for the %AQ Ref Adr are %AQ addresses. The only allowable entries for the %I Ref Adr are %I addresses. The following tables show the configuration parameters applicable to this module. Parameter Description
Hold last state from RUN to STOP Number of channels converted Starting address for the %AQ reference type Starting address for the %I reference type Number of %I status locations Type of output range

Parameter
Stop Mode ACTIVE Channels %AQ Ref Adr

Parameter Values
HOLD or DEFLOW 1 through 8 Standard range

Parameter Defaults
HOLD 1 %AQ0001, or next highestavailable %I0001, or next highestavailable 8 0, +10V

Parameter Units
N/A Channels N/A

%I Ref Adr %I Size Range of channel output (not identified as such on the screen)

Standard range 8 or 16 0, +10V; 10, +10V; 4,20mA,0,20mA

N/A bits Volts (Volt) mA (Curr)

Notes:

1.

The %AQ Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AQ memory where the output data to the module begins. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32,767 or 32,768 to 32,767. depending on the range type selected. For detailed information of the data format, see the CPU Interface to Analog Modules section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O ModuleSpecifications (GFK-0898). The %I Ref Adr is the reference address for the %I data and points to the start of the locations in the %I memory (i.e., the Input Table) where status information from the module is reported. The user can select the number of %I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the %I Size field. Values allowable in the %I Size field are 8 or 16, which refer to the number of %I locations reported to the PLC.

2.

10-92

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
The %I Ref Adr field will only accept %I for %I Size values 8 or greater; the data brought back is in the format that follows: The first eight %I locations (available for %I SIZE values 8, 16) %I Locations
%I %I+1

Description
Module OK 0 indicates NOT OK, 1 indicates module OK User Supply OK Indicates when user supply is in specified limits; reads a 0 when User supply below specified limit, 1 when User supply OK Reserved for future modules. Not used in this module.

%I+2 %I+7

Second eight locations (available for %I SIZE values 16) %I Locations


%I+8 %I+9 %I+10 %I+11 %I+12 %I+13 %I+14 %I+15

Description
Channel #1 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #2 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #3 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #4 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #5 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #6 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #7 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only) Channel #8 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire broken (I modes only)

One of four output ranges can be selected. Two of which are voltage ranges. The default range is 010V, where output voltage values ranging from 0 to 10 volts correspond to 0 to 32000 integer values from the 90-30 CPU. The 10 to +10V range, when selected, corresponds from 32000 to 32000 from the CPU over an output voltage range of 10 to +10V. The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 20 mA. In each of the current ranges values between 0 and 32000 are sent to the module. Depending on which range is selected, will determine if the module is in Current or Voltage mode. The following tables shows values sent from the CPU to the module: Sent values from CPU
0 to 32767 32768 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

Range
0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA

Module Mode
Voltage Voltage Current Current

*Allowed Values
0 to 32767 32768 to 32767 0 to 32000* 0 to 32767

*The phrase, Allowed Values, refers to the values that are valid. If you send a value > 32000, the module will truncate that value to 32000 before sending it to the DAC.
GFK-0466L Chapter 10 I/O Configuration 10-93

10

Section 17: Configuring an Analog Combo Module


To configure an Analog Combo module, follow these steps: 1. 2. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured. Press the lm30 io key (F1). Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below.

3.

From this screen, press the a mix key (F6). Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below.

4.

Currently, there is only one selection. (If more than one selection appears, use your Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys to move to Catalog # IC693ALG442.) Press Enter to accept this selection and to move to the screen shown on the top of the next page.
GFK-0466L

10-94

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

10

5.

All the remaining configuration need to be done on this screen. You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement (or Arrow) keys. When you are in the field you want to modify, you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections (or Shift-Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling).

Note
The entry in the Stop Mode field (HOLD or DEFLOW) determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode. When this value is set to HOLD (the default), the outputs will retain their last state. When you change this value to DEFLOW, the output will go to zero.

Other Configuration Considerations


The Alarm Low limit for each channel must be less than its corresponding Alarm High limit. The entry in %I Size will only accept 8, 16 and 24. This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user. The only allowable entries for the %AQ Ref Adr are %AQ addresses. The only allowable entries for the %I Ref Adr are %I addresses.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-95

10
Analog Combo Configuration Parameters
Parameter
STOP MODE %AI ADR %AQ ADR %I ADR %I SIZE RANGE

Parameter Description
Hold last state from RUN to STOP Starting address for the %AI reference type Starting address for the %AQ reference type. Starting address for the %I reference type Number of %I status locations Type of input range and range Low limit alarm value High limit alarm value

Parameter Values
HOLD or DEFLOW standard range standard range standard range 8, 16, 24 0,+10 V, 10,+10 V, 4,20 mA, 0, 20mA 32768 32752 32760 32760

Parameter Defaults
HOLD %AI0001, or next highestavailable %AQ0001, or next highestavailable %I00001, or next highestavailable 8 0,+10 V

Parameter Units
N/A N/A N/A N/A bits volts (Volt) mA (Curr) User counts User counts

ALARMLO ALARM HIGH

0 +32000

Notes:

1.

The %AI Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AI memory where the output data to the module begins. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32,767 or 32,768 to 32,767. depending on the range type selected. For detailed information of the data format, see the CPU Interface to Analog Modules section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module Specifications (GFK-0898). The %AQ Ref Adr field is the reference address for the %AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the %AQ memory where the output data to the module begins. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32,767 or 32,768 to 32,767. depending on the range type selected. For detailed information of the data format, see the CPU Interface to Analog Modules section in chapter 3 of the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module Specifications (GFK-0898). The %I Ref Adr is the reference address for the %I data and points to the start of the locations in the %I memory (i.e., the Input Table) where status information from the module is reported. You can select the number of %I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the %I Size field. Values allowable in the %I Size field are 8 or 16, which refer to the number of %I locations reported to the PLC. For %I SIZE values 8 or greater, the data brought back is in the format described in the table on the next page.

2.

3.

10-96

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10
First eight %I locations (available for %I SIZE values 8, 16, 24) %I Locations
%I %I+1

Description
Module OK 0 indicates NOT OK, 1 indicates module OK User Supply OK Indicates when user supply is in specified limits; reads a 0 when User supply below specified limit, 1 when User supply OK Reserved for future modules. Not used in this module. E2 COMMREQ Status Bits %I + 4 = 0 OK , if 1 = Invalid channel requested %I = 5 = 0 OK , if 1 = Invalid alarm setting Low > High or Low or High < 0 in unipolar mode

%I+2 %I+3 %I + 4 %I + 7

Second eight locations (available for %I SIZE values 16, 24) %I Locations
%I+8 %I+9 %I+10 %I+11 %I+12 %I+13 %I+14 %I+15

Description
Input: Ch #1 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit, 1 below Input Ch #1 ALARM HI 0 indicates value below limit, 1 above Input Ch #2 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit, 1 below Input Ch #2 ALARM HI 0 indicates value below limit, 1 above Input Ch #3 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit, 1 below Input Ch #3 ALARM HI 0 indicates value below limit, 1 above Input Ch #4 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit, 1 below Input Ch #4 ALARM HI 0 indicates value below limit, 1 above

The third eight locations (available for %I SIZE values 24) %I Locations
%I+16 %I+17 %I+18 .. %I+23

Description
Output Ch #1 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire Broken (I modes only) Output Ch #2 BROKEN WIRE 0 = OK, 1 = Wire Broken (I modes only) Reserved for future modules. Not used in this module

One of four input or output ranges can be selected. Two of which are voltage ranges. The default range is 010V, where input or output voltage values range from 0 to 10 volts. In input mode they report 0 to 32000 integer values to the 90-30 CPU and in output mode values between 0 and 32000 are sent to the module. The 10 to +10V range, values between 32000 to 32000 are sent or received from the CPU over an input voltage range of 10 to +10V. The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 20 mA. In each of the current ranges, values between 0 and 32000 are reported back from the module to sent to the module for the entire range.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-97

10
The following tables shows values sent from the CPU to the module for the Output channels: Sent values from CPU
0 to 32767 32768 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

Range
0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA

Module Mode
Voltage Voltage Current Current

*Allowed Values
0 to 32767 32768 to 32767 0 to 32000* 0 to 32767

*The phrase, Allowed Values, refers to the values that are valid. If a user sends a value > 32000, the module will truncate that value to 32000 before sending it to the DAC. The following table shows values sent from the Module back to the PLC for the Input channels Range
0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA

Module Mode
Voltage Voltage Current Current 0 32767

Sent values to CPU


32768 32767 0 32767 0 32767

The ALARM LO and ALARM HI data fields allow the user to enter values that cause alarm indications to be passed to the PLC. Each channel has a low limit alarm value (ALARM LO) and a high limit alarm value (ALARM HI). These alarm values cause %I points to be set as indicated in the tables above. Values can be entered in all high and low limit fields, even though those channels may not be enabled. Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive. Value checking should be done to determine if the ALARM LO and ALARM HI values are allowable for the appropriate RANGE. The allowable values are:

RANGE
420 mA 020 mA 010V 10 +10V

Possible limit values


0..32760 0..32760 0..32760 32768..32760

10-98

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 18: Configuring a Third-Party Module


This section describes configuration of third-party modules. Reference addresses can be configured for %I, %Q, %AI, and %AQ, in addition to a module ID and 16 bytes of hexadecimal data. To configure a third-party module on the I/O Configuration Rack screen: 1. Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location. The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured.

2.

Press Other (F8) and then Foreign (F3) from the I/O Configuration Rack screen to display the list of third-party modules.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-99

10
3. Press the Enter key to display the detail screen.

Parameter
Module ID Reference Data

Description
A 1, 2, or 3-digit signed integer value representing a vendor module designation. A range of valid vendor module IDs is used to allow validation. Enter the starting address and length for each of the %I, %Q, %AI, %AQ, and %R references. The reference address parameters default to the next highest reference address. The size parameters default to zero and are validated to be within the configuration memory limits and the configured CPU for the respective reference type. Sixteen bytes of soft switch data can be configured. Bytes 1 and 2 are binary values (00000000 to 11111111). Bytes 3 through 16 are byte hexadecimal values (00 to FF).

Soft Switch Data

Note
Horner Electric modules must be configured as Foreign and the Module ID must remain at the default value of 3. Refer to the Horner data sheet for Soft Switch Data which is required to configure the modules. All data sheets are available on the GE Fanuc BBS (804) 978-5458 in the Horner Electric area under PLC files. Note that configuration data can be stored to a Stopped PLC, but configuration data will not be transferred to Horner modules like with GE Fanuc smart modules. You must power-cycle the PLC for Horner modules to receive updated configuration data from the CPU.

10-100

Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998

GFK-0466L

10

Section 19: Configuration Reference View


The configuration reference view feature enables you to view tabular displays of configured modules with the same reference (%I, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %G, or %R). This feature can be helpful when assigning new reference addresses or resolving address conflicts, such as overlapping.

Note
The configuration reference view feature is not available for the CPU 211. The reference view table is sorted in ascending order by user reference, with the lowest address listed first. Mixed discrete inputs and outputs (%QI) are shown in both the %Q and %I tables. Mixed analog inputs and outputs (%AQI) are shown in both the %AQ and %AI tables. Data contained in the reference view table may only be viewed; it cannot be edited. Editing may only be done on the detail screens. Modules configured from the rack screens have a reference address assigned to them. When a module is configured, it is automatically entered into the Reference View table for its reference type. When a module is deleted, it is automatically removed from the table. When the reference address of a module is changed, the reference view table is updated automatically.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-101

10
Displaying the Reference View Table
The Reference View screen for the current module reference type may be displayed by pressing Reference View (Shift-F3) from any rack or detail screen in the I/O configuration rack function. From the detail screen, the cursor will be positioned at that same module on the Reference View screen. To display a different Reference View screen, after pressing Shift-F3 to select the reference view function, press the appropriate function key (F3 through F8) for the view screen you wish to display. For example, to display the %I Discrete Input Reference screen shown below, press Reference View (Shift-F3) from an input module detail screen, or Shift-F3 and then %I View (F3) from the detail screen of another reference type.

The first line of the display area clearly identifies the reference type of this view. On the second line, TotalUsed on an analog reference view screen shows the total number of references configured. On a discrete reference view screen, Total I+Q shows the combined total. The highest reference number configured is also displayed on the second line. Each entry in the reference view table contains the following information: Field
Reference Start End PhysicalAddress

Description
The starting and ending reference addresses for the module. The PLC hardware physical address for the module. Each entry in this column will contain the rack and slot information, each separated by a period (for example,rack.slot). The input/output type which controls this module. The type and size of the module. The description field.

I/OType Module Type Description

If overlaps exist in the table, a Y (Yes) is displayed on the second status line at the bottom of the screen. If there are no overlaps, an N (No) is displayed.
10-102 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
The position of the selected entry is displayed in the Entry field, and the number of reference table entries is displayed in the TotalEntries field. For example, in the previous screen, the first entry is the selected entry, and the total number of entries is five.

Moving the Cursor


Use the Up and Down cursor movement keys to scroll between rows of the Reference View table. If the cursor is at the beginning or end of the table, pressing these keys will scroll additional information not already displayed, one single row at a time. The cursor field will always include an entire module (e.g., a single row). Press the Home key to position the cursor at the beginning of the table, or the End key to go to the end of the table. If all the configured modules in the PLC cannot be displayed on a single screen, press the Page Down key to view additional entries, or the Page Up key to view previous entries.

Displaying the Detail Screen


All of the Reference View screens have a Zoom (F10) function key displayed at the top of the screen. This key may be used to go directly to the detailed module screen for the module highlighted on the Reference View screen. In the following example, the 16-point input module with a starting reference address at 00001 is shown in reverse video.

When the Zoom (F10) key is pressed, the detail screen for this module is displayed. To return to the Reference View screen, press Reference View (Shift-F3).

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-103

10
Displaying the Rack Screen
All of the Reference View screens have a Rack (Shift-F1) function key displayed at the top of the screen. This key may be used to go directly to the Rack screen from the reference view function. In the following example, the High Speed Counter module is shown in reverse video. This module is physically located in slot 4 of the main rack.

When Rack (Shift-F1) is pressed from the Reference View screen, the screen will display the main rack and highlight the slot of the module selected on the Reference View screen (in this example, slot 4).

To return to the Reference View screen, press Reference View (Shift-F3).


10-104 Logicmaster90-30/20/MicroProgrammingSoftware Users Manual September 1998 GFK-0466L

10
Overlapping References
Overlapping references may result in an invalid configuration. When the reference address assigned to a module overlaps with another modules reference address of the same reference type, an asterisk (*) is displayed at the beginning of the row for both modules. If the overlap is fatal, resulting in CONFIG INVALID, double asterisks (**) are displayed.

To resolve the conflicting overlap, position the cursor on the reference address which must be changed and press Zoom (F10). The detail module screen will be displayed, allowing the address to be adjusted.

Caution
When adjusting reference addresses, be careful not to cause another overlap.

GFK-0466L

Chapter 10 I/O Configuration

10-105

Chapter 11 CPU Configuration

11

section level 1 1 figure bi level 1 table_big level 1

Use the CPU configuration function to set the operating characteristics of the CPU. To access the CPU configuration functions, press CPU (F2) from the main menu. Then continue below.

Function Key
F1 F3 F4

Function
PLC Time SNP ID Memory Limits

Description
View the computer's timeofday clock, or view and change the PLC timeofday clock. Assign a new value to the Series Ninety Protocol (SNP) ID. Display the CPU memory allocation.

Page
112 114 115

These functions are described on the pages that follow.

Storing the CPU Configuration to the PLC


Use the program utility functions (in ONLINE mode) to store configuration data to the PLC. For instructions, refer to chapter 8, Program Utilities."
GFK0466L 111

11
PLC Date and Time
To display the current date and time, press PLC Time (F1).

Note
The PLC timeofday clock function is only available with the Model 331 and higher CPUs and the 28point Micro PLCs. It is not available with the Model 311 or Model 313 CPU. If the PLCTIM (Shift-F1) key is pressed, the following screen is disabled and the software displays a message indicating that the function is not available.

Note
When this screen is first displayed, the timeofday clock is read from the PLC. Elapsed time is tracked by the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. Other devices, such as CIMPLICITY 90ADS, may change the timeofday clock, but the change will not be reflected on this screen until you exit and return to this screen. The current date and time for the programmer are displayed in all operating modes. To also display the PLC date and time, place the computer in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode or is not communicating with the CPU, asterisks are displayed in the Current PLC Values fields.

112

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

11
Changing the PLC Date and Time
To change the date and/or time shown for the PLC, the computer must be in ONLINE mode and communicating with the PLC. To make the PLC date and time the same as the values shown for the computer, press Equal (F1). To use a different date and/or time: 1. Enter the new date, using dash (minus) characters between fields (MMDDYY). Abbreviation
MM DD YY

Description
Month from 1 to 12. Day from 01 to 31. Year from 00 to 99.

2.

Enter the new time, using colons between fields (HH:MM:SS). Abbreviation
HH MM SS

Description
Hours from 00 to 23. Minutes from 00 to 59. Seconds from 00 to 59.

Note
If hours are specified, entering minutes and seconds is optional. Partial times must, however, end with a colon. For example, HH: or HH:MM: 3. Press the Enter or Escape key. The change in the currently highlighted field is sent to the PLC and will appear in the Current PLC Values fields on the screen.

GFK0466L

Chapter 11 CPU Configuration

113

11
SNP ID
This SNP ID is for the Power Supply port only (see Note below). For multidrop configurations, each CPU connected to the system must have a unique identification name consisting of 1 to 6 characters. With 6.6 and later CPUs, you have the option of using 1 to 7 characters. All previous releases allow up to 6 characters. The SNP ID is not required for peertopeer communications. The current SNP ID name is displayed in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. To display the current SNP ID or assign a new name, press SNP ID (F3). The entry for the New SNP ID field can only be changed in ONLINE mode with communications. If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode or is not communicating with the CPU, asterisks are displayed in the Current SNP ID field.

Note
On Release 7 351 and 352 PLCs, Port 1 and Port 2 have their IDs stored in the configuration (see page 1018 and following for 351/352 port configuration and each port's SNP ID.

Changing the SNP ID Name


To change the identification of the PLC: 1. Enter a new name in the New SNP ID field, using the alphanumeric characters (A - Z, 0 - 9) or special characters (-, @, _, #, $, %, <, >, =, +, &). The first character must be alphabetic.

Note
Lowercase characters may be entered using the HandHeld Programmer; however, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software supports only uppercase characters. 2. 3.
114

To clear the SNP ID, enter all blank characters. Press the Enter key to send this new name to the attached SNP device.
GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

11
PLC Memory Limits
To display the reference and logic memory limits for the PLC, press Memory Limits (F4). The limits are fixed, based on the model of the CPU. This screen shows the fixed memory limits for a CPU 331.

The current memory allocations stored in the program folder are displayed in all operating modes. To display the PLC values, place the computer in ONLINE or MONITOR mode. The upper portion of this screen shows the maximum values for discrete references (%I, %Q, %M, %T, %S, and %G). These values are set by the system and will change only when the CPU model number is changed. The lower portion of this screen shows values for register references (%AI, %AQ, and %R). These values are also set by the system and will change only when the CPU model number is changed. The sum of CPU memory, according to the particular CPU model is displayed in the CPU Memory Total field.

Configurable Memory
Beginning with Release 9.02, all model 351 and higher CPUs have configurable %R, %AQ, and %AI memory. Refer to page 1024 for information about this feature.

GFK0466L

Chapter 11 CPU Configuration

115

Appendix A Programming Lesson

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

This appendix contains a tutorial for the programming software package. The lesson includes: D D D D D D Creating a program folder. Creating a program. Entering a variable declaration. Adding ladder logic to the program. Printing the program. Exiting the programmer.

Help Screens
Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. To access the Help screens, press ALTH for help, ALTI for instruction mnemonic help, or ALTK for key help.

Starting the Lesson


Before you can start, the programming software must be installed and started. If that has not been done yet, please turn back to chapter 2, Operation," for instructions.

Exiting the Programmer


You can exit the programmer at any time by pressing the CTRLBreak keys.

GFK0466L

A1

A
Creating a Program Folder
For this lesson, you will create and use a program folder named LESSON. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software is started (if the current default directory is an existing program folder), a screen similar to the one shown below appears. If the software is already running, you can display a similar screen from the Program Folder menu by pressing Folder (F8 or Shift-F8) from the Programming Software main menu and then Select (F1).

A2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
1. 2. If the current default directory is not an existing program folder, type in a name of seven characters or less for the folder. For this lesson, type LESSON. Press the Enter key. The following prompt will appear at the top of the screen:
Program folder does not exist; create new folder? (Y/N)

3.

To create the program folder, enter Y (Yes). The software will accept the name and display the Programming Software main menu.

The name of your new program folder (LESSON) should be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A3

A
Creating a Program
Create a program in this program folder by pressing Program (F1). The following screen will be displayed:

The screen shows a [VARIABLE DECLARATIONS] marker where variable declarations can be inserted. Variable declarations are used to list nicknames and reference descriptions for the block. At the _MAIN block, the nicknames listed in the variable declaration table are known throughout all blocks; in a subroutine block, the nicknames are local and known only to that particular block. Some programs will contain no declarations. This lesson shows how to enter a variable declaration.

A4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
Entering a Variable Declaration
To enter a variable declaration: 1. 2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor block to the marker.

[VARIABLE DECLARATIONS]

Press Zoom (F10) to display a table where variables for the program can be entered.

3.

Press Insert (F1) to begin entering information in the Reference field.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A5

A
4. 5. 6. Enter the machine reference which the nickname will represent. For this lesson, type %I33 or 33I. Press the Enter key. The cursor block moves to the Nickname field. Enter the nickname count, and press the Enter key. The cursor block moves to the Reference Description field.

7.

For this lesson, we will not use the Reference Description field. Press the Escape key to save your entries and leave INSERT mode. Note that when you press the Escape key, the software automatically changes your entry in the Nickname field to uppercase letters.

8.
A6

Press the Escape key again to return to the program ladder logic display.
GFK0466L

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

A
Adding Ladder Logic to the Program
To create logic for the example program: 1. 2. On the program screen, use the Down cursor key to move the cursor to the [END OF PROGRAM LOGIC] marker. Press Insert (F1). You can now insert ladder logic at the cursor location.

The top line of the display shows these ladder logic functions: D D D D D D D D D D Relay contacts and coils. Timers and counters. Math functions. Relational (comparison) functions. Logical bit operation functions. Data move functions. Table functions Conversion functions. Control functions. Open space operations.

All of these functions are described in chapter 3, Program Editing." For additional information, refer to the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK0467.

Note
ALTE can be used to toggle the display of the status area at the bottom of the screen. Press ALTE to remove the status information; then, press ALTE again to display it again. For more information on the status area, refer to chapter 2, section 6, Screen Format."
GFK0466L Appendix A Programming Lesson A7

A
3. The reversevideo block on the top line shows that the currently selected type of function is RELAY. Press F1 to start the rung with a normally open contact.

4. 5.

Type in %I as a reference for the contact. Note that typing 1I has the same result. The reference appears in the command line at the top of the screen. Press the Enter key. The software automatically changes your entry to the correct format and moves the cursor to the next location in the rung.

A8

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
6. Add a math function to the rung. Press Math (Shift-F3) to select the math functions. At the top of the screen, the reverse video block moves to MATH. The second line shows the types of math functions that are currently available. Press Add (F1) to place an addition function in the rung.

7.

Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the first input parameter (I1). This represents the first of the two numbers to be added.

8.

Specify the first number to be added. For this lesson, enter %R17 or 17R. This represents register reference %R0017. Then, press the Enter key.
A9

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A
9. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the second input parameter (I2). This represents the number to be added to the current value of the reference %R0017.

10. Enter the number 4 as the value to be added. Press the Enter key. Because you did not type a % symbol before the number, the software knows it is a constant.

A10

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
11. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the next parameter (Q). Q is an output reference which represents the location for the sum (output) of the addition. Enter the reference %R18, and press the Enter key.

12. Use the Tab key to move the cursor block up to the top rung line. To complete the rung by programming a coil, press ShiftF1 to select the relay functions.

13. Enter %Q1 into the command line. This will be the reference for the coil.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A11

A
14. Press F5 to enter a coil at the end of the rung. Notice that the reference can be entered either before selecting the function as shown here, or after selecting the function as shown earlier.

15. To accept the rung, press the Enter key (or the Plus (+) key on the numeric keypad). This accepts the completed rung, and the cursor moves downward so you can insert another line of logic. 16. Select the control functions by pressing Shift-F9. Press Comment (F8) to add a comment to the program.

A12

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
17. Press the Enter key and then the Escape key to return these key functions to the top of the screen as shown below:

18. Press the Up Cursor Movement (or Up Arrow) key to move the cursor up to highlight the COMMENT instruction as shown below:

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A13

A
19. Press Zoom (F10). The program logic is replaced with a blank screen where you can enter text.

20. Beginning at the

[EOB] (End of Buffer) symbol, enter the text shown below:

A14

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
21. Press the Escape key to save the comment and return the ladder logic display to the screen.

22. You could display the comment again by pressing Zoom (F10) with the cursor located at the comment rung. 23. That completes the lesson. Press the Escape key to return to the main menu. The following information pertains to subroutines. If you want to practice creating a subroutine, continue below. If you want to print this program now, continue on page A23.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A15

A
Creating a Subroutine Block
Subroutines are declared through the block declaration editor.

Note
Subroutine blocks are not available for the Series 9020 PLC nor for Micro PLCs. 1. To create a subroutine declaration, position the cursor on the DECLARATIONS] marker.

[BLOCK

2.

Then, press the Zoom (F10) key.

A16

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
3. Enter the name of the subroutine on the command line. For this lesson, type in the name SHIP_IT.

4.

Then, press the Insert (F1) key.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A17

A
5. An explanation of up to 32 characters can also be entered at this time. Type the description THIS IS A BLOCK on the command line.

6.

Press the Enter key.

A18

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
7. Then, press the Escape key.

There are two alternate methods of entering this information. Both methods combine the previous step and this step into one operation. The first method is to type the name SHIP_IT and the description THIS IS A BLOCK together on the command line. Press the Insert (F1) key, and then press the Escape key. The second method is to first press the Insert (F1) key, type the name and description together on the command line. Then, press the Enter key, followed by the Escape key. 8. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor on the subroutine block declaration named SHIP_IT. Then, press Zoom (F10). Note that the name of the block (BLK: _MAIN) in the status area of the previous screen has now been changed to the name of the subroutine block (SUB: SHIP_IT).

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A19

A
9. You can create logic for the subroutine block on this screen. Position the cursor on the [END OF SUBROUTINE LOGIC] marker and press Insert (F1). You can now insert ladder logic at the cursor location.

10. Press F1 to start the rung with a normally open contact. Type in the reference %I1, and press the Enter key. The software automatically changes your entry to the correct format and moves the cursor to the next location in the rung.

A20

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
11. Add a bit operation function to the rung. Press Bit Operation (Shift-F5) to select the functions. At the top of the screen, the reverse video block moves to BITOP . The second line shows the types of bit operation functions that are currently available. Press More (F9) to display additional bit operation functions you can select. Then, press Bit Test (F1) to insert a function in the rung that will test a bit within a bit string.

12. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the parameter IN. IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on. For this lesson, enter PRD_CDE on the command line. Because you have not previously entered the nickname PRD_CDE in the variable declaration table, you will also need to enter a reference address for the nickname now. After typing PRD_CDE on the command line, type %R1 for the reference address. Then, press the Tab key. The software will enter the reference address in the logic and automatically move the cursor to the next parameter (BIT).

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A21

A
13. BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be tested. For this lesson, enter PICKBIT and the reference address %R2 on the command line. (If the nickname PICKBIT had previously been entered in the variable declaration table, you would not need to enter it here on the command line.) Then, press the Tab key. Again, the software will enter the reference address in the logic and automatically move the cursor to the next parameter (Q).

14. Output Q is energized if the bit tested is a 1. Press Relay (Shift-F1) to display the relay functions. Then, type the reference %T1 on the command line, and press F5 to enter a coil at the end of the rung.

A22

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

A
15. The LEN parameter represents the number of words in the string to be tested. This is set at 1 and does not need to be changed for this lesson. However, if you wanted to change the number of words to 5, for example, you would position the cursor on the function, enter 5 on the command line, and press the Enter key. 16. That completes the example subroutine. In this subroutine, whenever input %I0001 is set, the bit at the location contained in reference PICKBIT is tested. The bit is part of string PRD_CDE. If it is 1, output Q passes power flow and coil %T0001 is turned on. 17. Press the Escape key a total of four times to return to the main menu. If you want to print this program now, continue below.

Printing the Program


If you have a printer connected to the computer, and the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software has been set up to communicate with it, you can print the lesson program now. The software assumes a default printer setup. If that is not correct for your printer, you can enter changes on the Printer Parameters screen, as explained in chapter 9. If the printer has not already been used to print Logicmaster 90 programs, you should check chapter9, Print Functions," before continuing. 1. To display the Print Function menu, press Print (Shift-F10).

This menu is used to set printer parameters (F1 and F2), request printing (F4, F5, and F6), pause printing (F9), and save the printer setup (F10). Default printer setup values are supplied with the software, but are easily changed if needed. Chapter 9 explains printer setup in detail.

GFK0466L

Appendix A Programming Lesson

A23

A
2. Press Logic (F4) to print program logic. Define the printout content on the screen that appears.

3. 4. 5.

Enter a title for the printout, such as: PRACTICE PROGRAM. Both the title and subtitle entries are optional. Skip the subtitle entry. The illustration above shows the default selections for the printout options. To include the example rung explanation in the printout, move the cursor to: RUNG COMMENTS N". Use the Tab key to toggle the selection from N (No) to Y (Yes). The other entries shown are suitable for this lesson, so they can be skipped. The listing destination (lower part of the screen) allows you to direct the printout to a serial or parallel port, or to a file. If the destination shown is not correct, use the Down cursor key to move the cursor to PORT. Enter the correct port designation. When you are ready to print the program, press the Enter key. While the program is being printed, the software displays the message:
Listing in progress ... (Listing CAN be paused or aborted).

6. 7.

8.

Ending the Lesson


The program you created was saved when you exited the display/edit program function.

A24

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

This appendix contains a tutorial for the configuration software package. The lesson includes: D D D D Creating a program folder. Configuring a CPU module. Configuring a 9030 I/O module. Configuring a Genius Communications Module.

You can exit and save the lesson at any time, as explained below. It is not necessary to complete all of the steps. D D To exit and save the lesson, press the Escape key. To exit without saving the lesson, press CTRLBreak.

Help Screens
Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software includes detailed Help screens. These Help screens are loaded onto the hard disk of your programmer during the software installation procedure and are readily accessible. To access the Help screens, press ALTH for help, ALTI for instruction mnemonic help, or ALTK for key help.

Starting the Lesson


Before you can start, the configuration software must be installed and started up. If that has not been done yet, please turn back to chapter 2 , Operation," for instructions.

GFK0466L

B1

B
Creating a Program Folder
Each program and its associated configuration are stored as many files. These files are stored in a subdirectory called a program folder. For this lesson, you will use a program folder named LESSON. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software is started (if the current default directory is an existing program folder), a screen similar to the one shown below appears. If the software is already running, you can display a similar screen from the Program Folder menu by pressing Folder (F8 or Shift-F8) from the Configuration Software main menu and then Select (F1).

B2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

B
1. 2. If the current default directory is not an existing program folder, type in a name of seven characters or less for the folder. For this lesson, type LESSON. Press the Enter key. The following prompt will appear at the top of the screen:
Program folder does not exist; create new folder? (Y/N)

3.

To create the program folder, enter Y (Yes). The software will accept the name and display the Configuration Software main menu.

The name of your new program folder (LESSON) should be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

B3

B
Displaying the Rack Configuration
From the main menu, press I/O (F1 or Shift-F1 from the Folder screen) to display the beginning screen.

This screen shows the slots available in rack 0, which is the first rack in the system. Use the Page Up or Page Down key, or the Up or Down cursor key, to display the configuration of another rack.

B4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

B
Configuring a CPU Module
The left slot contains the power supply. Although it requires no additional configuration, its configuration may be changed. Slot 1 contains the CPU module, for which you will enter an example configuration. 1. Press the Right cursor movement key once to highlight slot 1.

2.

Press Zoom (F10) to display this detail screen.

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

B5

B
3. When each of the parameters on the screen has been entered, press CPU (F1) to display the list of available CPU modules and their catalog numbers.

4.

If you are configuring another type of CPU module, move the cursor to the desired module and press the Enter key. Then, enter Y (Yes) after the prompt:
REPLACE displayed module? (Y/N)

5.

Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to exit from the detail screen and return to the rack display.

B6

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

B
Configuring a 9030 I/O Module
Next, you will configure slot 2 of the main rack for a 9030 I/O module. 1. Use the Right cursor key to highlight slot 2.

2.

Press Module 30 I/O (F1) to configure a 9030 I/O Module in slot 2. The software zooms into the detail screen.

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

B7

B
3. The types of modules that might be placed in this slot are shown by the key functions at the top of the screen. For this example, select a Discrete Input module by pressing F1. A list of modules is displayed.

4.

Select a module by moving the cursor to any entry and pressing the Enter key. Its catalog number will appear in reverse video in the proper field. For this example, move the cursor to IC693MDL230 and press the Enter key. The following screen is displayed:

B8

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

B
5. Assign a beginning I/O reference address to this module. Move the cursor to:
Ref Addr : %I00001

For this example, you will purposely enter an incorrect I/O reference. First, move the small cursor to the right in the Reference Address field by pressing the CTRL and Right cursor keys. Enter 1 and then 6 as the last two digits. Now the reference address should look like this:
Ref Addr : %I00016

This reference address is incorrect because it does not begin on a byte boundary. (A byte boundary is a number which is one greater than an integer multiple of 8; for example, 1, 9, 17, or 25). 6. Watch the reference address. Notice that when you press the Down cursor key once, the software automatically changes the reference address to the next lowest byte boundary:
Ref Addr : %I00009

and the message The Reference Address has been adjusted to be byte aligned" will be displayed. 7. For this lesson, the rest of the entries on this screen need not be changed. Press the Escape key to return to the rack display.

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

B9

B
Configuring a Genius Communications Module
Next, you will configure slot 3 of the main rack for a Genius Communications Module. 1. Use the Right cursor key to highlight slot 3.

2.

Press Genius (F2) from the I/O Rack Configuration screen. Then, press GCM (F2) to display the catalog number of the GCM.

B10

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

B
3. Press the Enter key to enter the catalog number shown in reverse video. The following detail screen is displayed.

4.

Complete the detail screen. To do this, you must be familiar with information in the Genius Communications Module Manual, GFK0412. For this example, we will assume the default entries are correct. Press Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. Press the Escape key from the rack display (or CTRLU) to save the created configuration.

5. 6.

Ending the Lesson


The configuration created was saved when you pressed Rack (Shift-F1) or the Escape key to return to the rack display. This is the end of the lesson.

GFK0466L

Appendix B Configuration Lesson for the Series 9030 PLC

B11

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

A default setup file is created during installation. Only in special circumstances will this file need to be changed. Follow the steps below in order to edit the setup file.

Displaying the Setup Screen


1. After completing the installation and restarting the computer as described, at the MSDOS prompt, type LM90 and press the Enter key. A menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions is displayed.

Note
Unlike the setup features discussed in chapter 6, you must begin the setup steps detailed in this appendix by entering the Logicmaster 90 Setup Package" by pressing F9 from the Logicmaster main menu, not from within the programmer.

GFK0466L

C1

C
2. Press Setup (F9) to select the setup function. The following menu is displayed:

C2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

C
Selecting Terminal and Printer Options
To select terminal and printer options, press Terminal Options (F1) from the Setup File Editor menu.

Use the cursor keys to move from one option field to another. Selected fields are shown in reverse video on the display screen. Then, use the Tab and ShiftTab keys to toggle each selection. Field
Programmer Mode Keyswitch

Description
Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software may be run on machines with or with out a keyswitch to specify the operational mode (ONLINE, MONITOR, or OFFLINE). Choices for this field are ENABLED or DISABLED*. This switch should normally be left at the factory default DISABLED position. It can be used to ENABLE the OFF-LINE/MONITOR/ONLINE keyswitch on the Workmaster I or original CIMSTAR I industrial computer. Enabling this value will disable the use of the Alt-M key to change Modes and will cause an error message on all current personal computers.. This switch is used to prevent screen flickering on early 1980's CGA (Color Graphic Adapter) video cards. The default ON* is for the original CGA cards while OFF can be used for later cards. This switch is not used for later EGA or VGA video cards. If your printer is capable of producing IBM compatible graphics characters, you may improve the appearance of your ladder logic printouts by enabling this table has no title this option. If you printout displays contacts or lines as capital letters, your printer does not support the IBM graphic characters. You must set this switch to NO.Choices for this field are YES or NO*.

CGA Video Snow Suppression IBM Compatible Graphics Printer

* Default Selection

When the selections are complete, press the Escape key to return to the Setup File Editor menu.

GFK0466L

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup

C3

C
Specifying Palette Colors
If your personal computer has a color monitor and the video adapter is an EGA (Enhanced Graphics Adapter) or VGA (Video Graphics Array), you may select the colors that will be used in the Logicmaster 90 displays. To specify palette colors, press Colors (F2) from the Setup File Editor menu.

The middle portion of the screen, enclosed in a box, provides a sample display using the currently selected colors. The numeric values stored in the palette registers control the foreground, background, special, and screen border colors. The color values in the palette registers may be changed by pressing the function keys (F1 through F10), as described in the lower portion of the screen. The function keys are paired; one key increases the value while the other decreases it. The values may be adjusted within the range 0 to 63. As the values are changed, the colors in the sample display box are updated accordingly. You may wish to experiment with different color combinations. When you are satisfied with your selections, press the Escape key to return to the Setup menu. The color values will be saved along with the other setup information; these color values will be used each time you start up the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software.

C4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

C
Completing the Disk Drive Setup
To complete the disk drive setup, press Drives (F3) from the Setup File Editor menu.

1. 2.

If the drives shown on the left of your screen are correct, press Default (F3). If the current selections are not correct, change them as instructed. Press the Escape key to return to the Setup File Editor menu.

GFK0466L

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup

C5

C
PLC Communications Options
The PLC Communications Options screen enables you to select whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board or serial COM port and to select one of four different interrupt lines on the PC backplane. To display this screen, press PLC Communications Options (F4) from the Setup File Editor menu. Remember, unlike the serial port setup discussed in chapter 6, to access this screen you must enter Setup (F9) from the main menu which takes you to the Setup File Editor screen, then press PLC Communications Options (F4)see pages C1-C2 for more information.

Standard Serial COM Port Installed


In the following example screen, only the standard serial communications version of software is installed.

Field
Communication Device

Description
When both the WSI and standard serial communications versions of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software are installed, you must choose whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board* or serial COM port. This field shows the current selection for which area of memory the communications driver will load into. The default and recommended setting is automatic" as shown above.

Driver Memory Area


* Default Selection

Standard Serial COM Port and Driver Memory Area


To change the serial COM memory area, use the Down Arrow key to move the cursor to the Driver Memory Area" field. (Selected fields are shown in reverse video on the display screen.) Then, use the Tab and ShiftTab keys to toggle each selection. As noted above, the automatic" setting is recommended; this lets Logicmaster determine which area of memory it is best to place the driver. For information about the different memory configuration options, read pages 66 and following in this manual.
C6 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

C
PLC Communications Options Both WSI and Serial COM Port Installed
In the following example, both the WSI and Standard Serial Communications versions of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software are installed, and the serial COM port was chosen as the communication driver.

Note
To change the selection of Communication Device," use the Tab and ShiftTab keys to toggle the selection between Serial COM port" and WSI." This, of course, is only applicable if you have both the WSI and the Standard Serial COM Port installed.

GFK0466L

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup

C7

C
PLC Communications WSI Version with Configurable Interrupt Request
In the next example, the WSI version of software is installed and selected, and a WSIB2 Board was used. Note that the default value IRQ3 appears in the WSIB Interrupt Line" field. This value can be changed by using the Tab and ShiftTab keys to toggle each selection.

Field
Communication Device

Description
When both the WSI and standard serial communications versions of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software are installed, you must choose whether to communicate with the PLC through a WSI Board* or serial COM port. In a PC or PCAT computer, the WSI Board can be configured to use four different interrupt lines on the PC backplane. Choices are IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, or IRQ7*. This option is available only if you are using the WSIB2 Board for communications. If you have the older WSIB1 Board, the interrupt line is displayed as IRQ3 and is not changeable. If you have selected a serial COM port for communica tions, this option is not displayed.

WSIB Interrupt Line

* Default Selection

Note
When the WSI Version of Release 4 or later of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software is used on a Workmaster II industrial computer or other microchannel personal computer with a WS9A2 board, the selection of an interrupt line on the PLC Communications Options screen must be set to IRQ3. Failure to select IRQ3 will result in improper setup of the board, possible lockup of the Logicmaster software during startup, and failure to communicate with the PLC.
C8 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

C
PLC Communications WSI Version with NonConfigurable Interrupt Request
In this example, again the WSI version of software is installed, but a nonconfigurable WSIB1 Board was used. The interrupt line IRQ3 is displayed in the WSIB Interrupt Line" field and cannot be changed. Again, there are no options to select; the screen is presented only to provide information.

Saving the Programmer Environment Setup


To save the setup information in a file for future use, first press Esc (the Escape key) to return to the LOGICMASTER 90 Setup File Editor" screen. Then press Save (F10) from the Setup File Editor menu. After the file is saved, the software displays the message: Setup File saved successfully as c:\lm90\lm90.prd. Press any key to return to the Setup File Editor menu. Then, press the Escape key to return to the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions.

GFK0466L

Appendix C Programmer Environment Setup

C9

Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

In program display/edit mode, you can quickly enter or search for a programming instruction by typing the ampersand (&) character followed by the instruction's mnemonic. For some instructions, you can also specify a reference address or nickname, a label, or a location reference address. This appendix lists the mnemonics of the programming instructions for Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro programming software. At any time during programming, you can display a help screen with these mnemonics by pressing the ALT and I keys (i.e., hold down the ALT key and then tap the I key).
Function Group
Contacts

Instruction
All Any Contact Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Continuation Contact Any Coil Normally Open Coil Negated Coil Positive Transition Coil Negative Transition Coil SET Coil RESET Coil Retentive SET Coil Retentive RESET Coil Retentive Coil Negated Retentive Coil Continuation Coil Horizontal Link Vertical Link On Delay Timer Elapsed Timer Off Delay Timer Up Counter Down Counter &CON &NOCON &NCCON &CONC &COI &NOCOI &NCCOI &PCOI &NCOI &SL &RL &SM &RM &NOM &NCM &COILC &HO &VE &ON &TM &OF &UP &DN INT &CON &NOCON &NCCON &CONC &COI &NOCOI &NCCOI &PCOI &NCOI &SL &RL &SM &RM &NOM &NCM &COILC &HO &VE &ON &TM &OF &UP &DN DINT

Mnemonic
BIT BYTE WORD

Coils

Links Timers

Counters

GFK0466L

D1

Function Group
Math

Instruction
Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulo Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Inverse Sine Inverse Cosine Inverse Tangent Base 10 Logarithm Natural Logarithm Power of e Power of x Equal Not Equal Greater Than Greater or Equal Less Than Less Than or Equal AND OR Exclusive OR NOT Bit Shift Left Bit Shift Right Bit Rotate Left Bit Rotate Right Bit Test Bit Set Bit Clear Bit Position Masked Compare Move Block Move Block Clear Shift Register Bit Sequencer Communications Request Array Move Search Equal Search Not Equal Search Greater Than Search Greater Than or Equal Search Less Than Search Less Than or Equal Convert to Integer Convert to Double Integer Convert to BCD-4 Convert to REAL Convert to WORD Truncate to Integer Truncate to Double Integer

Mnemonic
All &AD &SUB &MUL &DIV &MOD &SQ &SIN &COS &TAN &ASIN &ACOS &ATAN &LOG &LN &EXP &EXPT &EQ &NE &GT &GE &LT &LE &AN &OR &XO &NOT &SHL &SHR &ROL &ROR &BT &BS &BCL &BP &MCM &MOV &BLKM &BLKC &SHF &BI &COMMR &AR &SRCHE &SRCHN &SRCHGT &SRCHGE &SRCHLT &SRCHLE &TO_INT &TO_DINT &BCD4 &TO_REAL &TO_W &TRINT &TRDINT
&TO_INT_BCD4

BCD4

INT &AD_I &SUB_I &MUL_I &DIV_I &MOD_I &SQ_I

DINT &AD_DI &SUB_DI &MUL_DI &DIV_DI &MOD_DI &SQ_DI

BIT

BYTE

WORD

REAL &AD_R &SUB_R &MUL_R &DIV_R &MOD_R &SQ_R

Relational

&EQ_I &NE_I &GT_I &GE_I &LT_I &LE_I

&EQ_DI &NE_DI &GT_DI &GE_DI &LT_DI &LE_DI &AN_W &OR_W &XO_W &NOT_W &SHL_W &SHR_W &ROL_W &ROR_W &BT_W &BS_W &BCL_W &BP_W &MCM_W

&EQ_R &NE_R &GT_R &GE_R &LT_R &LE_R

Bit Operation

Data Move

&MOV_I &BLKM_I

&MOV_BI &SHF_BI

&MOV_W &BLKM_W &AR_W

&MOV_R &BLKM_R

Table

&AR_I &SRCHE_I &SRCHN_I &SRCHGT_I &SRCHGE_I &SRCHLT_I &SRCHLE_I

&AR_DI &SRCHE_DI &SRCHN_DI &SRCHGT_DI &SRCHGE_DI &SRCHLT_DI &SRCHLE_DI

&AR_BI

&AR_BY &SRCHE_BY &SRCHN_BY &SRCHGT_BY &SRCHGE_BY &SRCHLT_BY &SRCHLE_BY

&AR_W &SRCHE_W &SRCHN_W &SRCHGT_W &SRCHGE_W &SRCHLT_W &SRCHLE_W_

Conver sion

&TO_BCD4_I &TO_REAL_I

&BCD4_R &TO_REAL_DI &TO_REAL_W

D2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

D
Function Group
Control

Instruction
Call a Subroutine Do I/O SERSequential Event Recorder PID - ISA Algorithm PID - IND Algorithm SFCRES - SFC Reset End Rung Explanation System Services Request Master Control Relay End Master Control Relay Nested Master Control Relay Nested End Master Cntl Relay Jump Nested Jump Label Nested Label

Mnemonic
All &CA &DO &SER &PIDIS &PIDIN &SFCRES &COMME &SV &MCR &ENDMCR &MCRN &ENDMC RN &JUMP &JUMPN &LABEL &LABELN INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD REAL

&JUMP &JUMPN &LABEL &LABELN

GFK-0466L

Appendix D Instruction Mnemonics

D-3

Appendix E Key Functions

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

The following table lists the keyboard functions that are active in the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software environment. This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT-K to access key help. Key Sequence
ALTA ALTC ALTM ALTR ALTE ALTJ ALTL ALTP ALTH ALTK ALTI ALTT ALTQ ALTn

Description
Abort. Clear field. Change programmer mode. Change PLC RUN/STOP state. Toggle status area. Toggle the command line. List directory files. Print screen. Help. Key help. Instruction mnemonic help. Start TEACH mode. Stop TEACH mode.

Key Sequence

Description

Keys Available throughout the Software Package CTRLBreak Exit package. Esc Zoom out. CTRLHome Previous command line contents. CTRLEnd Next command line contents. CTRL- Cursor left within the field. CTRL- Cursor right within the field. CTRLD Decrement reference address. CTRLU Increment reference address. Tab Change/increment field contents. ShiftTab Change/decrement field contents. Enter Accept field contents. CTRLE Display last system error. F12 Toggle discrete reference. (or Keypad -) Playback file n (n = 0 thru 9). F11 Override discrete reference. (or Keypad *) Keys Available in the Program Editor Only Toggle text editor bell. Delete rung element. Store block to PLC and disk. Display zoom level. Toggle nickname/reference address. Update disk. Variable table window. Keypad + Enter CTRLPgUp CTRLPgDn X | Tab Accept rung. Accept rung. Previous rung. Next rung. Horizontal shunt. Vertical shunt. Go to the next operand field.

ALTB ALTD ALTS ALTX ALTN ALTU ALTV ALTO

Special Keys Password override. Available only on the Password screen in the configuration software.

GFK0466L

E1

E
The Help card on the next page contains a listing of the key help and also the instruction mnemonics help text for Logicmaster 90 software. This card is printed in triplicate and is perforated for easier removal from the manual.

E2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Print side 1 of GFJ055C on this page.

GFK0466L

Appendix E Key Functions

E3

Print side 2 of GFJ055C on this page.

E4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Appendix F User Command Menu

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

You can maintain a file of MSDOS executable commands outside of the Logicmaster software packages. This command definition file named COMENU.DAT contains a list of task entries, each with a unique display label and associated MSDOS command. The file is stored in the Logicmaster home directory (normally \LM90 ) and can be edited using an MSDOS compatible text editor such as EDLIN. The MSDOS commands in this file can be used to run other software packages and perform routine MSDOS functions, such as disk maintenance.

Accessing the User Command Menu


The MSDOS executable commands maintained in the COMENU.DAT file are accessed from the User Command menu called Comenu. 1. To display this menu, press Comenu (F8) from the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions. A sample Comenu is shown below.

GFK0466L

F1

F
2. 3. When F8 is pressed, the Logicmaster startup program reads the Comenu definition file and creates a display similar to the one shown above. Use the cursor keys, the Page Up and Down keys, or the Home and End keys to select a command. The label for the currently selected entry is shown in reverse video. If more command definitions are available than can be displayed on the screen, use the cursor keys to scroll through the entries. The number of the currently selected command and the total number of commands are displayed beneath the labels window. The MSDOS command string for the current entry is shown beneath the labels window for verification of the command text associated with the entry. Move the cursor to the desired command label and press the Enter key. The menu program will clear the screen and submit the selected command to MSDOS for execution. Subsequent screens are controlled by MSDOS and the selected command. When the command is completed, control will normally return immediately to the Comenu display. However, you may wish to pause after the execution of the command in order to study the display generated by the command. If a pause is desired, enter Y (Yes) in the Pause after command execution field, or use the Tab, ShiftTab, Space, or Backspace key to toggle the value of the field from No to Yes. After the pause, MSDOS will prompt you to press any key in order to continue. When a key is pressed, the User Command menu is displayed again. Press Exit (F10) or the Escape key to return to the menu of Series 90 PLCs and functions.

4.

5.

6. 7.

Creating a COMENU.DAT file


A default command definition file is provided with the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. The default file provides example definitions and includes entries for performing disk formatting. Definitions may be entered in the COMENU.DAT file in either of two forms:
<display label> = <DOS command string>

or
<display label> = <DOS command string>

according to these guidelines: 1. 2. 3. 4. Blank lines and lines beginning with a semicolon are ignored. Lead and trailing space and tab characters around the label and command are ignored. The label may be any text up to 50 characters long. Labels which exceed this length are truncated. The equal sign (=) must appear on the same line as the label. A carriage return and line feed may follow the equal sign if you want the command text to start on a separate line.
GFK0466L

F2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

F
5. Each command string is terminated by a carriage return and line feed, or by the endoffile. The command string itself should not contain any carriage returns, even if the string is longer than can be displayed on a single line. The command string is limited by MSDOS to a maximum length of 127 characters. Commands which exceed this length are ignored, and the associated label is not displayed. A maximum of 100 definitions can be processed; any additional definitions beyond the limit are ignored. You may include in the definition file a command for editing the definition file itself. This will allow you to modify the file even while remaining within the Logicmaster environment.

6.

7. 8.

Example Comenu Definition File


The following is an example Comenu definition file used to create the Comenu shown above.
; This is the Comenu definition file. ; Blank lines and lines starting with a semicolon are ignored. ; The following entry may be used to start the editor on this file, ; so that additional revisions may be made without leaving the LM90 shell. Edit Comenu definitions = edit \LM90\COMENU.DAT ; Disk utilities: Format diskette A: Format diskette B: Check for lost files Delete lost file data Duplicate floppy A: = = = = = format a: /v format b: /v chkdsk /f del \file0*.chk diskcopy a: a:

; Third-party packages: Cadepa grafcet package = \SWN\CADEPA ; User applications: Application 1 = \appl\app1.bat Application 2 = \appl\app2.bat

GFK0466L

Appendix F User Command Menu

F3

Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software

section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

This appendix lists the files created with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. The files are identified here by their extensions. The content of each file is briefly discussed, along with an explanation of when the file is created. None of these files is created during the INSTALL process.

Caution
Do not use MSDOS to copy individual files from one folder to another or to delete files. Doing so may produce unexpected results. MSDOS may only be safely used to copy an entire program folder to another program folder of the same name. You cannot rename a folder with a DOS copy because the folder name is contained in some of the files. There is also a folder marker file, LMFOLDER.30, which must be present in the folder directory. If you have a copy of all files in a folder, but do not know the folder name, you can determine it by examining the _MAIN.DEC file with DOS DEBUG or a file browser program. For example, go to the folder directory with DOS and enter DEBUG _MAIN.DEC at the DOS prompt. At the dash (-) prompt, enter the letter D (for Display) followed by the Enter key. Examine the ASCII data shown at the right side of the screen. The folder name starts at the third character on the fourth line of the ASCII data. Type Q (for Quit) and press Enter to leave DEBUG. Create a directory with the same name as the folder and copy all the files to it and Logicmaster should now be able to access this new folder.

GFK0466L

G1

G
Files in the Program Folder
The following files are associated with program logic. They are created as a result of editing the program.

Note
.PDT and .STE are new file extensions available with Release 3.50 of Logicmaster 9030/20 software. .PDT combines .PRG and .DAT files from earlier releases into one file. .STE combines .SYM and .NXP files from earlier releases into one file. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
The _MAIN.PRG file is created during the first edit session in the program. When a subroutine is declared, its .PDT file is created. The _MAIN.DEC file is created during the first edit session in the program. There is one .DEC file for the entire program. The _MAIN.STE file is created during the first edit session. The .STE file for a subroutine is created when a nickname, reference description, or identifier is first defined within that subroutine. The .EXP file is created when the first comment rung for the program is programmed. The .LH1 file is created during the first edit session. There is one .LH1 file per folder. The .SDE file is created when you press Write (F5). Unlike the other files listed above, .SDE files may be written to any MSDOS directory. The default destination is the current folder.

Extension
.PDT

File Description
This file contains the program logic.

.DEC

This file contains program block declarations, as well as other data including information about the coil usage and retentive sense of the %Q and %M references. This file contains the nicknames, reference descriptions, and identifiers associated with a particular subroutine. This file contains the text for comment rungs. This file contains the header from each .PDT file. This file contains material that was selected and written to a program segment.

.STE

.EXP .LH1 .SDE

G2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

G
When specifying values using the Reference table function, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software creates files to contain this information. The folder may contain these two files for each reference type. Only reference types which permit overrides may have override files. (The %I reference is used here only as an example.) When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
The _MAIN.I file is created when data is first entered for any %I reference. There is only one .I file per folder. The _MAIN.IO file is created when data is first entered for any %I reference. There is only one .IO file per folder.

Extension
.I .IO

File Description
The _MAIN.I file contains initial values for %I references. The _MAIN.IO file contains initial override data for %I references.

When specifying formats using the reference table function, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software creates files to contain this information. Extension
.RDF

File Description
The .RDF files contain information specifying the formats for reference data.

When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File


The FIXED.RDF and MIXED.RDF files are created when a reference format is specified for any of the fixed or mixed tables, respectively. A folder may contain up to two of these files.

The configurator packages creates files to contain the configuration data. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
The IOCFG.CFG and CPUCFG.CFG files are created when any configuration data is first edited.

Extension
.CFG

File Description
The IOCFG.CFG file contains infor mation about the I/O configuration for the program. The CPUCFG.CFG file contains information about the CPU configuration for the program.

Teach files are used to store a sequence of keystrokes that may be repeated. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
The .DEF file is created when Teach mode is entered and a file name is specified.

Extension
.DEF

File Description
This file contains keys that were pressed while in Teach mode.

GFK0466L

Appendix G Files Created with Logicmaster 9030/20 Software

G3

G
Files in the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Home Directory
For your convenience, Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software creates files that store information to be used as defaults the next time the software is booted. When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
The .DAT file is created using Logicmaster 9030 software when modem information is saved. The .PSU files are created when Save (F7) is pressed.

Extension
.DAT

File Description
The modem auto dial feature writes information in the MODEM.DAT file. This file is only used with Logicmaster 9030 software. These files contain setup information that is specified using the Program mer Setup functions. A file name may be specified for these setup files. Default file names are %COM1.PSU or %COM2.PSU, %PLC030.PSU, and %WSI030.PSU. These files contain information that can be used as defaults on the Printer Serial Port Setup, Select SNP Connections, and Programmer WSI Serial Port Setup screens, respectively. This file contains information that is specified using the Print functions.

.PSU

.SET

.FLD

The LAST30.FLD file contains the name of the selected folder.

A PRINT.SET file is created when information on the Setup Printer Parameters screen is saved. The SCRPRINT.SET file is associated with information on the Select Screen Print Destination screen. The .FLD file is created when the first folder is created when booting the software. It is used as the default the next time the software executes.

Cross Reference Data Files


Print function cross reference data files are not automatically deleted when you exit the print function. You can, however, specify that the files be deleted at the end of a cross reference listing by setting the Delete Files After Use field on the Cross Reference screen to Y (Yes). (Refer to chapter 9, section 3, Print Program," for more information.) When Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Software Creates the File
A .XRF file is created for each logic block when printing a listing containing cross reference tables, reference use tables, or inladder cross references. A PRINT.XOV file is created when the all blocks option is selected while printing a listing containing cross reference tables, reference use tables, or inladder cross references. GFK0466L

Extension
.XRF

File Description
The .XRF file contains cross reference data for a single logic block. The PRINT.XOV file contains data for managing the .XRF files.

.XOV

G4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

Appendix H Common User Errors

section level 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

Error Message: File System Error


If the message, File System Error, occurs, the FILES allocated in the CONFIG.SYS file is probably too low. Change or add this line to the CONFIG.SYS file: FILES=20 You must then reboot your computer in order to activate the new value for FILES in the modified CONFIG.SYS file. To reboot your computer, press CTRL-ALT-Delete. If this line already exists, try changing the number to 30 (i.e., FILES=30) and rebooting your computer.

Error Message: Read/Write PLC Initialization Aborted


If the message, Read/W rite PLC Initialization Failure, occurs while attempting to run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, the WSI Board may not be seated properly. Re-install the WSI Board in the computer slot or try another slot. If this does not correct the problem, the board may be bad.

Error Message: Constant Out of Range


If the message, Constant Out of Range occurs while trying to enter hexadecimal constants, you may be trying to enter hex constants into integer type functions. Use the Types (F10) function softkey to change the function type.

Error Message: Invalid CPU


You have connected to a different type of PLC, such as a Series 9070 PLC rather than a Series 9030. Exit to the top level Logicmaster menu and press Shift-F3 or Shift-F5 to select the proper type of PLC

GFK-0466L

H-1

H
Error Message: "No Communications"
This message is displayed when you press Alt-M to go into Monitor or On-Line Mode and Logicmaster fails to communicate to the PLC. Check that the cable and converter are connected to the proper computer port and that the computer and PLC are using the same data rate and parity. Check the computer settings under F7 Programmer Mode and Setup, then F4 PLC Comm. Serial Port Setup. Check the PLC settings by selecting the Configuration package with F2. then F1 for I/O Config, left arrow to the CPU module and <F10> to zoom into the port settings. A small loopback test program, LB, in the LM90 directory is very helpful in checking serial ports. Go to the LM90 directory under DOS (i.e., CD \LM90) and type LB, then select the COM port you are using, 1 or 2. Unplug the far end of the RS232 cable and short pins 2 and 3 with a paper clip or wire and the TD/RD (Transmit/Receive) should Pass. Short pins 7 and 8 on a 9 pin cable(or 4 to 5 on a 25 pin cable) and the RTS/CTS should Pass. Press any key to exit the LB program. Both TD/RD and RTS/CTS signals must pass for Logicmaster to communicate. If both fail, try the other COM port. If RTS/CTS 'passes' with no jumper wire, it may be a modem port.

Cannot Install the Software


You must have at least 1.4 Megabytes of hard disk space and an additional 600K bytes of temporary hard disk space if Lotus/Intel/Microsoft expanded memory (LIM 3.0 or higher) is not available for Logicmaster 9030/20 software. Also, be sure the CONFIG.SYS file has files set to at least 20, i.e., FILES=20. If the message, The unarchive program failed (PK11)", occurs, check the CONFIG.SYS file. It should have the line FILES=20. If it does, try changing that to FILES=30, reboot the computer, and try the INSTALL procedure again. If the message, The unarchive program failed (PK1)", occurs, try installing the software again. If the INSTALL procedure still fails, the INSTALL diskette is probably bad.

Error Message: Comm Driver Not Loaded"


If the message, Comm Driver Not Loaded" occurs, you may be trying to run the standard serial communications version of Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software without the correct version of MSDOS and/or without a memory manager. Refer to chapter 1, Introduction," for a list of what you will need in order to run the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software.

Printer Output is Garbled


If the Specify Graphics Printer option was enabled in the Logicmaster 90 setup package, make sure that the attached printer supports the IBM graphics character set. If you have a serial printer, make sure the appropriate serial port has been configured with the MSDOS mode command to match the printer settings. The MSDOS mode command should be used to configure the serial printer port before starting up the Logicmaster 90 software package. For more information, see chapter 6, Programmer Setup."
H2 Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998 GFK0466L

H
Error Message: Port/File Access Denied"
Attempting to print logic to a virtual drive which is full results in the error Port/File access denied." To correct the problem, delete some files from your virtual disk.

System Software Error ID: 0000 EX: 0000


Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software does not have enough available RAM to perform the operation. Check the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files to remove any device drivers or Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs in order to free more RAM.

Busy Message Displayed After Load


The message, Loading . . ." will continue to be displayed after a load operation fails because of incompatible files. To clear the busy message, press any key.

Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board"


Some users of IBMclone computers have experienced difficulty using Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. The computer backplane clock rate for the WSI Board slot should not be greater than 8 mHz. In addition, certain device drivers installed by CONFIG.SYS when DOS is booted can prevent the expansion bus from performing 8bit data transfers with the Work Station Interface (WSI) Board. When this situation occurs, the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software displays the error message, Error detected in WSI Board," during initialization. To correct the problem for a COMPAQ computer: 1. 2. Copy CONFIG.SYS to CONFIG.SAV to preserve the original version of the CONFIG.SYS file. Examine the CONFIG.SYS file (type CONFIG.SYS) for a DEVICE statement similar to one of these statements: device=xxxxxx.sys bus 16 device=c:xxx/sys bus 16 device=c:xxx.sys <other parameters> bus 16 where <other parameters> represents any number of words or numbers separated by spaces. 3. 4. 5. Using a text editor such as EDLIN, remove bus 16" from the statement. Save the modified version. Power the computer off and on. A warm boot (i.e., pressing CTRLALTDelete) will not reset the hardware for correct 8bit operation.

If some other application program requires the unmodified form of the device driver, different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file can be used for it and for Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software. A good method for managing this technique is to use a separate batch file to copy each version when it is needed from its permanent, distinctive file name (e.g., CONFIG.LM) to CONFIG.SYS.
GFK0466L Appendix H Common User Errors H3

H
Trouble Communicating with the Series 9030 or Series 9020 PLC Error Message: Error Detected in WSI Board Port" Error Message: Error Loading Code into WSI Board"
Certain boards installed in the computer can conflict with the interrupt used by the Work Station Interface Board. The WSI Board uses the expansion bus IRQ3 interrupt request line. IRQ3 is assigned to the COM2 serial port and is also used by other communication adapters. If the WSI Board is installed in a computer where COM2 is used by an application which requires the use of interrupts (e.g., serial mouse), then neither the WSI Board nor the COM2 application will operate properly. The WSIB2 Board has a softwareconfigurable interrupt request line. Refer to the information on PLC communications options in appendix C, Programmer Environment Setup, for information on moving the interrupt request line to one that does not conflict. The WSI Board uses the MSDOS memory addresses ranging from CE00:0 to CE00:1FFF. Other applications must avoid this address range. It may be possible to configure the application to use a different address range than that of the WSI Board. Consult the documentation for the conflicting application for more information. The WSI Board uses the I/O port addresses 310 hex to 313 hex. Other applications must avoid these port addresses in order to prevent conflicts.

H4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Appendix

I Variable Declaration Table Import/Export Using Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format
section level 1 1 figure_ap level 1 table_ap level 1

Comma Separated Variable (CSV) Format and SNF Format


To import to and export from the Variable Declaration Table, Logicmaster 6.0 and later uses an extension of the industrystandard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format called Shared Name File (SNF) format. Importing an SNF into the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to define nicknames ahead of time in a spreadsheet program. Exporting an SNF from the Variable Declarations Table gives you the ability to use the exported file with CIMPLICITYtand third party operator interfaces. The Shared Name File (or SNF) format is an extension of the industrystandard Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format. If you are planning on importing a file into the Variable Declarations Table as discussed on page 341, you must ensure that your file is in SNF format. When exporting Variable Declarations as discussed on page 343, Logicmaster places the files into SNF format (see page 341 for more information on SNF format). SNF files contain two types of information, Comments and Records. Comment lines begin with the Comment Line Sequence ## (i.e., two consecutive pound characters as the first nonblank characters in the line). Records, except for Header Section records (see below), do not begin with the Comment Line sequence.

Note
The ability to import and export CSV files is a Release 6 or later feature.

General SNF Format Rules


D Shared Name Files shall have a default extension of .SNF". The recommended naming convention is that the filename be the same as the source file (folder) from which the SNF is generated. Comment lines begin with the double pound sign (##") character sequence as the first nonblank character. Comment lines may appear anywhere within the SNF, but may not occur inside a record. Records continued over several lines may not have intervening comment lines.
I1

D D D
GFK0466L

I
D The SNF will consist of three sections which must occur in order: (1) an optional Header section (2) a required Field Names section (3) a required Data section. D All sections are made up of comma separated variable (CSV) records. Each CSV record is composed of a list of fields separated by commas. Individual fields may be enclosed within double quotation marks, and fields that contain commas must be enclosed within quotes. All records in a section must include the same fields, and the fields must be in the same order in each record. Fields in records may be left empty, but empty fields must be delimited with commas like all other fields. Spaces surrounding the comma delimiters in a record are ignored. To include leading or trailing spaces in a field, surround the field with quotation marks. Records may span one or more lines of text in an SNF file. A line of text in an SNF file ends with the new line character ( or character sequence) appropriate for the operating system. The last line of text in the file must include a new line character. Any line beginning with a double colon sequence (::) is considered a continuation of the record started on the previous line. Fields must be contained within a single line, and their trailing comma delimiter must follow the field on the same line as the field (i.e., lines of text followed by continuation lines must end in a nonquoted comma). Blank lines are not allowed. The maximum line size is 2000 characters. The maximum record size is 2000 characters not counting continuation characters and new line characters. The maximum number of fields in a record is 100.

D D

D D D D

Header Section Rules


D D D Header section records may not span multiple lines. The Header section contains structured comments which provide some context for the file. All header section entries must be accepted by any package using the SNF format, but they need only interpret and use the ones they recognize.

Field Names Section Rules


D D D D D The Field Names Section contains one and only one record. The Field Names Section begins with the first noncomment line in the file. Field Names are case insensitive. PT_ID must be the first field in the Field Names section. No empty field are permitted in the Field Names section.

I2

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

I
Data Section Rules
D D D D D D D The Data Section follows the Field Names Section. The Data Section begins on the first noncomment line after the Field Name section and continues to the end of the file. Predefined Keywords in the Data section are case insensitive. PT_IDs in the Data Section are case insensitive. Empty fields are permitted in the Data section, but they must be delimited by commas. If the PT_ID field is empty, the ADDR field must be present and not empty. The format of numbers shall be whatever Excel 5.0 uses as a default when creating a CSV files.

The Header Section


This section of the SNF contains fields which define the context of the SNF. The Header section has four keywords currently defined. It is expected that additional keywords will be defined by GE Fanuc and in addition customers will wish to add their own keywords.


##&&Creator ##&&CreateDate ##&&ProgDate ##&&FileType ##&&DelVarDecl This identifies the program which specified the content of this SNF file. Three possible values generated by GE Fanuc programs are as follows: CIMPLICITY" or LOGICMASTER". Other values for this field will not cause an error. This specifies the date when this SNF file was created. The date format shall be in the format (d)dmmmyyyy", for example, 31MAY1994, 4NOV1986, or 11Sep1994 The date of the creation of the program with which this SNF file is associated. If Logicmaster is creating the SNF file, this field contains the date the program was last updated. This identifies what type of data is contained within this SNF. The pos sible values for this field are as follows: I/O" and I/O_WITH_FAULTS." (I/O" is the only value currently implemented; I/O WITH FAULTS" is reserved for future reference.) This identifies the blocks for which the Variable Declaration Table should be deleted before the import occurs. The possible values are ALLBLOCKS" to delete the Variable Declaration of all blocks, _MAIN" to delete the program's global Variable Declaration, or the name of the desired blocks can be listed (as in the second example shown below). EXAMPLES #&&DelVarDecl, _MAIN or #&&DelVarDecl, _MAIN, Block1, SLIDE or #&&DelVarDecl, ALLBLOCKS
GFK0466L Appendix I Shared Name File (SNF) Format I3

I
The Field Names Section
This section of the SNF is used to specify the names of the fields in the Data section, and the order of these named fields. The order of the fields in the field names section is the order to be used in all records of the Data section. The field names recognized by Logicmaster are shown below.


Field Name
PT_ID ADDR DESC

Note: Cimplicityr recognizes these field names plus field names specified in the Cimplicityr Systems Import/Export Utility Operation Manual (GFK0923). Meaning of This Field

Logicmaster Equivalent

PT_TYPE

Tag Name of this point * A mnemonic reference to a PLC memory location. An ASCII string describing what data this point represents. What type of data is being described by this point

Nickname Reference Reference Description No Logicmaster equiva lent (I/O is the only valid entry at this time.)

*There are additional field names used by Cimplicity. For those field names refer to the Cimplicity documentation. Additional fields which are not supported by the importing program will be ignored without error. The field name order as shown in the above table is the preferred order.

Specifying a Block Other Than _MAIN


To specify a block in which to place the variable declaration during import, use the following syntax, reference_address,block_name (the quotation marks are required). If the block name exceeds the seven (7) character maximum, the import will abort. In addition, if the specified block name does not exist, the import will be aborted. The following example demonstrates the syntax needed: PT_ID, ADDR, DESC Input1, %I1, First input" Input2, %I2, BLOCK1", Second input" Output1, %Q1, First output" Output2, %Q2, BLOCK1","Second output" If the import of this file is initiated in _Main, Input1 and Output1 will be defined in the variable declarations for _MAIN while Input2 and Output2 will be defined in the variable declarations for BLOCK1.

I4

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

I
Example of Variable Declaration Table
VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE %I00001 %I00002 %Q00001 %R00001 %AI0001 %AQ0001 NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION SNERT I2 BLIVET TIC101 REBLIV DIVOT Starting point Begin Allowable over Temperature Setpoint 101 Analog input Output

Example of an SNF File with All of Variable Declaration Table Selected for Export
##&&Creator, LOGICMASTER ##&&CeateDate,2-June-95 ##&&FileType,I/O PT_ID,ADDR,DESC,PT_TYPE SNERT,%I00001,Starting point, I2,%I00002,Begin, BLIVET,%Q00001,Allowable over, TIC101,%R00001,Temperature Setpoint 101, REBLIV,%AI0001,analog input, DIVOT,%AQ0001,Output,

Example of an Excel Spreadsheet Which Can Be Saved as a CSV for Import into Logicmaster
##Example of Excel spreadsheet which can be saved as a CSV file to be imported ##&&Creator ##&&CreateDate ##&&FileType PT_ID SNERT Excel 2June95 I/O ADDR %I00001 %I00001 %R00001 DESC Starting point PT_TYPE

I2
TIC101

Begin Temperature Setpoint 101 Analog input Output

REBLIV DIVOT

%AI0001 %AQ0001

##PT_ID is the equivalent of Nickname ## ADDR is the equivalent of Reference

After saving this spreadsheet as a CSV file and then importing it into the Variable Declaration Table, the fields will be the same as the first example shown above.
GFK0466L Appendix I Shared Name File (SNF) Format I5

I
Longer Example CSV (SNF) File
The following is an example of the CSV format (i.e., SNF format) created by Logicmaster. This example was exported from Logicmaster as noted in the first four lines. The double pound sign and double ampersand denotes commented lines. If you had created this in a spreadsheet program, it would look the same without the commented lines.
##&&Creator,LOGICMASTER ##&&CreateDate,17MAR1995 ##&&ProgDate,21FEB1995 ##&&FileType,I/O PT_ID,ADDR,DESC,PT_TYPE D_HATCH,%I00001,Dry Hatch Status,BOOL W_HATCH,%I00002,Wet Hatch Status,BOOL A_RESET,%I00008,Alarm Reset,BOOL ALM_ACK,%Q01000,Alarm Acknowledge from BCS,BOOL BCS_INT,%Q01001,BCS initialization,BOOL NEXT_BT,%Q01002,Next Batch,BOOL AGIT_ON,%M01001,Agitator Status, BULK_ON,%M01002,Bulk Ingred Valve Status, STEAM_O,%M01003,Steam Valve Status, AGIT_SP,%R00011,Agitate Speed Setpnt,INT TEMP_SP,%R00012,Reactor Temp Setpnt,INT AGIT_T,%R00013,Agitate Time (seconds),INT BULK_AD,%R00014,Bulk Add Measure (lbs),INT PHCTL1A,%R00021,BulkAddPhase Control Reg #1,INT PHCTL1B,%R00022,BulkAddPhase Control Reg #2,INT PH_CB1A,%R00023,BulkAddPhase Ctl But Reg #1,INT PH_CB1B,%R00024,BulkAddPhase Ctl But Reg #2,INT INTL_R1,%R00025,BulkAddPhase Intlock Reg,INT PHSTS_1,%R00026,BulkAddPhase Status Reg,INT BK_WGT,%R00027,Bulk Added Weight,INT R_TEMP,%AI0001,Reactor Temp,INT LIQ_LEV,%AI0002,ReactorLiquid Level,INT AGIT_S,%AI0003,Agitate Speed,INT ST_F_RT,%AI0004,Steam Flow Rate,INT AGIT_SC,%AQ0001,Agitate Speed Command,INT ST_V_PO,%AQ0002,Steam Valve Position,INT

I6

Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User's Manual - September 1998

GFK0466L

Index Numbers
350 and higher CPU modules, configuring the Run/Stop switch, 1017 351 CPUs, storing a program created for a 341 or lower CPU to a 351 CPU, 87 351, 352, and 363 and CPU modules, con figuring the SNP ports, 1018 351/2 CPUs, selecting a folder created for another CPU, 74 configuring an APM, 1073

B
Backing up program folders, 78 BAS/CCM mode, 1062 Base rack, selecting the, 1026 power supply, 1029 Base selection for the CPU 211, 1033 BASIC mode, 1062 BCD4, 315 Binary display format, 413 Bit, 315 Bit operation functions, 310 Block declarations, 318 Block edit, 3104 bumpless run mode store function, 3104 Block locking feature, 360 displaying the lock status of the subrou tine, 364 EDITLOCK, 360 permanently locking a subroutine, 364 PERMEDITLOCK, 360, 362 PERMVIEWLOCK, 360, 362 unlocking a subroutine, 363 VIEWLOCK, 360 Block memory usage, 517 block checksum, 517 block name, 517 block's explanation text size, 517 block's logic memory size, 517 block's symbol table size, 517 Borders, 350 Bumpless run mode store function, 3104 Byte, 315

A
Access level, 229, 54 ADC module, 1082 Address overlap, 106 Alphanumeric display coprocessor mod ule, 1082 ALT keys, 13, 224, E1 Analog Combo, Configuring, 1094 Analog Output, High Density, 1090 Analog, configuring an Analog Combo, 1094 Annotation, 17, 330, 72 comment, 330 nickname, 330 reference description, 330 Annotation files, 83 APM APM commands, 1080 configuring a single axis APM, 1074 configuring a twoaxis APM, 1073 configuring an APM, 1073 ASCII characters, 414 ASCII display format, 413 ASCII string entry, 45 Auto dial feature, 213 Autonext highest reference, 390 AUTOEXEC.BAT file, 24 Automatically inserting references, 396 Axis positioning module APM commands, 1080 configuring a single axis APM, 1074 configuring a twoaxis APM, 1073
GFK0466L

C
Cabling, 22 CCM ONLY mode, 1061, 1069 CCM/PROG mode, 1062 CCM/RTU mode, 1070 CCM/SNP mode, 1072
Index1

Index
CFG file, G3 CGA video snow suppression, C3 Changing the configuration of a slot, 107 CHKDSK (MSDOS) command, 27 Clearing PLC memory, 811 Clearing program folders, 712 CMM configuring a CMM, 1067 CCM ONLY mode, 1069 CCM/RTU mode, 1070 CCM/SNP mode, 1072 RTU ONLY mode, 1070 RTU/CCM mode, 1070 RTU/SNP mode, 1072 SNP ONLY mode, 1071 SNP/CCM mode, 1072 SNP/RTU mode, 1072 modes of configuration, 1067 selecting the configuration mode, 1068 Coil checking, 392 MULTIPLE, 393 SINGLE, 393 WARN MULTIPLE, 393 Coil Reference Printing, 916 Colon, double, 331 Colors, palette, C4 COM1, 19, 64, 610, 623 port requirements, 65 COM2, 19, 64, 610, 623 port requirements, 65 Comenu, F1 Comm driver not loaded error, H2 Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format, 341, I1 exporting variable declarations, 343 guidelines for format and field names, I1 importing variable declarations, 341 Command line, 228 Comment, 330 COMMENT instruction, 346 Comment, rung, creating footers in list ings, 348350 Comments, rung, 346 adding text, 347 creating borders, 350
Index2

creating longer comments, 351 inserting a rung comment, 346 printing a title and subtitle, 351 starting a new page of comments, 351 Communications driver, 66 communications driver load order, 68 expanded memory, 67 extended memory, 67 MSDOS memory areas defined, 67 MSDOS system memory, 67 Communications driver load order, 68 Communications module configuring a CMM, 1067 CCM ONLY mode, 1069 CCM/RTU mode, 1070 CCM/SNP mode, 1072 RTU ONLY mode, 1070 RTU/CCM mode, 1070 RTU/SNP mode, 1072 SNP ONLY mode, 1071 SNP/CCM mode, 1072 SNP/RTU mode, 1072 configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet module, 1063 modes of configuration, 1067 selecting the configuration mode, 1068 Compliant memory managers, 613 CONFIG.SYS file, 24 Configurable memory limits, 1024 Configuration CPU, 111 I/O, 101 Configuration lesson, B1 Configuration of 350 and higher CPUs, Memory protection, 1018 Configuration of 351 and higher CPUs, userconfigurable memory, 1024 Configuration of 364 CPUs, TCP/IP Ether net configuration, 1021 Configuration reference view, 10101 detail screen, 10103 displaying the rack screen, 10104 overlapping references, 10105 reference view table, 10102 Configuration software, 14, 221 accessing the print configuration screen, 919 configuration lesson, B1 CPU configuration, 14 exiting the software, 218
GFK0466L

Index
functions, 221 I/O configuration, 15 main menu, 221 menu tree, 222 print configuration, 918 printing configuration, 110 starting the software, 217 version number, 221 Configurations, tested, 618 Configuring memory for the communica tions driver, 66 Conflicts, port usage, 612 Constant out of range error, H1 Continuation coil, 373 Continuation contact, 373 Control functions, 313 Conventional memory, 616 Conversion functions, 312 Copying configuration, 106 Copying program folders, 714 Copying program folders to diskettes, 715 Copying program folders to the hard drive, 714 Counters, 35 CPU 211, configuring the, 1031 CPU configuration, 14, 111 changing the PLC date and time, 113 changing the SNP ID name, 114 fault display and clearing, 14 PLC date and time, 112 PLC memory allocation, 14 PLC memory limits, 115 PLC time and date, 14 SNP ID, 114 storing the CPU configuration to the PLC, 111 system response to faults, 14 CPU module, configuring the, selecting a different CPU module, 1013 CPU, configuring the, 109 Creating a program, 16 Creating program folders, 74 Cross references, 910 deleting files after printing, 913
GFK0466L

including as part of the ladder logic, 911 including explicit and/or implicit cross references in the table, 912 instruction symbols, 910 parameters, 911 print coil references, 916 print reference tables, 914 printing separate reference use tables or one single table, 912 printing separate tables or one single table, 911 selecting reference types for printing cross references, 912 specifying a directory to store cross ref erence data files, 913 CSV and SNF formats, I1 CSV format, 341, I1 exporting variable declarations, 343 guidelines for formatting and field names, I1 importing variable declarations, 341 CTRL keys, 13, 224, E1 Current program, status of, 228 Cutting selected rungs, 378

D
DAT file, G4 Data move functions, 311 Data types, 315 BCD4, 315 bit, 315 byte, 315 int, 315 real, 315 word, 315 Data zoom feature, 316 Date, 112 changing the PLC date, 113 Date, PLC, 14 DEC file, G2 Decrement reference address, 388 DEF file, G3 Default configuration, 102 Default reference table format, 418 Delete column function, 385
Index3

Index
Delete instruction function, 387 Delete row function, 386 Deleting program folders, 77 Deleting the configuration of a module, 107 DINT, 315 Direct connection, 63 Direction of the search, 399 Discrete reference tables, 411 Discrete references, 44 changing the values of a word of dis crete references, 48 forcing a discrete reference, 48 removing overrides, 410 using overrides, 49, 410 Disk drive setup, C5 Display all mode, 352 Display formats, 411, 413 ASCII, 413 binary, 413 changing the display format, 413, 415 changing the format of a table, 415 defining a mixed table, 422 deleting a line of a mixed reference table, 423 editing the title of a mixed reference table, 421 hexadecimal, 413 mixed reference table, 420 mixed userdefined table, 413 moving the cursor in a mixed reference table, 424 real integer, 413 returning to default values, 418 signed double integer, 413 signed integer, 413 timer/counter format, 417 timer/counter format in a mixed refer ence table, 424 tmrctr format, 413 Displaying file settings, 612 Displaying port settings, 611 Double colon, 331 Double precision integer, 315 Drawer, 71
Index4

E
Editing a program, 16, 31 autonext highest reference, 390 automatically inserting references, 396 block edit, 3104 changing register values, 3114 changing the display mode, 352 coil checking, 392 continuation coil, 373 continuation contact, 373 cutting selected rungs, 378 delete column, 385 delete instruction, 387 delete row, 386 deleting a rung, 376 editing a rung, 367, 369 editor options, 392 forcing and overriding discrete refer ences, 3113 generic search by reference type, 3103 implicit search, 3103 including rungs from a file, 381 increment/decrement reference ad dress, 388 inserting or editing rungs, 3104 ladder logic program elements, 32 modifying a reference address or constant, 3111 modifying instructions, 3110 move logic down, 384 move logic right, 383 online editing/monitoring, 3104 open space functions, 374, 382 pasting previously cut rungs, 379 program annotation, 330 program entry, 323 program format, 318 quick search for a coil, 3103 rung comments, 346 search and replace function, 3101 search function, 398 selecting rungs, 377 subroutine blocks, 357 substitution groups, 3106 substitutions, 3105 variable declaration table, 333 viewing variable declarations, 376 writing selected rungs to a file, 380 Editing functions, 17 EDITLOCK, 360 Editor options, 392 automatically inserting references, 396
GFK0466L

Index
coil checking, 392 EEPROM, 813 Embedded high speed counter, Series 9020 configuring the embedded HSC for a CPU 211, 1056 configuring the embedded HSC mod ule, 1050 Enhanced GCM, 1083, 1085 Enhanced Genius communications mod ule, 1083, 1085 Entry teach file, 226 Equality of logic, 229 Error detected in WSI board, H3 Error detected in WSI board port, H4 Error loading code into WSI board, H4 Error messages, H3 cannot install the software, H2 comm driver not loaded, H2 constant out of range, H1 error detected in WSI board, H3 error detected in WSI board port, H4 error loading code into WSI board, H4 file system error, H1 invalid CPU, H1 no communications, H2 port/file access denied, H3 printer output is garbled, H2 read/write PLC initialization aborted, H1 system software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000, H3 trouble communicating with the Series 9030 or 9020 PLC, H4 Errors, common user, H3 Exiting the software, 216 EXP file, G2 Expanded memory, 67, 616 Expansion rack, selecting an, 1029 Explicit cross references, 912 Explicit search, 399 Extended memory, 67 Fault table I/O, 512 PLC, 58 File system error, H1 Files, G1 .CFG file, G3 .DAT file, G4 .DEC file, G2 .DEF file, G3 .EXP file, G2 .FLD file, G4 .I file, G3 .IO file, G3 .LH1 file, G2 .PDT file, G2 .PSU file, G4 .RDF file, G3 .SDE file, G2 .SET file, G4 .STE file, G2 .XOV file, G4 .XRF file, G4 cross reference data files, G4 in the home directory, G4 in the program folder, G2 FLD file, G4 Folder functions, 72, 73 autoselect function, 75 automatic folder selection, 76 backing up program folders, 78 clearing program folders, 712 copying program folders, 714 copying program folders to diskettes, 715 deleting program folders, 77 locking/unlocking program folders, 713 renaming program folders, 711 restoring program folders, 79 selecting/creating program folders, 74 Folder functions, program, 19 Folders, program, 19, 218, 71 annotation files, 72 autoselect function, 75 automatic folder selection, 76 backing up program folders, 78 clearing program folders, 712 copying program folders, 714 copying program folders to diskettes, 715 deleting program folders, 77 drawer, 71 locking/unlocking program folders, 713
Index5

F
Fault display and clearing, 14, 17
GFK0466L

Index
names, 72 program folder functions, 72 renaming program folders, 711 restoring program folders, 79 selecting/creating program folders, 74 TEMP program folder, 72 Folders, programs, considerations when using a 351 or 352 CPU, 74 Footers in listings, 348350 Forcing a discrete reference, 48 Forcing and overriding discrete refer ences, 3113 Foreign (thirdparty) modules, configur ing, 1099 Function key assignments, 227 High memory area, 614 High speed counter module, Series 9030, configuring the HSC module, 1050 HSC module, 1050

I
I file, G3 I/O configuration, 15, 101 APM commands, 1080 changing the configuration of a slot, 107 configuration reference view, 10101 configuration validation, 106 configuring 9030 I/O modules, 1045 configuring a CMM, 1067 configuring a GBC, 1088 configuring a GCM, 1083 configuring a PCM, 1057, 1058 configuring a single axis APM, 1074 configuring a twoaxis APM, 1073 configuring an ADC module, 1082 configuring an APM, 1073 configuring an embedded HSC for a CPU 211, 1056 configuring an enhanced GCM, 1083 configuring an I/O link interface mod ule, 1048 configuring an I/O link master module, 1049 configuring the CPU 211, 1031 configuring the HSC module, 1050 configuring thirdparty modules, 1099 copying configuration from slot to slot, 106 CPU 331, 104 CPU module, 109 CPU311, 10slot rack, 105 CPU311, 5slot rack, 105 default configuration, 102 deleting the configuration of a module, 107 displaying the rack screen, 104 enhanced GCM, 1085 I/O base selection for the CPU 211, 1033 moving the configuration of a module to another slot, 108 rack screen, 15 saving the configuration to disk, 108 selecting a different CPU module, 1013 selecting an expansion rack, 1029 selecting the base rack, 1026
GFK0466L

G
Gateway address, 1021 GBC, 1088 GCM, 1083 Generic I/O modules, 1047 Generic search, 3103 Genius Bus Controller, 1088 configuring, 1088 Genius communications module, 1083 Grounding, 22

H
Hardware, 12 cabling, 22 grounding, 22 keyboards, 224 standard serial communications version setup, 23 WSI board, 22 WSI version setup, 22 Help (ALTH), 13 Help screens, 13 help (ALTH), 13 key help (ALTK), 13 mnemonic help (ALTI), 13 Hexadecimal display format, 413 High Density Analog Output, 1090
Index6

Index
selecting the configuration mode of a CMM, 1068 selecting the configuration mode of a PCM, 1059 I/O fault table, 512 clearing the fault table, 515 date and time faults were last cleared, 512 entries overflowed, 512 fault description, 512 fault table entries, 513 number of faults in the fault table, 513 PLC time/date, 512 top fault displayed, 512 total faults, 512 zooming into the fault table, 514 I/O link interface module, configuring an, 1048 I/O link master module, configuring an, 1049 I/O modules, configuring 9030, 1045 generic I/O modules, 1047 IBMcompatible graphics printer, C3 Identifier table, 335, 340 Implicit cross references, 912 Implicit search, 399, 3103 Including rungs from a file, 381 Increment reference address, 388 Instruction mnemonics, D1 Instructions, programming mnemonics, D1 INT, 315 IO file, G3 IP address, 1021 Configuration, 1021 Isolated network, 1021 Keyboard status, 228 Keyboards, 224 Keyswitch, 18, 230, 61, C3

L
Ladder logic, 318 accepting a rung, 326 block declarations, 318 creating/editing program logic, 319 data zoom feature, 316 entering nicknames and reference de scriptions, 331 exiting rung entry, 329 inserting functions, 327 inserting logic elements, 324 language rules, 320 markers, 318 power source, 318 program entry, 323 program format, 318 program logic, 16, 318 rungs, 318 structure of a rung, 319 using mnemonics, 323 variable declarations, 16, 318 Ladder logic program elements, 32 bit operation functions, 310 control functions, 313 conversion functions, 312 data move functions, 311 data types, 315 data zoom feature, 316 math functions, 36 relational functions, 39 relay functions, 33 table functions, 311 timers and counters, 35 Left to right reference display mode (ALTN), 47 LH1 file, G2 Loading from PLC to programmer, 83 Locking program folders, 713

K
Key functions, 13, 224 Key help (ALTK), 13 Key Switch configuration for 350 and higher CPUs, 1017 Keyboard functions, 224 Keyboard macros, 224
GFK0466L

M
Markers, 318 Math functions, 36 Memory allocation, 14
Index7

Index
Memory limits, configurable, 1024 Memory limits, PLC, 115 Memory manager compliant memory managers, 613 restrictions, 613 specifications, 613 tested configurations, 618 using conventional memory on an 80386 or higher computer, 616 using expanded memory on an 80386 or higher computer, 616 using the high memory area on an 80386 or higher computer, 614 using the upper memory block on an 80386 or higher computer, 615 using video RAM, 617 Memory protection configuration for 350 and higher CPUs, 1018 Memory usage, 517 Memory, PLC, 516 amount of memory available, 516 amount of program memory occupied, 516 amount of program memory remaining, 516 model number, 516 PLC ID, 516 software revision, 516 Memory, program, 18 Message line, 228 Micro PLC, 1036 Micro PLC, Configuring, 1036 Mixed reference table, 420 defining a mixed table, 422 deleting a line, 423 editing the title, 421 moving the cursor, 424 timer/counter format, 424 Mixed table display format, 413 Mnemonic help (ALTI), 13 Mnemonics, 323 Mnemonics, instruction, D1 Model 9030 I/O modules, generic I/O modules, 1047 Model 9030 I/O modules, configuring, 1045 Modem, 213
Index8

Modifying a reference address or constant, 3111 Modifying instructions, 3110 Monitor mode, 18, 230, 62 Move logic down function, 384 Move logic right function, 383 Moving the configuration of a module to another slot, 108 MSDOS, 13 CHKDSK command, 27 memory areas defined, 67 system memory, 67 MSDOS memory areas expanded memory, 67 extended memory, 67 MSDOS system memory, 67 Multidrop configuration, 63, 114 MULTIPLE coil check, 393

N
Name Server IP address, 1021 Names, 72 Nickname, 330 NULL (blank) string, 57

O
OEM protection, 57 Offline mode, 18, 230, 62 Online editing/monitoring, 3104 block edit, 3104 changing register values, 3114 forcing and overriding discrete refer ences, 3113 inserting or editing rungs, 3104 modifying a reference address or constant, 3111 modifying instructions, 3110 substitution groups, 3106 substitutions, 3105 Online mode, 18, 230, 62 Open space functions, 374, 382 delete column, 385 delete instruction, 387 delete row, 386
GFK0466L

Index
move logic down, 384 move logic right, 383 Operation, 21 auto dial feature, 213 COMENU.DAT file, F1 exit, 216 exiting the programming or configura tion software, 218 keyboard functions, 224 keyboards supported, 224 screen format, 227 setup package, 216 software installation, 24 standard serial communications version hardware setup, 23 starting the programming or configura tion software, 217 startup, 216 teach mode (keyboard macros), 224 user command menu, F1 using a modem, 213 using a teach file to enter the software, 226 WSI version hardware setup, 22 Option modules configuring a CCM module, 1067 configuring a GCM module, 1083 configuring a Genius Bus Controller module, 1088 configuring a High Speed Counter module, 1050 configuring a PCM module, 1057 configuring a TCP/IP Ethernet module, 1063 configuring an ADC module, 1082 configuring an APM module, 1073 Output, High Density Analog, 1090 Overlapping references, 106, 10105 Overrides, 49, 410 Overriding discrete references, 3113 creating, changing, removing pass words, 55 current level, 54 enabling/disabling passwords, 56 OEM protection, 57 password active, 54 privilege levels, 18 Pasting previously cut rungs, 379 Pause mode, 88 PCM, 1057 configuration modes, 1057 configuring a PCM, 1058 BAS/CCM mode, 1062 BASIC mode, 1062 CCM ONLY mode, 1061 CCM/PROG mode, 1062 PCM CFG mode, 1059 PROG PRT mode, 1060 PROG/CCM mode, 1062 selecting the configuration mode, 1059 PCM CFG mode, 1059 PCM configuration software, 217 PDT file, G2 Periodic subroutines, 365 PERMEDITLOCK, 360, 362 PERMVIEWLOCK, 360, 362 PID function, 316 PLC changing the PLC date and time, 113 changing the SNP ID name, 114 clearing memory, 811 date and time, 112 fault display and clearing, 14 PLC and program memory information, 18 PLC memory allocation, 14 SNP ID, 114 starting/stopping PLC execution, 17 sweep time display and change, 17 system response to faults, 14 time and date, 14 PLC communications options, C6 PLC communications serial port setup, 64 displaying file settings, 612 displaying port settings, 611 port usage conflicts, 612 saving the port setup, 612 setting up a port, 611 standard serial COM port, 64
Index9

P
Pagination guidelines, 920 Palette colors, C4 Password protection, 18, 53 access description, 54 access level, 54 changing the privilege level, 54
GFK0466L

Index
WSI serial port setup, 619 PLC control and status, 51 block memory usage, 517 changing the privilege level, 54 configured reference sizes, 518 creating, changing, removing pass words, 55 enabling/disabling passwords, 56 I/O fault table, 512 OEM protection, 57 password protection, 53 PLC CPU sweep control, 519 PLC fault table, 58 PLC memory used, 516 run/stop PLC, 52 security access level, 54 PLC CPU sweep control, 519 changing the sweep mode, 520522 PLC fault table, 58 clearing the fault table, 511 date and time faults were last cleared, 58 entries overflowed, 58 fault descriptions, 59 fault location, 59 fault table entries, 59 number of faults in the fault table, 510 PLC time/date, 58 top fault displayed, 58 total faults, 58 zooming into the fault table, 511 PLC memory, 516 amount of memory available, 516 amount of program memory occupied, 516 amount of program memory remaining, 516 model number, 516 PLC ID, 516 software revision, 516 PLC memory limits, 115 PLC state, 229 PLC/programmer status, 229 access level, 229 current program, 228 keyboard status, 228 logic equality, 229 PLC state, 229 programmer operating mode, 229 scan time, 229 SNP ID, 229
Index10

Port configuration for 351, 352, and 363 CPUs, 1018 Port requirements, 65 Port usage conflicts, 612 Power source, 318 Power supply, configuring the, 1029 Print configuration accessing the print configuration screen, 919 CPU configuration data, 920 destination of the listing, 920 detailed configuration screens, 920 I/O rack, 920 number of first rack to print, 920 number of last rack to print, 920 pagination guidelines, 920 parameters, 920 reference view tables, 920 specifying a file name, 920 starting page number, 920 subtitle, 920 title, 920 Print functions, 110, 91 examples, 921 menu, 92 print coil references, 916 print configuration, 918 print program, 97 print reference tables, 914 printer parameters, 93, 94 selecting a screen print device, 95 sending screen prints to a printer, 95 sending screens to a file, 96 Print program, 97 all blocks, 98 cross reference parameters, 911 cross references, 910 deleting files after printing cross refer ences, 913 file name, 99 from/to rung, 99 header page, 98 IL logic, 98 including cross references as part of the ladder logic, 911 including explicit and/or implicit cross references in the cross reference table, 912 logic, 98 port, 99 print program parameters, 98 printing separate reference use tables or one single table, 912
GFK0466L

Index
printing separate tables of cross refer ences or one single table, 911 selecting reference types for printing cross references, 912 shortcuts for printing program logic, 99 specifying a directory to store cross ref erence data files, 913 starting page number, 99 subtitle, 98 title, 98 variable declaration table, 98 Print reference tables address range, 915 header page, 915 overrides, 915 printing value tables, 915 specifying a file name, 915 specifying the destination of the listing, 915 starting page, 915 subtitle, 915 title, 915 Printer options, C3 Printer parameters, 93, 94 changing setup printer parameters, 93 control characters, 94 line feed with carriage return, 94 number of lines per page, 94 paper width, 94 printer setup sequences, 94 Printer serial port setup, 623 Privilege levels, 18, 54 PROG PRT mode, 1060 PROG/CCM mode, 1062 Program block declarations, 16 Program edit run mode store, storing a changed block, 3104 Program editing, 31 Program entry, 323 accepting a rung, 326 automatically inserting references, 340 entering nicknames and reference de scriptions, 331 entering variable declarations, 336 exiting rung entry, 329 inserting functions, 327 inserting logic elements, 324 selecting a reference table, 329 using mnemonics, 323
GFK0466L

Program folder functions, 19, 72, 73 Program folder names, 72 Program folders, 19, 218, 71 annotation files, 72 autoselect function, 75 automatic folder selection, 76 backing up program folders, 78 clearing program folders, 712 copying program folders, 714 copying program folders to diskettes, 715 deleting program folders, 77 drawer, 71 locking/unlocking program folders, 713 names, 72 program folder functions, 72 renaming program folders, 711 restoring program folders, 79 selecting/creating program folders, 74 TEMP program folder, 72 Program format, 318 block declarations, 318 creating/editing program logic, 319 ladder logic language rules, 320 markers, 318 power source, 318 Program block declarations, 16 program logic, 16, 318 rungs, 318 structure of a ladder logic rung, 319 variable declarations, 16, 318 Program instructions bit operation functions, 310 control functions, 313 conversion functions, 312 data move functions, 311 data types, 315 data zoom feature, 316 math functions, 36 relational functions, 39 relay functions, 33 table functions, 311 timers and counters, 35 Program logic, 16, 318, 319 Program memory, 18 Program utility functions, 110, 81 clearing PLC memory, 811 loading from PLC to programmer, 83 pause mode, 88 read/write/verify EEPROM, 813 run mode store function, 88 STOPtoRUN transition, 88
Index11

Index
storing to PLC from programmer, 85 verifying a program with the PLC, 89 Programmable coprocessor module configuring a PCM, 1057, 1058 BAS/CCM mode, 1062 BASIC mode, 1062 CCM ONLY mode, 1061 CCM/PROG mode, 1062 PCM CFG mode, 1059 PROG PRT mode, 1060 PROG/CCM mode, 1062 modes of configuration, 1057 selecting the configuration mode, 1059 Programmer environment setup, C1 disk drive setup, C5 palette colors, C4 PLC communications options, C6 saving the setup, C9 terminal and printer options, C3 Programmer keyswitch, 18, 230, 61, C3 Programmer operating mode, 18, 229, 230, 52, 62 mode selection, 62 Programmer setup, 212, 61 menu, 61 PLC communications serial port setup, 64 printer serial port setup, 623 programmer operating mode, 62 selecting SNP connections, 63 standard serial COM port, 64 view modes setup, 621 WSI serial port setup, 619 Programming instruction mnemonics, D1 Programming lesson, A1 Programming software, 16, 219 annotation, 17 automatically inserting references, 396 block declarations, 318 coil checking, 392 creating/editing a program, 16 displaying tables of reference values, 17 editing functions, 17 exiting the software, 218 fault display and clearing, 17 functions, 219 main menu, 219 menu tree, 220 PLC and program memory information, 18
Index12

PLC sweep time display and change, 17 printing programs, 110 program folder functions, 19 program folders, 19 program logic, 16, 318 program utility functions, 110 programmer operating mode, 62 programming lesson, A1 selecting the programmer operating mode, 18, 230 setting up PLC communications using a WSI board, 19 setup for PLC communications using standard COM serial ports, 19 starting the software, 217 starting/stopping PLC execution, 17 status information, 220 system security, 18 transferring programs, 110 variable declarations, 16, 318 version number, 219 PSU file, G4

Q
Quick search, 3103

R
Rack screen, 104 RAM, 27 video RAM, 617 RDF file, G3 Read EEPROM, 813 Read/write PLC initialization aborted er ror, H1 Real, 315 Real format, 413 Reference description, 330 Reference display mode (ALTN), 47 Reference overlap, 106 Reference sizes, configured, 518 Reference table values, changing, 44 Reference tables, 17, 41 ASCII characters, 414 ASCII format, 413 ASCII string entry, 45
GFK0466L

Index
binary format, 413 changing a register reference, 44 changing display formats, 411 changing reference table values, 44 changing the display format, 413, 415 changing the format of a table, 415 changing the reference display mode (ALTN), 47 changing the values of a word of dis crete references, 48 defining a mixed table, 422 deleting a line of a mixed reference table, 423 discrete and register references, 44 discrete reference tables, 411 display formats, 413 displaying a reference table, 42, 43 editing the title of a mixed reference table, 421 forcing a discrete reference, 48 hexadecimal format, 413 mixed reference table, 420 mixed userdefined table, 413 moving the cursor in a mixed reference table, 424 moving the cursor in a reference table, 43 real format, 413 register reference tables, 412 removing overrides, 410 returning to default values, 418 signed double integer format, 413 signed integer format, 413 system reference table, 419 timer/counter format, 417 timer/counter format in a mixed refer ence table, 424 tmrctr format, 413 using overrides, 49, 410 using the cursor to select a reference table, 43 Register reference tables, 412 Register references, 44 changing a register reference, 44 Register values, changing, 3114 Relational functions, 39 Relay functions, 33 Renaming program folders, 711 Replacement target, 399 Restoring program folders, 79
GFK0466L

RTU ONLY mode, 1070 RTU/CCM mode, 1070 RTU/SNP mode, 1072 Run mode store function, 88 Run PLC, 52 Run/Stop switch configuration for 350 and higher CPUs, 1017 Rung, 318 Rung comments, 346 adding text, 347 creating borders, 350 creating longer comments, 351 inserting a rung comment, 346 printing a title and subtitle, 351 starting a new page of comments, 351 Rung edit, 367, 369 autonext highest reference, 390 changing register values, 3114 continuation coil, 373 continuation contact, 373 cutting selected rungs, 378 delete column, 385 delete instruction, 387 delete row, 386 deleting a rung, 376 forcing and overriding discrete refer ences, 3113 including rungs from a file, 381 increment/decrement reference ad dress, 388 modifying a reference address or constant, 3111 modifying instructions, 3110 move logic down, 384 move logic right, 383 open space functions, 374, 382 pasting previously cut rungs, 379 selecting rungs, 377 substitution groups, 3106 substitutions, 3105 viewing variable declarations, 376 writing selected rungs to a file, 380

S
Saving the configuration to disk, 108 Saving the port setup, 612 Scan time, 229 Scope of the search, 399
Index13

Index
Screen format, 227 command line, 228 function key assignments, 227 message line, 228 PLC/programmer status, 229 status information, 228 Screen print device, 95 sending screen prints to a printer, 95 sending screens to a file, 96 SDE file, G2 Search and replace function, 3101 Search function, 398 action to perform on the search target, 399 direction of the search, 399 explicit vs. implicit search, 399 generic search by reference type, 3103 implicit search, 3103 legitimate replacement items, 3100 quick search for a coil, 3103 replacement for target, 399 scope of the search, 399 starting point of the search, 399 target to search for, 399 Security, 18, 53 privilege levels, 18 Selecting a different CPU module, 1013 Selecting a reference table, 329 Selecting program folders, 74 Selecting rungs, 377 Serial number, 29 Serial ports, 623 displaying file settings, 612, 620 displaying port settings, 611, 620 PLC communications serial port setup, 64 port usage conflicts, 612 saving the port setup, 612, 620 setting up a port, 620 setting up a port for PLC communica tions, 611 setting up PLC communications using a WSI board, 19 setup for PLC communications using standard COM serial ports, 19 standard serial COM port, 64 WSI serial port setup, 619 SET file, G4 Setting up a port, 611
Index14

Setup package, 216 Shared Name File format exporting variable declarations to SNF, 343 importing variable declarations, 341 Shortcuts for printing program logic, 99 Signed double integer display format, 413 Signed integer, 315 Signed integer display format, 413 Simple isolated network configuration, 1021 SINGLE coil check, 393 SNF format exporting variable declarations to SNF, 343 importing variable declarations, 341 Snow suppression, C3 SNP connections, 63 file name, 63 port connection, 63 SNP ID, 63 SNP ID numbers, 63 SNP ID, 229, 114 changing the SNP ID name, 114 SNP ONLY mode, 1071 SNP port configuration for 351, 352, and 363 CPUs, 1018 SNP/CCM mode, 1072 SNP/RTU mode, 1072 Software error ID: 0000 EX: 0000, H3 Software installation, 24 AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files, 24 installation instructions, 28 programmer setup, 212 RAM required, 27 serial number, 29 subdirectories created, 24 Standard COM serial ports, 19 Standard serial COM port, 64 communications driver load order, 68 compliant memory managers, 613 configuring memory for the commu nications driver, 66 displaying file settings, 612 displaying port settings, 611
GFK0466L

Index
DOS memory areas defined, 67 expanded memory, 67 extended memory, 67 memory manager restrictions, 613 memory manager specifications, 613 MSDOS system memory, 67 port requirements, 65 port usage conflicts, 612 requirements, 65 running Logicmaster 90 software, 69 saving the port setup, 612 setting up a port for PLC communica tions, 611 setting up the computer's serial port, 610 tested configurations, 618 using conventional memory on an 80386 or higher computer, 616 using expanded memory on an 80386 or higher computer, 616 using the high memory area on an 80386 or higher computer, 614 using the upper memory block on an 80386 or higher computer, 615 using video RAM, 617 Starting up the software, 216 using a teach file to enter the software, 226 Status address location, 1021 Status functions, 18, 51 block memory usage, 517 configured reference sizes, 518 I/O fault table, 512 OEM protection, 57 password protection, 53 PLC CPU sweep control, 519 PLC fault table, 58 PLC memory used, 516 run/stop PLC, 52 security access level, 54 Status information, 220, 228 access level, 229 current program, 228 Keyboard status, 228 logic equality, 229 PLC and programmer information, 228 PLC state, 229 programmer operating mode, 229 scan time, 229 SNP ID, 229 STE file, G2 Stop PLC, 52
GFK0466L

STOPtoRUN transition, 88 Storing the CPU configuration to the PLC, 111 Storing to PLC from programmer, 85 considerations when storing to a 351 CPU, 87 Subnet mask, 1021 Subroutine blocks, 357 adding subroutine block declarations, 358 deleting subroutine block declarations, 359 displaying the lock status of the subrou tine, 364 editing subroutine block declarations, 358 locking/unlocking subroutines, 360 periodic subroutines, 365 permanently locking a subroutine, 364 searching for subroutine block declara tions, 359 unlocking a subroutine, 363 using goto to move the cursor, 359 zooming into subroutine block logic, 359 Substitution groups, 3106 Substitutions, 3105 Sweep control active, 519 online adjustments, 519 Sweep mode, configured, 1010, 1032 Sweep time, 17 Symbols, cross reference instruction, 910 System configuration (CONFIG.SYS) file, 24 System reference table, 419

T
Table functions, 311 Target, search, 399 TCP/IP Ethernet Configuration on 364 CPUs, 1021 TCP/IP Ethernet Module, configuration, 1063 Teach mode, 224 creating teach sequences, 225 pausing the playback of a teach se quence, 225
Index15

Index
playing back a teach sequence, 225 using a teach file to enter the software, 226 TEMP program folder, 72, 75 Terminal options, C3 Thirdparty modules, configuring, 1099 Time, 112 changing the PLC time, 113 Time, PLC, 14 Timer interrups (periodic subroutines), 365 Timer/counter format, 417 Timers, 35 Instruction mnemonics and description, 35 Substitution groups, 3106 TMRCTR format, 413 Transferring programs, 110 Troubleshooting, H3

V
Valid configuration, 106 Variable declaration table, 333 automatically inserting references, 340 CSV format files, 341 cut/pasting variable declarations, 339 deleting variable declarations, 339 displaying the table, 334 editing variable declarations, 339 entering variable declarations, 336 exporting CSV files, 343 exporting SNF files, 343 identifier table, 335 importing CSV format files, 341 importing SNF files, 341 searching for variable declarations, 339 using goto, 339 viewing the identifier table, 340 window, 335 Variable declarations, 16, 318 Verify EEPROM, 813 Verifying a program with the PLC, 89 Version of software, 219, 221 Video RAM, 617 Video snow suppression, C3 View mode (ALTN), 621 View modes setup, 621 changing the view mode, 622 VIEWLOCK, 360

U
Unlocking program folders, 713 Upper memory block, 615 Use tables, 912 User command menu, F1 accessing the user command menu, F1 comenu, F1 creating a COMENU.DAT file, F2 example COMENU definition file, F3 User errors, common, H3 User reference sizes, 518 Userconfigurable memory limits, 1024 Utilities, menu, 81 Utility functions, 81 clearing PLC memory, 811 clearing reference override tables, 812 loading from PLC to programmer, 83 pause mode, 88 read/write/verify EEPROM, 813 run mode store function, 88 STOPtoRUN transition, 88 storing to PLC from programmer, 85 verifying a program with the PLC, 89 Utility functions, program, 110
Index16

W
WARN MULTIPLE coil check, 393 Word, 315 Work station interface (WSI) board, 22 Write EEPROM, 813 Writing selected rungs to a file, 380 WSI board, 19, 22 WSI serial port setup, 619 baud rate, 620 displaying file settings, 620 displaying port settings, 620 file name, 620 modem turnaround time, 620 parity, 620 saving the port setup, 620
GFK0466L

Index
setting up a port, 620 stop bits, 620

X
XOV file, G4 XRF file, G4

GFK0466L

Index17